WO2020241099A1 - Actinic-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, method for forming pattern, and method for producing electronic device - Google Patents

Actinic-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, method for forming pattern, and method for producing electronic device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020241099A1
WO2020241099A1 PCT/JP2020/016565 JP2020016565W WO2020241099A1 WO 2020241099 A1 WO2020241099 A1 WO 2020241099A1 JP 2020016565 W JP2020016565 W JP 2020016565W WO 2020241099 A1 WO2020241099 A1 WO 2020241099A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
repeating unit
general formula
acid
radiation
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2020/016565
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
務 吉村
研由 後藤
金子 明弘
宏哲 岡
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to JP2021522692A priority Critical patent/JP7254917B2/en
Publication of WO2020241099A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020241099A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F220/00Copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and only one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical or a salt, anhydride ester, amide, imide or nitrile thereof
    • C08F220/02Monocarboxylic acids having less than ten carbon atoms; Derivatives thereof
    • C08F220/10Esters
    • C08F220/12Esters of monohydric alcohols or phenols
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/038Macromolecular compounds which are rendered insoluble or differentially wettable
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/039Macromolecular compounds which are photodegradable, e.g. positive electron resists
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/20Exposure; Apparatus therefor

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, a pattern forming method, and a method for manufacturing an electronic device.
  • lithography method In the manufacturing process of semiconductor devices such as ICs (Integrated Circuits, integrated circuits) and LSIs (Large Scale Integrated Circuits, large-scale integrated circuits), micromachining by lithography using photosensitive compositions is performed.
  • the lithography method include a method of forming a resist film with a photosensitive composition, exposing the obtained film, and then developing the film.
  • EUV Extreme ultimate
  • the present invention provides a sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition that suppresses the occurrence of defects in a pattern formed by using EUV light and can obtain a pattern having excellent LWR performance even when stored for a long period of time.
  • the task is to do.
  • Another object of the present invention is to provide a pattern forming method and a method for manufacturing an electronic device regarding the above-mentioned sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition.
  • RQ represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group.
  • RQ1 to RQ3 each independently represent an alkyl group. Two of RQ1 to RQ3 may be combined with each other to form a ring.
  • the repeating unit a1 is RQ is a hydrogen atom or A group having one or more specific groups selected from the group consisting of a lactone group, a sulton group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group, a sulfonamide group, an amide group, a carboxylic acid group, and a photoacid generating group.
  • the sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of [1] to [3], which comprises a repeating unit a4 and represents no group X.
  • X represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or a halogen atom other than a fluorine atom.
  • L B represents a single bond or -COO-.
  • R B1 is a lactone group, a sultone group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group, a sulfonamido group, an amide group, a carboxylic acid group, and one or more specific groups selected from the group consisting of photoacid generator groups, as well as a fluorine atom Represents a group Z that has a group and is not a elimination group.
  • the actinic light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin according to any one of [1] to [9], wherein the compound that generates an acid by irradiation with active light or radiation contains a compound represented by the general formula (PB).
  • PB general formula
  • M 1 + and M 2 + each independently represents an organic cation.
  • L represents a divalent organic group.
  • a ⁇ represents an acid anion group.
  • B ⁇ represents a group represented by any of the general formulas (B-1) to (B-4).
  • * represents a bonding position.
  • R B represents an organic group.
  • an actinic light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition capable of suppressing the occurrence of defects in a pattern formed by using EUV light and obtaining a pattern having excellent LWR performance even when stored for a long period of time.
  • the numerical range represented by using "-" in the present specification means a range including the numerical values before and after "-" as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
  • the notation that does not describe substitution or non-substitution includes a group having a substituent as well as a group having no substituent.
  • the "alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • the substituent is preferably a monovalent substituent.
  • the term "organic group” refers to a group containing at least one carbon atom.
  • examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
  • the bonding direction of the divalent group described in the present specification is not limited unless otherwise specified.
  • Y when Y is -COO- in the compound represented by the general formula "XYZ", Y may be -CO-O-, and is -O-CO-. You may. Moreover, the said compound may be "X-CO-O-Z" or "X-O-CO-Z".
  • (meth) acrylic is a general term including acrylic and methacrylic, and means “at least one of acrylic and methacrylic”.
  • (meth) acrylic acid means “at least one of acrylic acid and methacrylic acid”.
  • the term “active ray” or “radiation” refers to, for example, the emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light: Extreme Ultraviolet), X rays, and electron beams (EB). : Electron Beam) and the like.
  • light means active light or radiation.
  • exposure refers to not only exposure to the emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet rays, X-rays, EUV light, etc., but also electron beams and It also includes drawing with particle beams such as ion beams.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw), the number average molecular weight (Mn), and the degree of dispersion (also referred to as molecular weight distribution) (Mw / Mn) of the resin are GPC (Gel Permeation Chromatography) apparatus (HLC-manufactured by Toso Co., Ltd.).
  • GPC GPC measurement (solvent: tetrahydrofuran, flow rate (sample injection volume): 10 ⁇ L, column: TSK gel Multipore HXL-M manufactured by Toso Co., Ltd., column temperature: 40 ° C., flow velocity: 1.0 mL / min, detector: differential refractometer It is defined as a polystyrene conversion value by a rate detector (Refractive Index Detector).
  • 1 ⁇ is 1 x 10-10 m.
  • the acid dissociation constant (pKa) represents pKa in an aqueous solution
  • the following software package 1 is used to obtain a value based on a database of Hammett's substituent constants and known literature values. , It is a value obtained by calculation. All pKa values described herein indicate values calculated using this software package.
  • pKa can also be obtained by the molecular orbital calculation method.
  • a specific method for this there is a method of calculating H + dissociation free energy in a solvent based on a thermodynamic cycle.
  • water is usually used as the solvent, and DMSO (dimethyl sulfoxide) is used when pKa cannot be obtained with water.
  • the calculation method of H + dissociation free energy can be calculated by, for example, DFT (density functional theory), but various other methods have been reported in the literature and are not limited to this.
  • DFT density functional theory
  • There are a plurality of software that can perform DFT and examples thereof include Gaussian16.
  • pKa in the present specification refers to a value obtained by calculation based on a database of Hammett's substituent constants and publicly known literature values using software package 1, and pKa is calculated by this method. If it cannot be calculated, the value obtained by Gaussian 16 based on DFT (density functional theory) shall be adopted.
  • the actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition of the present invention (hereinafter, also referred to as “resist composition”) will be described.
  • the resist composition of the present invention may be a positive type resist composition or a negative type resist composition. Further, it may be a resist composition for alkaline development or a resist composition for organic solvent development.
  • the composition of the present invention is typically a chemically amplified resist composition.
  • the resist composition of the present invention contains an acid-degradable resin and a compound that generates an acid by irradiation with active light or radiation, and the acid-degradable resin is repeatedly represented by the general formula (A1) described later. It has a repeating unit a1 which is a unit.
  • EUV light has a wavelength of 13.5 nm, which is shorter than that of ArF (wavelength 193 nm) light and the like, so that the number of incident photons when exposed with the same sensitivity is small.
  • the acid-decomposable resin contained in the resist composition contains a repeating unit a1 which is an acrylic repeating unit ( ⁇ -fluoroacrylic repeating unit) having a fluorine atom at the ⁇ -position.
  • a1 is an acrylic repeating unit ( ⁇ -fluoroacrylic repeating unit) having a fluorine atom at the ⁇ -position.
  • the presence of fluorine atoms at the ⁇ -position of such repeating units adjusts the compatibility of the resin with the developer within an appropriate range while improving the absorption efficiency of EUV light, causing defects in the formed pattern and the occurrence of defects. It is considered that the deterioration of LWR performance is suppressed.
  • the fluorine atom at the ⁇ -position has a small adverse effect on the stability of the acid-degradable resin, and the deterioration of the LWR performance of the formed pattern is suppressed even when the resist composition is stored for a long period of time.
  • the characteristics of the resist composition in which the occurrence of defects in the formed pattern is suppressed are also referred to as the resist composition having excellent defect suppressing properties.
  • the excellent LWR performance of the pattern formed after the resist composition is stored for a long period of time is excellent in the LWR performance of the resist composition after aging. It is also said that the effect of the present invention is excellent when at least one of the defect suppressing property and the LWR performance after aging is excellent in the resist composition.
  • the resist composition contains an acid-decomposable resin (hereinafter, also referred to as “resin (A)”).
  • the resin (A) is typically a resin in which the polarity is increased by the action of an acid, the solubility in an alkaline developer is increased, and the solubility in an organic solvent is decreased.
  • the resin (A) has a group that decomposes by the action of an acid to generate a polar group (in other words, a structure in which the polar group is protected by a leaving group that is eliminated by the action of an acid). Such a group (structure) is also called an acid-degradable group.
  • a resin having an acid-degradable group (that is, a resin having a repeating unit having an acid-degradable group) has an increased polarity due to the action of an acid, an increase in solubility in an alkaline developer, and a decrease in solubility in an organic solvent.
  • the resin (A) may have a repeating unit having a photoacid generating group.
  • the resin (A) preferably has an acid group having an acid dissociation constant (pKa) of 13 or less.
  • the acid dissociation constant of the acid group is preferably 13 or less, more preferably 3 to 13, and even more preferably 5 to 10.
  • the storage stability of the resist composition is excellent, and the development proceeds more satisfactorily.
  • the acid group having an acid dissociation constant (pKa) of 13 or less include a carboxylic acid group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, a fluorinated alcohol group (preferably a hexafluoroisopropanol group), a sulfonic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and the like. Be done.
  • the resin (A) has a repeating unit a1.
  • the repeating unit a1 is a repeating unit represented by the general formula (A1).
  • RQ represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group. Limiting the organic group represented by R Q is not, for example, group (in this case R Q is a leaving group) to form an acid-decomposable group as a whole -COO-R Q may be a, so It does not have to be. It part or whole of R Q may be a group which is an acid-decomposable group, or not. RQ may be a polar group or a non-polar group.
  • R Q is a lactone group, a sultone group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group (or aromatic hydroxyl groups in a non-aromatic hydroxyl groups), a sulfonamido group, an amide group, a carboxylic acid group, and, from the group consisting of photoacid generator groups It may or may not be a group having one or more specific groups to be selected.
  • R Q may have a fluorine atom, or may not have.
  • the content of the repeating unit represented by the general formula (A1) in the resin (A) is preferably 5 to 100 mol%, more preferably 10 to 100 mol%, based on all the repeating units of the resin (A). , 20-100 mol% is more preferred. Two or more kinds of repeating units represented by the general formula (A1) may be used.
  • the repeating unit a1 includes the repeating unit a2 having an acid-degradable group. That is, it is also preferable that the resin (A) has the repeating unit a2. More specifically, the repeating unit a2 is a repeating unit represented by the general formula (A1), and the repeating unit having an acid-degradable group (the polar group is protected by a leaving group that is eliminated by the action of an acid). It is a repeating unit having a structure. In other words, the repeating unit a2 is a form of the repeating unit a1.
  • the polar group in the repeating unit having a structure in which the polar group is protected by the desorbing group desorbed by the action of an acid is preferably an alkali-soluble group, for example, a carboxylic acid group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, or fluorine.
  • Alcohol chemical group sulfonic acid group, sulfonamide group, sulfonylimide group, (alkylsulfonyl) (alkylcarbonyl) methylene group, (alkylsulfonyl) (alkylcarbonyl) imide group, bis (alkylcarbonyl) methylene group, bis (alkylcarbonyl) ) Methylene group, bis (alkylsulfonyl) methylene group, bis (alkylsulfonyl) imide group, tris (alkylcarbonyl) methylene group, acidic group such as tris (alkylsulfonyl) methylene group, alcoholic hydroxyl group and the like. Be done.
  • the polar group is preferably a carboxylic acid group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, a fluorinated alcohol group (preferably a hexafluoroisopropanol group), or a sulfonic acid group.
  • R Q may be a leaving group itself in the general formula (A1). That is, in this case, the leaving group (R Q) polar group (carboxylic acid group) is protected by the structure (acid-decomposable group) is formed, as a whole acidolysis -COO-R Q in the general formula (A1) is It constitutes a sex group. Further, it may be contained partially in the acid-decomposable group of R Q in the general formula (A1), R Q may constitute the acid-decomposable group as a whole.
  • Rx 1 to Rx 3 are independently alkyl groups (linear or branched chain), cycloalkyl groups (monocyclic or polycyclic), and alkenyl groups (straight chain). (Orchid or branched chain) or aryl group (monocyclic or polycyclic).
  • Rx 1 to Rx 3 are alkyl groups (linear or branched chain)
  • Rx 1 to Rx 3 independently represent a linear or branched alkyl group. Two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 may be combined to form a monocyclic or polycyclic ring.
  • the alkyl group of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an isopropyl group, an n-butyl group, an isobutyl group, and a t-butyl group. ..
  • the substituent that the alkyl group may have is preferably a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom.
  • the alkyl group is preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group or an alkyl group having only one selected from the group consisting of a hydroxyl group and a halogen atom as the substituent.
  • the cycloalkyl groups of Rx 1 to Rx 3 include a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclopentyl group or a cyclohexyl group, or a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, an adamantyl group, or the like. Polycyclic cycloalkyl groups are preferred.
  • the aryl group of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, and an anthryl group.
  • the alkenyl group of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is preferably a vinyl group.
  • the ring formed by bonding two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is preferably a cycloalkyl group.
  • the cycloalkyl group formed by combining two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is a cyclopentyl group, a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclohexyl group, or a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, or a tetracyclododecanyl.
  • a polycyclic cycloalkyl group such as a group or an adamantyl group is preferable.
  • the cycloalkyl group formed by combining two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is, for example, a group in which one of the methylene groups constituting the ring has a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom, a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group, or vinylidene. It may be replaced by a group. Further, in these cycloalkyl groups, one or more of the ethylene groups constituting the cycloalkane ring may be replaced with a vinylene group.
  • the substituent that the ring formed by combining two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 may have is a perhalogenated alkyl group (either linear or branched chain, preferably a perfluoroalkyl group, preferably).
  • the number of carbon atoms 1 to 3), a hydroxyl group, or a halogen atom is preferable.
  • the ring is preferably an unsubstituted ring or a ring having only a substituent selected from the group consisting of a perhalogenated alkyl group, a hydroxyl group, and a halogen atom as a substituent.
  • the group represented by the formula (Y1) or the formula (Y2) is, for example, an embodiment in which Rx 1 is a methyl group or an ethyl group, and Rx 2 and Rx 3 are bonded to form the above-mentioned cycloalkyl group. Is preferable.
  • R 36 to R 38 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.
  • R 37 and R 38 may be combined with each other to form a ring.
  • the monovalent organic group include an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group and the like. It is also preferable that R 36 is a hydrogen atom.
  • the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, and aralkyl group may contain a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom and / or a group having a heteroatom such as a carbonyl group.
  • alkyl group cycloalkyl group, aryl group, and aralkyl group
  • one or more methylene groups are replaced with a group having a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom and / or a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group. You may.
  • the formula (Y3) is preferably a group represented by the following formula (Y3-1).
  • L 1 and L 2 independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, or a group in which these are combined (for example, a group in which an alkyl group and an aryl group are combined).
  • .. M represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • Q is an alkyl group that may contain a hetero atom, a cycloalkyl group that may contain a hetero atom, an aryl group that may contain a hetero atom, an amino group, an ammonium group, a mercapto group, a cyano group, and an aldehyde.
  • the alkyl group and the cycloalkyl group for example, one of the methylene groups may be replaced with a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom or a group having a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group.
  • the alkyl group for example, it is preferable that one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms to form a fluoroalkyl group (for example, a fluoroalkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms).
  • L 1 and L 2 are a hydrogen atom and the other is an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, or a group in which an alkylene group and an aryl group are combined.
  • Q, M, and, at least two members to the ring (preferably, 5-membered or 6-membered ring) L 1 may be formed.
  • L 2 is preferably a secondary or tertiary alkyl group, and more preferably a tertiary alkyl group.
  • Examples of the secondary alkyl group include an isopropyl group, a cyclohexyl group and a norbornyl group, and examples of the tertiary alkyl group include a tert-butyl group and an adamantyl group.
  • Tg glass transition temperature
  • activation energy are high, fog can be suppressed in addition to ensuring the film strength.
  • Ar represents an aromatic ring group.
  • Rn represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, or an aryl group.
  • Rn and Ar may be combined with each other to form a non-aromatic ring.
  • Ar is preferably an aryl group.
  • the ring member atom adjacent to the ring member atom directly bonded to the polar group (or its residue) does not have a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom as a substituent.
  • desorbing groups eliminated by the action of an acid include a 2-cyclopentenyl group having a substituent (alkyl group, etc.) such as a 3-methyl-2-cyclopentenyl group, and 1,1,4.
  • a cyclohexyl group having a substituent (alkyl group, etc.) such as 4-tetramethylcyclohexyl group may be used.
  • the repeating unit a2 includes the repeating unit a3 represented by the general formula (A2). That is, the resin (A) preferably has the repeating unit a3.
  • the repeating unit a3 is a repeating unit represented by the general formula (A2), and is a form of the repeating unit a2.
  • RQ1 to RQ3 each independently represent an alkyl group (linear or branched chain).
  • the alkyl groups of RQ1 to RQ3 independently have 1 to 5 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an isopropyl group, an n-butyl group, an isobutyl group, and a t-butyl group. Alkyl groups are preferred.
  • the substituent that the alkyl group may have is preferably a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom.
  • the alkyl group is preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group or an alkyl group having only one selected from the group consisting of a hydroxyl group and a halogen atom as the substituent.
  • Two of RQ1 to RQ3 may be combined with each other to form a ring.
  • a cycloalkyl group is preferable for the ring formed by bonding two of RQ1 to RQ3 .
  • Two of the cycloalkyl group formed by binding of R Q1 ⁇ R Q3 is cyclopentyl, or a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as cyclohexyl group, or a norbornyl group, tetra tricyclodecanyl group, tetracyclo
  • a polycyclic cycloalkyl group such as a dodecanyl group or an adamantyl group is preferable.
  • one of the methylene groups constituting the ring is a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom, a group having a heteroatom such as a carbonyl group, or vinylidene. It may be replaced by a group. Further, in these cycloalkyl groups, one or more of the ethylene groups constituting the cycloalkane ring may be replaced with a vinylene group.
  • the substituent that the ring formed by combining two of RQ1 to RQ3 may have is an alkyl perhalogenated group (either linear or branched chain, preferably a perfluoroalkyl group, It preferably has 1 to 3 carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, or a halogen atom.
  • the ring is preferably an unsubstituted ring or a ring having only a substituent selected from the group consisting of a perhalogenated alkyl group, a hydroxyl group, and a halogen atom as a substituent.
  • the content thereof is preferably 5 to 90 mol% and 10 to 85 mol% with respect to all the repeating units of the resin (A). More preferably, 20 to 70 mol% is further preferable.
  • the repeating unit a2 preferably the repeating unit a3
  • one type may be used alone, or two or more types may be used.
  • repeating unit a4 (repeating unit a5, repeating unit a6) It is also preferable that the repeating unit a1 includes the repeating unit a4. That is, the resin (A) preferably has the repeating unit a4.
  • Repeating units a4 is in the repeating unit represented by the general formula (A1) (repeating unit a1), R Q is a hydrogen atom, or a group X, a repeating unit.
  • Group X consists of a group consisting of a lactone group, a sulton group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group (which may be a non-aromatic hydroxyl group or an aromatic hydroxyl group), a sulfonamide group, an amide group, a carboxylic acid group, and a photoacid generating group.
  • the repeating unit a4 is a form of the repeating unit a1.
  • group X is a choice of R Q is a group having a specific group, and a group not leaving group.
  • the "group that is not a leaving group” means a group that is not the “leaving group that is eliminated by the action of an acid” described with respect to the repeating unit a2. Specifically, the "group that is not a leaving group” does not correspond to the group represented by the above formulas (Y1) to (Y4).
  • the repeating unit a4 is preferably different from the repeating unit a2 and / or the repeating unit a3.
  • R Q is is a group X, may be R Q is a specific group itself may contain certain groups in a part of R Q.
  • the content thereof is preferably 1 to 70 mol%, more preferably 2 to 60 mol%, and 3 to 50 mol% with respect to all the repeating units of the resin (A). % Is more preferable.
  • the repeating unit a4 may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the repeating unit a4 includes a repeating unit a5 having a group X further having a fluorine atom. That is, the resin (A) preferably has the repeating unit a5. More specifically, the repeating unit a5 is a repeating unit represented by the general formula (A1), wherein the RQ is the above-mentioned group X and the above-mentioned group X is a group having a fluorine atom. It is a unit. That is, the repeating unit a5 is a form of the repeating unit a4.
  • the repeating unit a5 includes a repeating unit a6 having a group X having a hexafluoropropanol group (a group represented by "-C (CF 3 ) 2 OH"). That is, the resin (A) preferably has the repeating unit a6. More specifically, the repeating unit 6, in the repeating unit represented by formula (A1), R Q is a foregoing group X, and is a group where the group X has a hexafluoroisopropanol group aspects It is a repeating unit of. That is, the repeating unit a6 is also a form of the repeating unit a4 and the repeating unit a5.
  • R Q of the repeating unit represented by formula (A1) is a hydrogen atom, such repeating units, also referred to as repeating units A4-0.
  • the content thereof is preferably 1 to 30 mol%, more preferably 2 to 20 mol%, and 3 to 3 to all the repeating units of the resin (A). 15 mol% is more preferred.
  • R Q is, as a specific group, lactone group, sultone group, and, if a group X with at least one selected from the group consisting of carbonate group, such repeating units a4, repeated Also called the unit a4-1.
  • the lactone group, the sultone group, and the carbonate group have a fluorine atom as a substituent. That is, it is also preferable that the repeating unit a4-1 is the repeating unit a5.
  • the lactone group or sultone group of the repeating unit a4-1 may have a lactone structure or a sultone structure.
  • the lactone structure or sultone structure is preferably a 5- to 7-membered ring lactone structure or a 5- to 7-membered ring sultone structure.
  • the lactone structure is preferably a structure in which another ring structure is condensed into a 5- to 7-membered ring lactone structure so as to form a bicyclo structure or a spiro structure.
  • the sultone structure is more preferably a 5- to 7-membered ring sultone structure in which another ring structure is fused to form a bicyclo structure or a spiro structure.
  • the lactone group is preferably a lactone group obtained by extracting one or more hydrogen atoms from a ring member atom having a lactone structure represented by any of the following general formulas (LC1-1) to (LC1-22).
  • the sultone group is preferably a sultone group obtained by extracting one or more hydrogen atoms from a ring member atom having a sultone structure represented by any of the following general formulas (SL1-1) to (SL1-3).
  • the lactone structure or sultone structure portion may have a substituent (Rb 2 ).
  • Preferred substituents (Rb 2 ) include, for example, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 4 to 7 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms. Examples thereof include a carboxylic acid group, a halogen atom (preferably a fluorine atom), a hydroxyl group, and a cyano group.
  • n2 represents an integer of 0 to 4. When n2 is 2 or more, Rb 2 existing in plural numbers may be different or may be bonded to form a ring Rb 2 between the plurality of.
  • the repeating unit a4-1 having a sultone group obtained by extracting one or more hydrogen atoms from a ring member atom having a sultone structure represented by any of the formulas (SL1-1) to (SL1-3) is a general formula (SL1-1).
  • the repeating unit represented by A3) is preferable.
  • Ab is a divalent linking group having a single bond, an alkylene group, a monocyclic or polycyclic alicyclic hydrocarbon structure, an ether group, an ester group, a carbonyl group, a carboxylic acid group, or It represents a divalent group that combines these. Among them, a single bond, or a -Ab 1 -COO- linking group represented by are preferred.
  • Ab 1 is a monobonded or divalent linking group, a linear or branched alkylene group, or a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkylene group, which is a methylene group, an ethylene group, a cyclohexylene group, or an adaman.
  • V is a group formed by extracting one hydrogen atom from a ring member atom having a lactone structure represented by any of the general formulas (LC1-1) to (LC1-22), or general formulas (SL1-1) to (SL1-1). It represents a group formed by extracting one hydrogen atom from a ring member atom having a sultone structure represented by any of SL1-3).
  • any optical isomer may be used. Further, one kind of optical isomer may be used alone, or a plurality of optical isomers may be mixed and used. When one kind of optical isomer is mainly used, its optical purity (ee) is preferably 90 or more, more preferably 95 or more.
  • the carbonate group in the repeating unit a4-1 having a carbonate group is preferably contained in the cyclic carbonate group.
  • the repeating unit a4-1 having a carbonate group is preferably a repeating unit represented by the general formula (A4).
  • n represents an integer of 0 or more (preferably 0 to 3).
  • R A 2 represents a substituent. when n is 2 or more, R A 2 existing in plural, may each be the same or different.
  • A represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group is an alkylene group (preferably having 1 to 4 carbon atoms), a divalent linking group having a monocyclic or polycyclic alicyclic hydrocarbon structure, an ether group, an ester group, a carbonyl group, and a carboxylic acid. A group or a divalent group in which these are combined is preferable.
  • Z represents an atomic group forming a monocyclic or polycyclic ring with a group represented by —O—CO—O— in the formula.
  • the monocyclic or polycyclic ring formed by Z together with the group represented by —O—CO—O— in the formula is preferably a 5-membered cyclic carbonate group, and is represented by the following general formula (CC1-1).
  • a cyclic carbonate structure is more preferred. That is, it is preferable that A in the general formula (A4) is bonded to a group formed by extracting one hydrogen atom from the ring member atom of the cyclic carbonate structure represented by the following general formula (CC1-1). ..
  • the cyclic carbonate structure portion in the general formula (CC1-1) may have a substituent (Rb 2 ).
  • Preferred substituents (Rb 2 ) include, for example, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 4 to 7 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms. Examples thereof include a carboxylic acid group, a halogen atom (preferably a fluorine atom), a hydroxyl group, and a cyano group.
  • n3 represents an integer of 0 or 1.
  • the content thereof is preferably 3 to 60 mol%, more preferably 5 to 50 mol%, and 7 to 7 to all the repeating units of the resin (A). 45 mol% is more preferred.
  • the repeating unit a4-1 may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • R Q is a group X having a non-aromatic hydroxyl group as a specific group, if the non-aromatic hydroxyl groups, a hydroxyl group other than hydroxyl groups contained in a fluorinated alcohol group, like this
  • the repeating unit a4 is also referred to as a repeating unit a4-2.
  • the non-aromatic hydroxyl group is a hydroxyl group other than the aromatic hydroxyl group, and is intended, for example, a hydroxyl group other than the hydroxyl group directly bonded to the aromatic ring. Examples of the non-aromatic hydroxyl group include an alcoholic hydroxyl group.
  • the hydroxyl groups other than the hydroxyl group contained in the fluorinated alcohol group include, for example, a hydroxyl group bonded to a carbon atom, and the carbon atom ( ⁇ carbon) to which the hydroxyl group is bonded, a fluorine atom and ⁇ CFR 2 (two Rs are Each of them independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • -CFR 2 includes -CF 3 and the like), and is the above-mentioned hydroxyl group when none of them is bonded.
  • the repeating unit a4-2 is preferably different from the repeating unit a4-1.
  • the repeating unit a4-2 preferably has no fluorinated alcohol group.
  • the repeating unit a4-2 is preferably a repeating unit represented by the general formula (A5).
  • RQ5 represents an alkyl group (linear or branched chain, preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms) or a non-aromatic ring group.
  • Examples of the non-aromatic ring group include a monocyclic hydrocarbon ring group and a polycyclic hydrocarbon ring group.
  • Examples of the monocyclic hydrocarbon ring group include a cycloalkane ring group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms (preferably 3 to 7 carbon atoms) and a cycloalkene ring group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the polycyclic hydrocarbon ring group include a ring-assembled hydrocarbon ring group and a crosslinked ring-type hydrocarbon ring group.
  • Examples of the crosslinked ring-type hydrocarbon ring include a bicyclic hydrocarbon ring, a three-ring hydrocarbon ring, and a four-ring hydrocarbon ring.
  • the crosslinked cyclic hydrocarbon ring may be a condensed ring in which a plurality of 5- to 8-membered cycloalkane rings are condensed.
  • the crosslinked cyclic hydrocarbon ring group is preferably a norbornane ring group, an adamantane ring group, a bicyclooctane ring group, or a tricyclo [5, 2, 1, 0 2, 6 ] decane ring group.
  • alkyl group and the non-aromatic ring group do not have a substituent other than ⁇ (OH) q5 .
  • q5 represents an integer from 1 to 5.
  • the content thereof is preferably 3 to 60 mol%, more preferably 5 to 50 mol%, and 10 to 10 to all the repeating units of the resin (A). 45 mol% is more preferred.
  • the repeating unit a4-2 may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • R Q is a group X having a non-aromatic hydroxyl group as a specific group, the non-aromatic hydroxyl groups, when a hydroxyl group contained in a fluorinated alcohol group, such repeating units a4 Is also referred to as a repeating unit a4-3.
  • the hydroxyl groups contained in the fluorinated alcohol group include, for example, a hydroxyl group bonded to a carbon atom, and the carbon atom ( ⁇ carbon) to which the hydroxyl group is bonded, a fluorine atom and -CFR 2 (two Rs are independent of each other). It represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • -CFR 2 includes -CF 3 and the like), and is the above-mentioned hydroxyl group when at least one is bonded. That is, the repeating unit a4-3 corresponds to the repeating unit a5.
  • the repeating unit a4-3 is preferably different from the repeating unit a4-1 and / or the repeating unit a4-2.
  • the hydroxyl group contained in the fluorinated alcohol group is preferably a hydroxyl group contained in a hexafluoroisopropanol group (a group represented by "-C (CF 3 ) 2 OH"). That is, the repeating unit a4-3 preferably corresponds to the repeating unit a6.
  • the repeating unit a4-3 is preferably a repeating unit represented by the general formula (A6).
  • RQ6 represents an alkyl group (linear or branched chain, preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms), a non-aromatic ring group, or an aromatic ring group.
  • Examples of the non-aromatic ring group include a monocyclic hydrocarbon ring group and a polycyclic hydrocarbon ring group.
  • Examples of the monocyclic hydrocarbon ring group include a cycloalkane ring group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms (preferably 3 to 7 carbon atoms) and a cycloalkene ring group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the polycyclic hydrocarbon ring group include a ring-assembled hydrocarbon ring group and a crosslinked ring-type hydrocarbon ring group.
  • Examples of the crosslinked ring-type hydrocarbon ring include a bicyclic hydrocarbon ring, a three-ring hydrocarbon ring, and a four-ring hydrocarbon ring.
  • the crosslinked cyclic hydrocarbon ring may be a condensed ring in which a plurality of 5- to 8-membered cycloalkane rings are condensed.
  • the crosslinked cyclic hydrocarbon ring group is preferably a norbornane ring group, an adamantane ring group, a bicyclooctane ring group, or a tricyclo [5, 2, 1, 0 2, 6 ] decane ring group.
  • the aromatic ring group preferably has an aromatic ring group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably a benzene ring group, a naphthalene ring group, an anthracene ring group, or a biphenylene ring group.
  • alkyl group, the non-aromatic ring group, and the aromatic ring group do not have a substituent other than ⁇ ( ⁇ C (CF 3 ) 2 OH) q6 .
  • q6 represents an integer from 1 to 5.
  • the content thereof is preferably 3 to 50 mol%, more preferably 5 to 40 mol%, and 10 to 10 to all the repeating units of the resin (A). 35 mol% is more preferred.
  • the repeating unit a4-3 may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • R Q is is a group X having a photoacid generating group as a specific group, such a repeating unit a4, also referred to as repeating units A4-4.
  • R Q has a fluorine atom. That is, the repeating unit a4-4 preferably corresponds to the repeating unit a5.
  • the repeating unit a4-4 is preferably different from the repeating unit a4-1, the repeating unit a4-2, and / or the repeating unit a4-3.
  • the repeating unit a4-4 is preferably a repeating unit represented by the general formula (A7).
  • the two Xfs independently represent an alkyl group (preferably CF 3 ) substituted with a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or at least one fluorine atom. Of the two Xfs, at least one is preferably a non-hydrogen atom.
  • the alkyl group may be linear or branched.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group preferably has only a fluorine atom as a substituent.
  • R 1 and R 2 independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or an alkyl group, and when a plurality of them are present, R 1 and R 2 may be the same or different.
  • the alkyl group may be linear or branched.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the substituent of the alkyl group is preferably a fluorine atom. When the alkyl group has a substituent, it is preferable that the alkyl group has only a fluorine atom as the substituent.
  • L represents a divalent linking group, and when a plurality of L are present, L may be the same or different.
  • the divalent linking group of L is -COO-, -CO-, -O-, -S-, -SO-, -SO 2- , alkylene group, cycloalkylene group, alkenylene group, and a plurality of these. Examples thereof include linked linking groups, and linking groups having a total carbon number of 12 or less are preferable.
  • x represents an integer of 1 to 20
  • y represents an integer of 0 to 10
  • z represents an integer of 0 to 10.
  • M + represents a cation.
  • M + for example, the same cation as M + in the general formula (PA-1) described later can be used.
  • the content thereof is preferably 3 to 40 mol%, more preferably 5 to 25 mol%, and 7 to 7 to all the repeating units of the resin (A). 20 mol% is more preferred.
  • the repeating unit a4-4 may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the repeating unit a1 may include a repeating unit that does not correspond to any of the repeating unit a2, the repeating unit a3, and the repeating unit a4. That is, the resin (A) may have a repeating unit a1 that does not correspond to any of the repeating unit a2, the repeating unit a3, and the repeating unit a4. Such a repeating unit a1 is also referred to as a repeating unit a1-2.
  • the repeating unit a1-2 is preferably a repeating unit represented by the general formula (A1-2).
  • RQ12 represents an alkyl group (linear or branched chain, preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms), a non-aromatic ring group, or an aromatic ring group. However, RQ12 is not a leaving group.
  • Examples of the non-aromatic ring group include a monocyclic hydrocarbon ring group and a polycyclic hydrocarbon ring group.
  • Examples of the monocyclic hydrocarbon ring group include a cycloalkane ring group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms (preferably 3 to 7 carbon atoms) and a cycloalkene ring group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the polycyclic hydrocarbon ring group include a ring-assembled hydrocarbon ring group and a crosslinked ring-type hydrocarbon ring group.
  • Examples of the crosslinked ring-type hydrocarbon ring include a bicyclic hydrocarbon ring, a three-ring hydrocarbon ring, and a four-ring hydrocarbon ring.
  • the crosslinked cyclic hydrocarbon ring may be a condensed ring in which a plurality of 5- to 8-membered cycloalkane rings are condensed.
  • the crosslinked cyclic hydrocarbon ring group is preferably a norbornane ring group, an adamantane ring group, a bicyclooctane ring group, or a tricyclo [5, 2, 1, 0 2, 6 ] decane ring group.
  • the aromatic ring group preferably has an aromatic ring group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and preferably a benzene ring group, a naphthalene ring group, an anthracene ring group, and a biphenylene ring group.
  • the alkyl group, the non-aromatic ring group, and the aromatic ring group do not have, as substituents, the specific group described with respect to the repeating unit a4 and a group containing a specific group in a part thereof.
  • the alkyl group, the non-aromatic ring group, and the aromatic ring group are preferably unsubstituted.
  • the content thereof is preferably 1 to 30 mol%, more preferably 3 to 25 mol%, and 5 to 5 to all the repeating units of the resin (A). 20 mol% is more preferred.
  • the repeating unit a1-2 may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the resin (A) may have a repeating unit that does not correspond to the repeating unit a1 (that is, a repeating unit that does not correspond to the repeating unit represented by the general formula (A1)). Such a repeating unit that does not correspond to the repeating unit a1 is also referred to as a repeating unit b1.
  • Examples of the repeating unit b1 include a repeating unit represented by the general formula (A1-b).
  • X represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or a halogen atom other than a fluorine atom.
  • the alkyl group may be linear or branched.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the substituent of the alkyl group is preferably a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom.
  • the alkyl group has a substituent, it is preferable that the alkyl group has only a hydroxyl group and / or a halogen atom as the substituent.
  • the alkyl group is preferably -CH 3 .
  • the halogen atom other than the fluorine atom is preferably a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, or an iodine atom.
  • L B represents a single bond or -COO-.
  • the carbonyl carbon in -COO- is preferably directly attached to the main chain of the repeating unit.
  • R Q in formula (A1-b) in is the same as R Q in the general formula (A1).
  • the content of the repeating unit b1 (repeating unit represented by the general formula (A1-b), etc.) in the resin (A) is preferably 0 to 95 mol% with respect to all the repeating units of the resin (A). 9 to 90 mol% is more preferable, and 0 to 80 mol% is further preferable. Two or more kinds of repeating units represented by the general formula (A1) may be used.
  • the repeating unit b1 includes the repeating unit b2. That is, the resin (A) preferably has the repeating unit b2.
  • the repeating unit b2 is a repeating unit other than the repeating unit a1 and is a repeating unit having an acid-degradable group (a repeating unit having a structure in which a polar group is protected by a leaving group that is eliminated by the action of an acid). ..
  • the description of the acid-degradable group, the leaving group, and the polar group is as described above.
  • repeating unit b2 includes the repeating unit b3.
  • the resin (A) also preferably has the repeating unit b3.
  • the repeating unit b3 is a form of the repeating unit b2.
  • the repeating unit b3 is a repeating unit represented by the general formula (A2-b).
  • X in the general formula (A2-b) represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or a halogen atom other than a fluorine atom, and is the same as X in the general formula (A1-b).
  • R Q1 ⁇ R Q3 in formula (A2-b) in is the same as R Q1 ⁇ R Q3 in the general formula (A2).
  • the content thereof is preferably 5 to 90 mol% and 10 to 85 mol% with respect to all the repeating units of the resin (A). More preferably, 20 to 70 mol% is further preferable.
  • the repeating unit a2 preferably the repeating unit a3
  • one type may be used alone, or two or more types may be used.
  • the total content of the repeating unit a2 (preferably the repeating unit a3) and the repeating unit b2 (preferably the repeating unit b3) in the resin (A) is 15 to 98 mol% with respect to all the repeating units of the resin (A). Is preferable, 25 to 85 mol% is more preferable, and 35 to 80 mol% is further preferable.
  • the repeating unit b1 includes the repeating unit b4. That is, the resin (A) preferably has the repeating unit b4.
  • the repeating unit b4 is a repeating unit other than the repeating unit a1, and is a lactone group, a sulton group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group (which may be a non-aromatic hydroxyl group or an aromatic hydroxyl group), a sulfonamide group, an amide group, and a carboxylic acid.
  • the "group having the specific group” may be the specific group itself, or the specific group may be contained in a part of the "group having the specific group”.
  • the repeating unit b4 is preferably different from the repeating unit b2 and / or the repeating unit b3.
  • the repeating unit b4 is preferably a repeating unit represented by the general formula (B0).
  • X represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or a halogen atom other than a fluorine atom.
  • the alkyl group may be linear or branched.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the substituent of the alkyl group is preferably a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom.
  • the alkyl group has a substituent, it is preferable that the alkyl group has only a hydroxyl group and / or a halogen atom as the substituent.
  • the alkyl group is preferably -CH 3 .
  • L B represents a single bond or -COO-.
  • the carbonyl carbon in -COO- is preferably directly attached to the main chain of the repeating unit.
  • RB0 represents a hydrogen atom or a group Y.
  • R B0 when represents a hydrogen atom, L B represents -COO-, overall -L B -R B0 represents -COOH.
  • Group Y consists of a group consisting of a lactone group, a sulton group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group (which may be a non-aromatic hydroxyl group or an aromatic hydroxyl group), a sulfonamide group, an amide group, a carboxylic acid group, and a photoacid generating group.
  • "in not leaving” group Y is, specifically, when L B is -COO-, in -COO-R B0, R B0 (group Y) is a polar group (carboxylic acid It is intended to be a non-leaving group that protects the group.
  • the "group that is not a leaving group” means a group that is not the "leaving group that is eliminated by the action of an acid” described with respect to the repeating unit a2. Specifically, the "group that is not a leaving group” does not correspond to the group represented by the above formulas (Y1) to (Y4).
  • R B0 in the formula (B0) is, for example, the same as R Q in the repeating unit a4.
  • the repeating unit b4 preferably includes the repeating unit b5. That is, the resin (A) preferably has the repeating unit b5.
  • the repeating unit b5 is a repeating unit represented by the general formula (B1).
  • X in the general formula (B1) represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or a halogen atom other than a fluorine atom, and is the same as X in the general formula (B0).
  • L B represents a single bond or -COO-.
  • the carbonyl carbon in -COO- is preferably directly attached to the main chain of the repeating unit.
  • RB1 represents the group Z.
  • Group Z consists of a group consisting of a lactone group, a sulton group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group (which may be a non-aromatic hydroxyl group or an aromatic hydroxyl group), a sulfonamide group, an amide group, a carboxylic acid group, and a photoacid generating group. It is a group having one or more specific groups to be selected and a fluorine atom, and is not a elimination group.
  • R B1 in general formula (B1) (group Z) is, for example, the same as R Q in the repeating unit a5.
  • the repeating unit b5 includes a repeating unit b6 having a group Z having a hexafluoropropanol group (a group represented by "-C (CF 3 ) 2 OH"). That is, the resin (A) preferably has the repeating unit b6. More specifically, repeating units b6, in the repeating unit represented by formula (B1), a repeating unit R B1 is a group Z with a hexafluoropropanol group. The repeating unit b6 is also a form of the repeating unit b4 and the repeating unit b5.
  • the content thereof is preferably 1 to 80 mol% with respect to all the repeating units of the resin (A). 3 to 70 mol% is more preferable, and 5 to 65 mol% is further preferable.
  • the repeating unit a4 may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the total content of the repeating unit a4 and the repeating unit b4 in the resin (A) is preferably 1 to 80 mol%, more preferably 3 to 70 mol%, based on all the repeating units of the resin (A). More preferably, it is 5 to 65 mol%.
  • the repeating unit b4 may be a repeating unit b4-0 having a carboxylic acid group as a specific group.
  • a repeating unit in which the fluorine atom directly bonded to the main chain of the repeating unit in the repeating unit a4-0 is replaced with X in the general formula (B0) can be mentioned.
  • the preferable content of the repeating unit b4-0 is the same as that of the repeating unit a4-0.
  • the total content of the repeating unit a4-0 and the repeating unit b4-0 in the resin (A) is preferably 1 to 30 mol%, preferably 2 to 20 mol%, based on all the repeating units of the resin (A). Is more preferable, and 3 to 15 mol% is further preferable.
  • the lactone group contains one hydrogen atom from the ring member atom of the lactone structure represented by any of the above general formulas (LC1-1) to (LC1-22). The lactone group extracted as described above is preferable.
  • one of the ring member atoms of the lactone structure may or may not be the main chain of the repeating unit.
  • the two ring-membered atoms of the lactone structure may or may not be the main chain of the repeating unit.
  • the sultone group contains one hydrogen atom from the ring-membered atom of the sultone structure represented by any of the above general formulas (SL1-1) to (SL1-3). The sultone group obtained by pulling out the above is preferable.
  • one ring member atom of the sultone structure may or may not be the main chain of the repeating unit.
  • the two ring-membered atoms of the sultone structure may or may not be the main chain of the repeating unit.
  • the carbonate group is formed by extracting one or more hydrogen atoms from the ring-membered atom of the cyclic carbonate structure represented by any of the above general formula (CC-1).
  • a sultone group is preferred.
  • one ring-membered atom of the cyclic carbonate structure may or may not be the main chain of the repeating unit.
  • the two ring-membered atoms of the cyclic carbonate structure may or may not be the main chain of the repeating unit.
  • the repeating unit b4-1 As a form of the repeating unit b4-1, the main chain of the repeating unit in the repeating unit a4-1 (the repeating unit represented by the general formula (A3), the repeating unit represented by the general formula (A4), etc.) Examples thereof include repeating units in which the directly bonded fluorine atom is replaced with X in the general formula (B0).
  • the repeating unit b4-1 is preferably different from the repeating unit b4-0.
  • the preferable content of the repeating unit b4-1 is the same as that of the repeating unit a4-1.
  • the total content of the repeating unit a4-1 and the repeating unit b4-1 in the resin (A) is preferably 3 to 60 mol%, preferably 5 to 50 mol%, based on all the repeating units of the resin (A). Is more preferable, and 7 to 45 mol% is further preferable.
  • the repeating unit b4 is a repeating unit having a non-aromatic hydroxyl group as a specific group (preferably as the specific group of the above-mentioned group Y or group Z), and the above-mentioned non-aromatic hydroxyl group is contained in the fluorinated alcohol group.
  • a repeating unit b4 is also referred to as a repeating unit b4-2.
  • the repeating unit b4-2 is preferably different from the repeating unit b4-0 and / or the repeating unit b4-1.
  • the fluorine atom directly bonded to the main chain is contained in the general formula (B0). replaces the X, -COO- directly bonded to the main chain, the general formula (B0) repeating units replaced by L B in the like.
  • the preferable content of the repeating unit b4-2 is the same as that of the repeating unit a4-2.
  • the total content of the repeating unit a4-2 and the repeating unit b4-2 in the resin (A) is preferably 3 to 60 mol%, preferably 5 to 50 mol%, based on all the repeating units of the resin (A). Is more preferable, and 10 to 45 mol% is further preferable.
  • the repeating unit b4 is a repeating unit having a non-aromatic hydroxyl group as a specific group (preferably as the specific group of the above-mentioned group Y or group Z), and the above-mentioned non-aromatic hydroxyl group is contained in the fluorinated alcohol group.
  • a hydroxyl group such a repeating unit b4 is also referred to as a repeating unit b4-3.
  • the repeating unit b4-3 is preferably different from the repeating unit b4-0, the repeating unit b4-1, and / or the repeating unit b4-2.
  • the repeating unit b4-3 preferably corresponds to the repeating unit b6.
  • the fluorine atom directly bonded to the main chain is contained in the general formula (B0). of replaces X, the main chain bonded directly to a -COO- are repeating units replaced by L B in the general formula (B0) and the like.
  • the preferable content of the repeating unit b4-3 is the same as that of the repeating unit a4-3.
  • the total content of the repeating unit a4-3 and the repeating unit b4-3 in the resin (A) is preferably 3 to 50 mol%, preferably 5 to 40 mol%, based on all the repeating units of the resin (A). Is more preferable, and 10 to 35 mol% is further preferable.
  • repeating unit b4 is a repeating unit having a photoacid generating group as a specific group (preferably as the specific group of the above-mentioned group Y or group Z), such a repeating unit b4 is also referred to as a repeating unit b4-4. ..
  • the repeating unit b4-4 preferably corresponds to the repeating unit b5.
  • the repeating unit b4-4 is preferably different from the repeating unit b4-0, the repeating unit b4-1, the repeating unit b4-2, and / or the repeating unit b4-3.
  • the fluorine atom directly bonded to the main chain is contained in the general formula (B0). replaces the X, -COO- directly bonded to the main chain, the general formula (B0) repeating units replaced by L B in the like.
  • the preferable content of the repeating unit b4-4 is the same as that of the repeating unit a4-4.
  • the total content of the repeating unit a4-4 and the repeating unit b4-4 in the resin (A) is preferably 3 to 40 mol%, preferably 5 to 25 mol%, based on all the repeating units of the resin (A). Is more preferable, and 7 to 20 mol% is further preferable.
  • repeating unit b4-5 When the repeating unit b4 is a repeating unit having a group having an aromatic hydroxyl group as a specific group (preferably as the specific group of the above-mentioned group Y or group Z), such a repeating unit b4 is referred to as the repeating unit b4-. Also called 5.
  • the repeating unit b4-5 is preferably different from the repeating unit b4-0, the repeating unit b4-1, the repeating unit b4-2, the repeating unit b4-3, and / or the repeating unit b4-4.
  • the repeating unit b4-5 is preferably a turning unit represented by the general formula (B2).
  • X represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or a halogen atom other than a fluorine atom, and is the same as X in the general formula (B0).
  • X 4 represents a single bond, -COO-, or -CONR 64-
  • R 64 is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group (which may be linear or branched, preferably having a number of carbon atoms). Represents 1 to 5).
  • the carbonyl carbon in -COO- is preferably directly attached to the main chain of the repeating unit.
  • L 4 represents a single bond or an alkylene group (either linear or branched chain, preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms).
  • Ar 4 represents an (n + 1) -valent aromatic ring group.
  • the aromatic ring group is an arylene group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms such as a benzene ring group, a naphthalene ring group, and an anthracene ring group, or a thiophene ring group, a furan ring group, a pyrrole ring group, a benzothiophene ring group, and a benzofuran.
  • Aromatic ring groups containing heterocycles such as a ring group, a benzopyrol ring group, a triazine ring group, an imidazole ring group, a benzoimidazole ring group, a triazole ring group, a thiadiazol ring group, and a thiazole ring group are preferable, and a benzene ring group is preferable. More preferred.
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 5.
  • the (n + 1) -valent aromatic ring group may further have a substituent.
  • Examples of the substituent that the above-mentioned alkyl group of R 64 , alkylene group of L 4 and Ar 4 (n + 1) -valent aromatic ring group can have include a halogen atom (preferably a fluorine atom) and a methoxy group. Examples thereof include an alkoxy group such as an ethoxy group, a hydroxyethoxy group, a propoxy group, a hydroxypropoxy group and a butoxy group; an aryl group such as a phenyl group; and the like. Further, examples of the substituent that the (n + 1) -valent aromatic ring group of Ar 4 can have include an alkyl group (which may be linear or branched, preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms).
  • a 1 or 2.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • a represents an integer of 1 to 3.
  • the content thereof is preferably 3 to 70 mol%, more preferably 10 to 65 mol%, and 7 to 7 to all the repeating units of the resin (A). 60 mol% is more preferred.
  • the repeating unit b4-5 may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the resin (A) can be synthesized according to a conventional method (for example, radical polymerization).
  • the weight average molecular weight of the resin (A) is preferably 1,000 to 200,000, more preferably 3,000 to 20,000, and even more preferably 4,500 to 15,000.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the resin (A) is set to 1,000 to 200,000, deterioration of heat resistance and dry etching resistance can be prevented, and further, deterioration of developability and high viscosity can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the film property from deteriorating.
  • the dispersity (molecular weight distribution) of the resin (A) is usually 1 to 5, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1.2 to 3.0, and even more preferably 1.2 to 2.0.
  • the resin (A) preferably has a high glass transition temperature (Tg) from the viewpoint of suppressing excessive diffusion of generated acid and / or pattern collapse during development.
  • Tg is preferably over 90 ° C., more preferably over 100 ° C., even more preferably over 110 ° C., and particularly preferably over 125 ° C.
  • Tg is preferably 400 ° C. or lower, more preferably 350 ° C. or lower.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the polymer such as the resin (A) is calculated by the following method.
  • the Tg of a homopolymer composed of only each repeating unit contained in the polymer is calculated by the Bicerano method.
  • the calculated Tg is referred to as "repeating unit Tg".
  • the mass ratio (%) of each repeating unit to all the repeating units in the polymer is calculated.
  • Tg at each mass ratio is calculated using the Fox formula (described in Materials Letters 62 (2008) 3152, etc.), and the sum of them is used as the Tg (° C.) of the polymer.
  • the Bicerano method is described in the Precision of developers, Marcel Dekker Inc, New York (1993) and the like. Further, the calculation of Tg by the Bicerano method can be performed using the polymer physical property estimation software MDL Polymer (MDL Information Systems, Inc.).
  • the method for reducing the motility of the main chain of the resin (A) include the following methods (a) to (e).
  • (A) Introduction of a bulky substituent into the main chain (b) Introduction of a plurality of substituents into the main chain (c) Introduction of a substituent that induces an interaction between the resins (A) in the vicinity of the main chain ( d) Main chain formation in a cyclic structure (e) Connection of a cyclic structure to the main chain
  • the resin (A) preferably has a repeating unit in which the Tg of the homopolymer is 130 ° C. or higher.
  • the type of repeating unit having a homopolymer Tg of 130 ° C. or higher is not particularly limited, and any repeating unit having a homopolymer Tg of 130 ° C. or higher calculated by the Bicerano method may be used.
  • the homopolymer corresponds to the repeating unit having a Tg of 130 ° C. or higher.
  • Formulas (A) and RA represent groups having a polycyclic structure.
  • R x represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, or an ethyl group.
  • the group having a polycyclic structure is a group having a plurality of ring structures, and the plurality of ring structures may or may not be condensed.
  • Examples of the repeating unit represented by the formula (A) include the following repeating units.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, or an ethyl group.
  • Ra is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, and an ester group (-OCOR'''.
  • the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent.
  • the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by Ra may be replaced with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • R'and R'' are independently alkyl groups, cycloalkyl groups, aryl groups, aralkyl groups, alkenyl groups, hydroxyl groups, alkoxy groups, asyloxy groups, cyano groups, nitro groups, amino groups, halogen atoms, respectively.
  • R ′′ is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a fluorinated alkyl group) or a carboxylic acid group.
  • the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent.
  • the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by R'and R' may be replaced with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • Examples of the divalent linking group include -COO-, -CO-, -O-, -S-, -SO-, -SO 2- , an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group, and a plurality of these.
  • Examples thereof include a linking group in which is linked.
  • m and n each independently represent an integer of 0 or more. The upper limits of m and n are not particularly limited, but are often 2 or less and more often 1 or less.
  • R b1 to R b4 independently represent a hydrogen atom or an organic group, and at least two or more of R b1 to R b4 represent an organic group.
  • the types of other organic groups are not particularly limited.
  • at least two or more organic groups have three or more constituent atoms excluding hydrogen atoms. It is a substituent.
  • repeating unit represented by the formula (B) examples include the following repeating units.
  • R independently represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group.
  • the organic group include organic groups such as an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, and an alkenyl group, which may have a substituent.
  • R' is independently an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, and an ester group (-OCOR'.
  • R'' represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a fluorinated alkyl group) or a carboxylic acid group.
  • the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent.
  • the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by R' may be replaced with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • m represents an integer of 0 or more. The upper limit of m is not particularly limited, but it is often 2 or less, and more often 1 or less.
  • R c1 to R c4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an organic group, and at least one of R c1 to R c4 is a hydrogen-bonding hydrogen within 3 atoms from the main chain carbon. It is a group having an atom. Above all, in order to induce the interaction between the main chains of the resin (A), it is preferable to have hydrogen-bonding hydrogen atoms within 2 atoms (closer to the main chain).
  • repeating unit represented by the formula (C) examples include the following repeating units.
  • R represents an organic group.
  • the organic group include an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group, and an ester group (-OCOR or -COOR: R has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, which may have a substituent). Alkyl group or fluorinated alkyl group) and the like.
  • R' represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group.
  • Examples of the organic group include an organic group such as an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, and an alkenyl group.
  • the hydrogen atom in the organic group may be replaced with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • a method of introducing a repeating unit represented by the formula (D) into the resin (A) can be mentioned.
  • the content thereof is preferably 1 to 50 mol%, preferably 3 to 40 mol%, based on all the repeating units of the resin (A). More preferably, 5 to 30 mol% is further preferable.
  • cyclic represents a group forming a main chain with a cyclic structure.
  • the number of constituent atoms of the ring is not particularly limited.
  • Examples of the repeating unit represented by the formula (D) include the following repeating units.
  • R is independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, respectively.
  • An ester group (-OCOR “or -COOR”: R "is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a fluorinated alkyl group) or a carboxylic acid group.
  • the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent. Further, the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by R may be substituted with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • R' is independently an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom and an ester group.
  • R is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a fluorinated alkyl group
  • the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent.
  • the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by R' may be replaced with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • m represents an integer of 0 or more. The upper limit of m is not particularly limited, but it is often 2 or less, and more often 1 or less.
  • a method of introducing a repeating unit represented by the formula (E) into the resin (A) can be mentioned.
  • the content thereof is preferably 1 to 50 mol%, preferably 3 to 40 mol%, based on all the repeating units of the resin (A). More preferably, 5 to 30 mol% is further preferable.
  • Re independently represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group.
  • the organic group include an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group and the like, which may have a substituent.
  • Cyclic is a cyclic group containing a carbon atom in the main chain. The number of atoms contained in the cyclic group is not particularly limited.
  • Examples of the repeating unit represented by the formula (E) include the following repeating units.
  • R is independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, and an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, and a halogen. It represents an atom, an ester group (-OCOR “or -COOR”: R "is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a fluorinated alkyl group), or a carboxylic acid group.
  • the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent.
  • the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by R may be substituted with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • R' is independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, and an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, and an ester.
  • the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent.
  • the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by R' may be replaced with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • m represents an integer of 0 or more. The upper limit of m is not particularly limited, but it is often 2 or less, and more often 1 or less.
  • the two Rs may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the content of the resin (A) is preferably 50 to 99.9% by mass, more preferably 60 to 99.0% by mass, based on the total solid content. Further, the resin (A) may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the resist composition may contain a compound (photoacid generator) that generates an acid by irradiation with active light or radiation.
  • the photoacid generator is a compound that generates an acid upon exposure (preferably exposure to EUV light).
  • the photoacid generator may be in the form of a low molecular weight compound or may be incorporated in a part of the polymer. Further, the form of the low molecular weight compound and the form incorporated in a part of the polymer may be used in combination.
  • the photoacid generator is in the form of a low molecular weight compound, the molecular weight is preferably 3000 or less, more preferably 2000 or less, still more preferably 1000 or less.
  • the photoacid generator When the photoacid generator is in the form of being incorporated in a part of the polymer, it may be incorporated in a part of the resin (A) or may be incorporated in a resin different from the resin (A). In the present invention, the photoacid generator is preferably in the form of a low molecular weight compound.
  • the photoacid generator is not particularly limited, and among them, a compound that generates an organic acid by irradiation with EUV light is preferable, and a photoacid generator having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom in the molecule is more preferable.
  • organic acid examples include sulfonic acid (aliphatic sulfonic acid, aromatic sulfonic acid, camphor sulfonic acid, etc.), carboxylic acid (aliphatic carboxylic acid, aromatic carboxylic acid, aralkylcarboxylic acid, etc.), carbonyl.
  • sulfonic acid aliphatic sulfonic acid, aromatic sulfonic acid, camphor sulfonic acid, etc.
  • carboxylic acid aliphatic carboxylic acid, aromatic carboxylic acid, aralkylcarboxylic acid, etc.
  • carbonyl examples thereof include sulfonylimide acid, bis (alkylsulfonyl) imide acid, and tris (alkylsulfonyl) methidoic acid.
  • the volume of the acid generated from the photoacid generator is not particularly limited, and suppress the diffusion of the non-exposed portion of the acid generated by exposure, from the viewpoint of improving the resolution, 240 ⁇ 3 or more are preferred, 305A 3 The above is more preferable, 350 ⁇ 3 or more is further preferable, and 400 ⁇ 3 or more is particularly preferable.
  • the volume of the acid generated by the photoacid generator is preferably 1500 ⁇ 3 or less, more preferably 1000 ⁇ 3 or less, 700 ⁇ 3 or less is more preferable. The value of the volume is obtained by using "WinMOPAC" manufactured by Fujitsu Limited.
  • the volume value In calculating the volume value, first, the chemical structure of the acid according to each example is input, and then each acid is calculated by the molecular force field using the MM (Molecular Mechanics) 3 method with this structure as the initial structure. The most stable conformation of each acid can be determined, and then the molecular orbital calculation using the PM (Parameterized Model number) 3 method can be performed on these most stable conformations to calculate the "accessible volume" of each acid.
  • MM Molecular Mechanics
  • the structure of the acid generated by the photoacid generator is not particularly limited, but the acid generated by the photoacid generator and the resin (A) are in that the diffusion of the acid is suppressed and the resolution is improved. It is preferable that the interaction is strong. From this point, when the acid generated by the photoacid generator is an organic acid, for example, a sulfonic acid group, a carboxylic acid group, a carbonylsulfonylimide acid group, a bissulfonylimide acid group, a trissulfonylmethidoic acid group, etc. It is preferable to have a polar group in addition to the organic acid group of.
  • Examples of the polar group include an ether group, an ester group, an amide group, an acyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfonyloxy group, a sulfonamide group, a thioether group, a thioester group, a urea group, a carbonate group, a carbamate group, a hydroxyl group, and a mercapto.
  • the group is mentioned.
  • the number of polar groups contained in the generated acid is not particularly limited, and is preferably 1 or more, and more preferably 2 or more. However, from the viewpoint of suppressing excessive development, the number of polar groups is preferably less than 6, and more preferably less than 4.
  • the photoacid generator is preferably a photoacid generator that generates the acids exemplified below.
  • the calculated value of the volume is added to a part of the example (unit: ⁇ 3 ).
  • the photoacid generator is preferably a photoacid generator having anions and cations because the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • the photoacid generator preferably contains a compound represented by the general formula (PA-1).
  • a 1 and A 2 are each independently, -SO 2 -R P, or represents -CO-R P.
  • R P represents an organic group.
  • R P present two in the general formula (PA-1) may be the same or different.
  • R P is a group represented by the general formula (RF) is preferred.
  • LRF represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group include -COO-, -CONH-, -CO-, -O-, -S-, -SO-, -SO 2- , and an alkylene group (linear or branched chain). It may be preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms), a cycloalkylene group (preferably 3 to 15 carbon atoms), an alkenylene group (may be linear or branched chain, preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms), and these.
  • a divalent linking group obtained by combining a plurality of the above can be mentioned.
  • the substituent that can be possessed when these divalent linking groups are possible, a halogen atom is preferable, and a fluorine atom is more preferable.
  • the alkylene group (including an alkylene group that can be contained in a divalent linking group in which a plurality of them are combined) is a perfluoroalkylene group.
  • the divalent linking group is preferably -alkylene group-COO- or -alkylene group-SO 2- .
  • the alkylene group-COO- and the -alkylene group-SO 2- preferably have an alkylene group on the N - side.
  • R RF represents a cycloalkyl group or an alkyl group.
  • the cycloalkyl group may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
  • the cycloalkyl group preferably has 3 to 15 carbon atoms, and more preferably 5 to 10 carbon atoms. Examples of the cycloalkyl group include a norbornyl group, a decalynyl group, and an adamantyl group.
  • the substituent that the cycloalkyl group may have is preferably an alkyl group (which may be linear or branched, preferably having 1 to 5 carbon atoms).
  • the cycloalkyl group has no other substituent.
  • One or more of the carbon atoms which are ring member atoms of the cycloalkyl group may be replaced with carbonyl carbon atoms and / or heteroatoms.
  • the carbon atom (-CH ⁇ ) bonded to LRF in the cycloalkyl group may be replaced with the nitrogen atom (-N ⁇ ).
  • R RF is an alkyl group
  • the alkyl group may be linear or branched.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • the substituent that the alkyl group may have is preferably a cycloalkyl group, a fluorine atom, or a cyano group. It is also preferable that the alkyl group does not have a substituent other than these.
  • Examples of the cycloalkyl group as the substituent include, for example, the cycloalkyl group described in the case where R RF is a cycloalkyl group.
  • the alkyl group may or may not be a perfluoroalkyl group.
  • the alkyl group has a fluorine atom as the substituent, it is also preferable that a part or all of the alkyl group is a perfluoromethyl group.
  • M + represents a cation.
  • the M + cation is preferably an organic cation.
  • the organic cations are preferably cations represented by the general formula (ZaI) (cations (ZaI)) or cations represented by the general formula (ZaII) (cations (ZaII)) independently of each other.
  • R 201 , R 202 , and R 203 each independently represent an organic group.
  • the carbon number of the organic group as R 201 , R 202 , and R 203 is usually 1 to 30, preferably 1 to 20.
  • two of R 201 to R 203 may be bonded to form a ring structure, and the ring may contain an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an ester group, an amide group, or a carbonyl group.
  • the two of the group formed by bonding of the R 201 ⁇ R 203 for example, an alkylene group (e.g., butylene, pentylene), and, -CH 2 -CH 2 -O-CH 2 -CH 2 - Can be mentioned.
  • Examples of the cation in the general formula (ZaI) include a cation (ZaI-1), a cation (ZaI-2), and a cation represented by the general formula (ZaI-3b) (cation (ZaI-3b)), which will be described later.
  • a cation (cation (ZaI-4b)) represented by the general formula (ZaI-4b) can be mentioned.
  • the cation (ZaI-1) is an aryl sulfonium cation in which at least one of R 201 to R 203 of the above general formula (ZaI) is an aryl group.
  • the aryl sulfonium cation all of R 201 to R 203 may be an aryl group, or a part of R 201 to R 203 may be an aryl group and the rest may be an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group.
  • R 201 to R 203 may be an aryl group, and the remaining two of R 201 to R 203 may be bonded to form a ring structure, and an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom may be formed in the ring. It may contain an ester group, an amide group, or a carbonyl group.
  • a group formed by bonding two of R 201 to R 203 for example, one or more methylene groups are substituted with an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an ester group, an amide group, and / or a carbonyl group.
  • alkylene group e.g., butylene group, pentylene group, or -CH 2 -CH 2 -O-CH 2 -CH 2 -
  • aryl sulfonium cation examples include a triaryl sulfonium cation, a diarylalkyl sulfonium cation, an aryl dialkyl sulfonium cation, a diarylcycloalkyl sulfonium cation, and an aryl dicycloalkyl sulfonium cation.
  • the aryl group contained in the arylsulfonium cation is preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group, and more preferably a phenyl group.
  • the aryl group may be an aryl group having a heterocyclic structure having an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom or the like. Examples of the heterocyclic structure include pyrrole residues, furan residues, thiophene residues, indole residues, benzofuran residues, benzothiophene residues and the like.
  • the aryl sulfonium cation has two or more aryl groups, the two or more aryl groups may be the same or different.
  • the alkyl group or cycloalkyl group that the arylsulfonium cation has as needed is a linear alkyl group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, a branched alkyl group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms, or a branched alkyl group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms.
  • Fifteen cycloalkyl groups are preferred, and examples thereof include methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, n-butyl group, sec-butyl group, t-butyl group, cyclopropyl group, cyclobutyl group, cyclohexyl group and the like.
  • the aryl group, alkyl group, and substituent which the cycloalkyl group may have of R 201 to R 203 are independently an alkyl group (for example, 1 to 15 carbon atoms) and a cycloalkyl group (for example, carbon number of carbon atoms). 3 to 15), aryl group (for example, 6 to 14 carbon atoms), alkoxy group (for example, 1 to 15 carbon atoms), cycloalkyl alkoxy group (for example, 1 to 15 carbon atoms), halogen atom, hydroxyl group, or phenylthio group. preferable.
  • the substituent may further have a substituent. For example, even if the alkyl group has a halogen atom as a substituent and is an alkyl halide group such as a trifluoromethyl group. Good.
  • the cation (ZaI-2) is a cation in which R 201 to R 203 in the formula (ZaI) independently represent an organic group having no aromatic ring.
  • the aromatic ring also includes an aromatic ring containing a hetero atom.
  • the organic group having no aromatic ring as R 201 to R 203 generally has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • R 201 to R 203 are each independently preferably an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an allyl group, or a vinyl group, and are linear or branched 2-oxoalkyl groups, 2-oxocycloalkyl groups, or Alkoxycarbonylmethyl groups are more preferred, and linear or branched 2-oxoalkyl groups are even more preferred.
  • Examples of the alkyl group and cycloalkyl group of R 201 to R 203 include a linear alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or a branched chain alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, and a propyl group). Groups, butyl groups, and pentyl groups), and cycloalkyl groups having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, cyclopentyl groups, cyclohexyl groups, and norbornyl groups).
  • R 201 to R 203 may be further substituted with a halogen atom, an alkoxy group (for example, 1 to 5 carbon atoms), a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, or a nitro group.
  • the cation (ZaI-3b) is a cation represented by the following general formula (ZaI-3b).
  • R 1c to R 5c are independently hydrogen atom, alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, alkoxy group, aryloxy group, alkoxycarbonyl group, alkylcarbonyloxy group, cycloalkylcarbonyloxy group, halogen atom, hydroxyl group. , Nitro group, alkylthio group, or arylthio group.
  • R 6c and R 7c independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (t-butyl group, etc.), a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an aryl group.
  • R x and R y each independently represent an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a 2-oxoalkyl group, a 2-oxocycloalkyl group, an alkoxycarbonylalkyl group, an allyl group, or a vinyl group.
  • R 1c to R 5c , R 5c and R 6c , R 6c and R 7c , R 5c and R x , and R x and R y may be combined to form a ring, respectively.
  • This ring may independently contain an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a ketone group, an ester bond, or an amide bond.
  • Examples of the ring include an aromatic or non-aromatic hydrocarbon ring, an aromatic or non-aromatic heterocycle, and a polycyclic condensed ring formed by combining two or more of these rings.
  • the ring includes a 3- to 10-membered ring, preferably a 4- to 8-membered ring, and more preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring.
  • Examples of the group formed by combining any two or more of R 1c to R 5c , R 6c and R 7c , and R x and R y include an alkylene group such as a butylene group and a pentylene group. ..
  • the methylene group in the alkylene group may be substituted with a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom.
  • the group formed by bonding R 5c and R 6c , and R 5c and R x is preferably a single bond or an alkylene group.
  • Examples of the alkylene group include a methylene group and an ethylene group.
  • the cation (ZaI-4b) is a cation represented by the following general formula (ZaI-4b).
  • R 13 is a group having a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, or a cycloalkyl group (the cycloalkyl group itself may be used, and a group containing a cycloalkyl group as a part). May be). These groups may have substituents.
  • R 14 is a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkylcarbonyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, a cycloalkylsulfonyl group, or a group having a cycloalkyl group (the cycloalkyl group itself may be a cycloalkyl group). It may be a group containing a group as a part). These groups may have substituents. When a plurality of R 14 are present, each independently represents the above group such as a hydroxyl group.
  • R 15 independently represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, or a naphthyl group. These groups may have substituents.
  • R 15 Bonded to two R 15 each other may form a ring.
  • an oxygen atom or may contain a hetero atom such as nitrogen atom.
  • two R 15 is an alkylene group, preferably bonded together to form a ring structure.
  • the alkyl groups of R 13 , R 14 and R 15 are linear or branched chain.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group is more preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-butyl group, a t-butyl group or the like.
  • R 204 and R 205 each independently represent an aryl group, an alkyl group, or a cycloalkyl group.
  • the aryl group of R 204 and R 205 is preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group, and more preferably a phenyl group.
  • the aryl group of R 204 and R 205 may be an aryl group having a heterocycle having an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom or the like.
  • Examples of the skeleton of the aryl group having a heterocycle include pyrrole, furan, thiophene, indole, benzofuran, and benzothiophene.
  • the alkyl group and cycloalkyl group of R 204 and R 205 are a linear alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or a branched chain alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, butyl group).
  • a group or a pentyl group), or a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable.
  • the aryl group, alkyl group, and cycloalkyl group of R 204 and R 205 may each independently have a substituent.
  • substituents that the aryl group, alkyl group, and cycloalkyl group of R 204 and R 205 may have include an alkyl group (for example, 1 to 15 carbon atoms) and a cycloalkyl group (for example, 3 carbon atoms). -15), aryl groups (for example, 6 to 15 carbon atoms), alkoxy groups (for example, 1 to 15 carbon atoms), halogen atoms, hydroxyl groups, phenylthio groups and the like.
  • the photoacid generator also preferably contains a compound represented by the general formula (PB).
  • PB general formula (PB)
  • a resist film can be constant each occurrence ratio of the structure. Therefore, the present inventors speculate that even when the resist film is exposed, the amount and diffusion of the acid generated in the resist film tends to be uniform, and the width of the pattern obtained after development is stable.
  • M 1 + and M 2 + each independently represents an organic cation.
  • M 1 + and M 2 + organic cation each independently, an organic cation listed in the description of the M + of the general formula (PA-1) can be used as well.
  • L represents a divalent organic group.
  • the divalent organic group include -COO-, -CONH-, -CO-, an alkylene group (preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, which may be linear or branched), and a cycloalkylene group (preferably. 3 to 15 carbon atoms), an alkenylene group (preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms), and a divalent linking group in which a plurality of these are combined can be mentioned.
  • One or more of the methylene groups constituting the cycloalkane ring of the cycloalkylene group may be replaced with a carbonyl carbon and / or a hetero atom (oxygen atom or the like).
  • These divalent linking groups also preferably have a group selected from the group consisting of -O-, -S-, -SO-, and -SO 2- .
  • L is preferably a group represented by the following general formula (L). * A-LA-LB-LC-LD-LE- * B (L)
  • * A represents the connection position with A ⁇ in the general formula (PB).
  • * B represents the connection position with B ⁇ in the general formula (PB).
  • LA represents ⁇ (C (R LA1 ) (R LA2 )) XA ⁇ .
  • the XA represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably 1 to 10, and more preferably 1 to 3.
  • R LA1 and R LA2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • the substituents of R LA1 and R LA2 are independently preferably a fluorine atom or a fluoroalkyl group, more preferably a fluorine atom or a perfluoroalkyl group, and further preferably a fluorine atom or a perfluoromethyl group.
  • the R LA1 having XA may be the same or different.
  • the R LA2 having XA may be the same or different.
  • -(C (R LA1 ) (R LA2 ))- is preferably -CH 2- , -CHF-, -CH (CF 3 )-, or -CF 2- .
  • -(C (R LA1 ) (R LA2 )) - which directly binds to A-in the general formula (PB) is -CH 2- , -CHF-, -CH (CF 3 )-, or-.
  • Formula (PB) in A - and a direct bond to - (C (R LA1) ( R LA2)) - other than the - (C (R LA1) ( R LA2)) - are each independently, -CH 2 -, -CHF-, or -CF 2- is preferable.
  • LB represents a single bond, an ester group (-COO-), or a sulfonyl group (-SO 2- ).
  • LC represents a single bond, an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, or a group formed by combining these ("-alkylene group-cycloalkylene group-" or the like).
  • the alkylene group may be linear or branched.
  • the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 5 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 2 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1.
  • the cycloalkylene group preferably has 3 to 15 carbon atoms, and more preferably 5 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the cycloalkylene group may be monocyclic or polycyclic. Examples of the cycloalkylene group include a norbornanediyl group and an adamantandiyl group.
  • the substituent that the cycloalkylene group may have is preferably an alkyl group (either linear or branched chain, preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms).
  • One or more of the methylene groups constituting the cycloalkane ring of the cycloalkylene group may be replaced with a carbonyl carbon and / or a hetero atom (oxygen atom or the like).
  • the alkylene group portion is preferably present on the LB side.
  • the LC is preferably a single bond or a cycloalkylene group.
  • LD represents a single bond, an ether group (-O-), a carbonyl group (-CO-), or an ester group (-COO-).
  • LE is a single bond or - (C (R LE1) ( R LE2))
  • XE - represents a.
  • XE- represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably 1 to 10, and more preferably 1 to 3.
  • R LE1 and R LE2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent. When the number of XEs is 2 or more, the R LE1s having XEs may be the same or different. When the number of XEs is 2 or more, the R LE2s having XEs may be the same or different.
  • -(C (R LE1 ) (R LE2 ))- is preferably -CH 2- .
  • L the general formula (L) when LB, LC, and LD are single bonds, it is preferable that LE is also a single bond.
  • a ⁇ represents an acid anion group.
  • An acid anion group is a group having an anion atom.
  • A- is preferably a group represented by any of the general formulas (A-1) to (A-2).
  • RA represents an organic group.
  • the RA is preferably an alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group may be linear or branched.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • the substituent that the alkyl group may have is preferably a fluorine atom.
  • the alkyl group having a fluorine atom as a substituent may or may not be a perfluoroalkyl group.
  • B ⁇ represents a group represented by any of the general formulas (B-1) to (B-4).
  • B ⁇ is preferably a group represented by any of the general formulas (B-1) to (B-3), and a group represented by any of the general formulas (B-1) to (B-2) is preferable. More preferred.
  • R B represents an organic group.
  • R B is a cycloalkyl group or an alkyl group. If R B is a cycloalkyl group, the carbon number of the cycloalkyl group is preferably 3 to 15, and more preferably 5-10.
  • the cycloalkyl group may be monocyclic or polycyclic. Examples of the cycloalkyl group include a norbornyl group and an adamantyl group.
  • the substituent that the cycloalkyl group may have is preferably an alkyl group (which may be linear or branched, preferably having 1 to 5 carbon atoms).
  • One or more of the carbon atoms which are ring member atoms of the cycloalkyl group may be replaced with carbonyl carbon atoms.
  • R B is an alkyl group
  • the alkyl group may be either linear or branched.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • the substituent that the alkyl group may have is preferably a cycloalkyl group, a fluorine atom, or a cyano group. Examples of the cycloalkyl group as the substituent, R B is a cycloalkyl group as described in the case a cycloalkyl group as well.
  • the alkyl group may or may not be a perfluoroalkyl group.
  • the alkyl group has a fluorine atom as the substituent, it is also preferable that a part or all of the alkyl group is a perfluoromethyl group.
  • the pKa of the group represented by HA is BH. It is lower than the pKa of the represented group. More specifically, HA-L-BH when obtained an acid dissociation constant for the compound represented by the "HA-L-BH” is - a pKa at which the "A -L-BH""HA and in the pKa of a group represented by "further” a - a pKa of the group represented by "BH a pKa at which the '" - -L-BH "is” a - -L-B.
  • PKa of the group represented by HA and “pKa of the group represented by BH” are obtained by using “Software Package 1" or "Gaussian 16", respectively.
  • the pKa of the group represented by HA is preferably -12.00 to 1.00, more preferably -7.00 to 0.50, and even more preferably -5.00 to 0.00.
  • the pKa of the group represented by HB is preferably -4.00 to 14.00, more preferably -2.00 to 12.00, and even more preferably -1.00 to 5.00.
  • the difference between the pKa of the group represented by HB and the pKa of the group represented by HA (“pKa of the group represented by HB”-“pKa of the group represented by HA”) is 0.10 to 20. It is preferably .00, more preferably 0.50 to 17.00, and even more preferably 2.00 to 15.00.
  • photoacid generators As the resist composition, other photoacid generators other than those described above may be used.
  • Other photoacid generators for example, "M + Z - (M + represents a cation and Z - represents an anion)” include compounds represented by (onium salt).
  • M + Z - in a compound represented by, M + represents a cation, include the same cations as the cation in formula (PA-1).
  • Z - "M + Z" - represents an anion
  • the ability of causing a nucleophilic reaction is extremely low anion preferred.
  • the anion include sulfonic acid anion (aliphatic sulfonic acid anion such as fluoroalkyl sulfonic acid anion, aromatic sulfonic acid anion, camphor sulfonic acid anion, etc.) and carboxylic acid anion (aliphatic carboxylic acid anion, aromatic).
  • the aliphatic moiety in the aliphatic sulfonic acid anion and the aliphatic carboxylic acid anion may be an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group, and may be a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. , A cycloalkyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms is preferable.
  • the aromatic ring group in the aromatic sulfonic acid anion and the aromatic carboxylic acid anion is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a phenyl group, a tolyl group, and a naphthyl group.
  • Examples of the substituents that the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, and aryl group mentioned above can have include halogen atoms such as nitro group and fluorine atom, carboxylic acid group, hydroxyl group, amino group, cyano group, and alkoxy group.
  • cycloalkyl group (preferably 3 to 15 carbon atoms), aryl group (preferably 6 to 14 carbon atoms), alkoxycarbonyl group (preferably 2 to 7 carbon atoms), acyl group (Preferably 2 to 12 carbon atoms), alkoxycarbonyloxy group (preferably 2 to 7 carbon atoms), alkylthio group (preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms), alkylsulfonyl group (preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms), alkyl Iminosulfonyl group (preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms), aryloxysulfonyl group (preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms), alkylaryloxysulfonyl group (preferably 7 to 20 carbon atoms), cycloalkylaryloxysulfonyl group (preferably 7 to 20 carbon atoms) 10 to 20 carbon atoms), an alkyloxyalkyloxy group (preferably 5 to 20 carbon atoms), and a cyclo
  • the aralkyl group in the aralkyl carboxylic acid anion is preferably an aralkyl group having 7 to 12 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a benzyl group, a phenethyl group, a naphthylmethyl group, a naphthylethyl group, and a naphthylbutyl group.
  • the alkyl group in the tris (alkylsulfonyl) methideanion is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • substituent of these alkyl groups include a halogen atom, an alkyl group substituted with a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, an alkylthio group, an alkyloxysulfonyl group, an aryloxysulfonyl group, and a cycloalkylaryloxysulfonyl group.
  • the alkyl group is preferably a fluorine atom or an alkyl group substituted with a fluorine atom.
  • non-nucleophilic anions e.g., fluorinated phosphorus (e.g., PF 6 -), fluorinated boron (e.g., BF 4 -), and fluorinated antimony (e.g., SbF 6 -) and the like.
  • fluorinated phosphorus e.g., PF 6 -
  • fluorinated boron e.g., BF 4 -
  • fluorinated antimony e.g., SbF 6 -
  • the non-nucleophilic anion is an aliphatic sulfonic acid anion in which at least the ⁇ position of the sulfonic acid is substituted with a fluorine atom, an aromatic sulfonic acid anion in which a fluorine atom or a group having a fluorine atom is substituted, or an alkyl group in which fluorine is used.
  • Atomically substituted tris (alkylsulfonyl) methideanions are preferred.
  • perfluoroaliphatic sulfonic acid anion preferably 4 to 8 carbon atoms
  • benzenesulfonic acid anion having a fluorine atom is more preferable
  • nonafluorobutanesulfonic acid anion, perfluorooctanesulfonic acid anion, and pentafluorobenzenesulfone are preferable.
  • An acid anion or a 3,5-bis (trifluoromethyl) benzenesulfonic acid anion is more preferred.
  • the pKa of the generated acid is -1 or less in order to improve the sensitivity.
  • an anion represented by the following general formula (AN1) is also preferable.
  • Xf independently represents a fluorine atom or an alkyl group substituted with at least one fluorine atom.
  • R 1 and R 2 independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or an alkyl group, and when a plurality of them are present, R 1 and R 2 may be the same or different, respectively.
  • L represents a divalent linking group, and when there are a plurality of L, L may be the same or different.
  • A represents a cyclic organic group.
  • x represents an integer of 1 to 20
  • y represents an integer of 0 to 10
  • z represents an integer of 0 to 10.
  • the general formula (AN1) will be described in more detail.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group in the alkyl group substituted with the fluorine atom of Xf is preferably 1 to 10, and more preferably 1 to 4.
  • the alkyl group substituted with the fluorine atom of Xf is preferably a perfluoroalkyl group.
  • Xf is preferably a fluorine atom or a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • Xf is, for example, fluorine atom, CF 3 , C 2 F 5 , C 3 F 7 , C 4 F 9 , CH 2 CF 3 , CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , CH 2 C 2 F 5 , CH 2 CH 2 C.
  • fluorine atom or CF. 3 is preferable.
  • both Xfs are fluorine atoms.
  • the alkyl groups of R 1 and R 2 may have a substituent (preferably a fluorine atom), and the number of carbon atoms in the substituent is preferably 1 to 4.
  • the substituent is preferably a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • Alkyl groups having substituents for R 1 and R 2 include, for example, CF 3 , C 2 F 5 , C 3 F 7 , C 4 F 9 , C 5 F 11 , C 6 F 13 , C 7 F 15 , C.
  • R 1 and R 2 are preferably a fluorine atom or CF 3 .
  • x is preferably an integer of 1 to 10, and more preferably 1 to 5.
  • y is preferably an integer of 0 to 4, more preferably 0.
  • z is preferably an integer of 0 to 5, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 3.
  • the divalent linking group of L include -COO-, -CO-, -O-, -S-, -SO-, -SO 2- , alkylene group, cycloalkylene group, alkenylene group, and these.
  • Examples thereof include a linking group in which a plurality of the groups are linked, and a linking group having a total carbon number of 12 or less is preferable. Among them, -COO-, -CO-, or -O- is preferable, and -COO- is more preferable.
  • the cyclic organic group of A is not particularly limited as long as it has a cyclic structure, and has an alicyclic group, an aromatic ring group, and a heterocyclic group (not only those having aromaticity but also aromaticity). (Including those that do not), etc.
  • the alicyclic group may be monocyclic or polycyclic, and a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, and a cyclooctyl group is preferable, and in addition, a norbornyl group, a tricyclodecanyl group, and a tetracyclo Polycyclic cycloalkyl groups such as a decanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, and an adamantyl group are preferable.
  • a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, and a cyclooctyl group is preferable, and in addition, a norbornyl group, a tricyclodecanyl group, and a tetracyclo Polycyclic cycloalkyl groups such as a decanyl group,
  • alicyclic groups having a bulky structure having 7 or more carbon atoms such as a norbornyl group, a tricyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, and an adamantyl group, are used in the post-exposure heating step. It is preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing the diffusivity in the membrane and improving the MEEF (Mask Error Enhancement Factor).
  • the aromatic ring group include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, a phenanthrene ring, an anthracene ring and the like.
  • heterocyclic group examples include groups derived from a furan ring, a thiophene ring, a benzofuran ring, a benzothiophene ring, a dibenzofuran ring, a dibenzothiophene ring, a pyridine ring and the like. Of these, a group derived from a furan ring, a thiophene ring, or a pyridine ring is preferable.
  • examples of the cyclic organic group include a lactone structure, and specific examples thereof include lactone structures represented by the above-mentioned general formulas (LC1-1) to (LC1-22).
  • the cyclic organic group may have a substituent.
  • the substituent may be an alkyl group (linear or branched chain, may contain a cyclic structure, preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms), a cycloalkyl group (monocyclic or polycyclic). It may be a spiro ring when it is a polycycle. It preferably has 3 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group (preferably 6 to 14 carbon atoms), a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an ester group, and an amide.
  • Examples thereof include a group, a urethane group, a ureido group, a thioether group, a sulfonamide group, and a sulfonic acid ester group.
  • the carbon constituting the cyclic organic group may be carbonyl carbon.
  • the photoacid generator may be a betaine compound having a cation portion and an anion portion and having a structure in which both are covalently linked.
  • Examples of the photoacid generator include paragraphs [0368] to [0377] of JP2014-413328A and paragraphs [0240] to [0262] of JP2013-228681A (corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. [0339]) of the specification of 2015/004533 can be incorporated, and these contents are incorporated in the specification of the present application.
  • the following compound is mentioned as a preferable specific example. In the following compounds, anions and cations can be optionally exchanged, if possible.
  • the content of the photoacid generator in the resist composition is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5% by mass or more, preferably 9% by mass or more, based on the total solid content of the composition, in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. More preferably, 15% by mass or more is further preferable.
  • the content is preferably 40% by mass or less, more preferably 35% by mass or less, and further preferably 30% by mass or less.
  • the photoacid generator may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the resist composition may contain a solvent.
  • the solvent is from (M1) propylene glycol monoalkyl ether carboxylate and (M2) propylene glycol monoalkyl ether, lactic acid ester, acetate ester, alkoxypropionic acid ester, chain ketone, cyclic ketone, lactone, and alkylene carbonate. It is preferable to include at least one selected from the group.
  • the solvent may further contain components other than the components (M1) and (M2).
  • the present inventors have found that when such a solvent is used in combination with the above-mentioned resin, the coatability of the composition is improved and a pattern having a small number of development defects can be formed. The reason is not always clear, but since these solvents have a good balance of solubility, boiling point and viscosity of the above-mentioned resin, uneven film thickness of the composition film and generation of precipitates in spin coating can be suppressed. The present inventors believe that this is due to.
  • the component (M1) is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA: propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate), propylene glycol monomethyl ether propionate, and propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, preferably propylene glycol.
  • PGMEA propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate
  • PGMEA Monomethyl ether acetate
  • the following solvent is preferable as the component (M2).
  • propylene glycol monoalkyl ether propylene glycol monomethyl ether (PGME) and propylene glycol monoethyl ether (PGEE) are preferable.
  • the lactate ester is preferably ethyl lactate, butyl lactate, or propyl lactate.
  • the acetic acid ester is preferably methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, propyl acetate, isoamyl acetate, methyl formate, ethyl acetate, butyl formate, propyl formate, or 3-methoxybutyl acetate.
  • alkoxypropionate ester is preferably methyl 3-methoxypropionate (MMP) or ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate (EEP).
  • Chain ketones are 1-octanone, 2-octanone, 1-nonanone, 2-nonanone, acetone, 2-heptanone, 4-heptanone, 1-hexanone, 2-hexanone, diisobutyl ketone, phenylacetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone.
  • Acetoneacetone, acetonylacetone, ionone, diacetonyl alcohol, acetylcarbinol, acetophenone, methylnaphthyl ketone, or methyl amyl ketone is preferred.
  • the cyclic ketone is preferably methylcyclohexanone, isophorone, cyclopentanone, or cyclohexanone.
  • the lactone is preferably ⁇ -butyrolactone.
  • the alkylene carbonate is preferably propylene carbonate.
  • the component (M2) is more preferably propylene glycol monomethyl ether (PGME), ethyl lactate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, methylamyl ketone, cyclohexanone, butyl acetate, pentyl acetate, ⁇ -butyrolactone, or propylene carbonate.
  • PGME propylene glycol monomethyl ether
  • ethyl lactate ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate
  • methylamyl ketone cyclohexanone
  • butyl acetate pentyl acetate
  • ⁇ -butyrolactone propylene carbonate
  • an ester solvent having 7 or more carbon atoms (preferably 7 to 14, more preferably 7 to 12 and even more preferably 7 to 10) and having a heteroatom number of 2 or less.
  • ester solvent having 7 or more carbon atoms and 2 or less heteroatomic atoms examples include amyl acetate, 2-methylbutyl acetate, 1-methylbutyl acetate, hexyl acetate, pentyl propionate, hexyl propionate, butyl propionate, and iso.
  • Examples thereof include isobutyl butyrate, heptyl propionate, butyl butanoate and the like, and isoamyl acetate is preferable.
  • the component (M2) is preferably a solvent having a flash point (hereinafter, also referred to as fp) of 37 ° C. or higher.
  • Such components (M2) include propylene glycol monomethyl ether (fp: 47 ° C.), ethyl lactate (fp: 53 ° C.), ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate (fp: 49 ° C.), and methylamyl ketone (fp: 42 ° C.).
  • Cyclohexanone (fp: 44 ° C), pentyl acetate (fp: 45 ° C), methyl 2-hydroxyisobutyrate (fp: 45 ° C), ⁇ -butyrolactone (fp: 101 ° C), or propylene carbonate (fp: 132 ° C).
  • °C is preferable.
  • propylene glycol monoethyl ether, ethyl lactate, pentyl acetate, or cyclohexanone is more preferable, and propylene glycol monoethyl ether or ethyl lactate is even more preferable.
  • the "flash point” means a value described in the reagent catalog of Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. or Sigma-Aldrich Co., Ltd.
  • the solvent preferably contains the component (M1). It is more preferable that the solvent is substantially composed of only the component (M1), or is a mixed solvent of the component (M1) and other components. In the latter case, the solvent more preferably contains both the component (M1) and the component (M2).
  • the mass ratio (M1 / M2) of the component (M1) to the component (M2) is preferably "100/0" to "0/10", more preferably “100/0” to "15/85", and " “100/0” to “40/60” are more preferable, and "100/0” to "60/40” are particularly preferable. That is, when the solvent contains both the component (M1) and the component (M2), the mass ratio of the component (M1) to the component (M2) is preferably 15/85 or more, more preferably 40/60 or more. 60/40 or more is more preferable. By adopting such a configuration, the number of development defects can be further reduced.
  • the mass ratio of the component (M1) to the component (M2) is, for example, 99/1 or less.
  • the solvent may further contain components other than the components (M1) and (M2).
  • the content of the components other than the components (M1) and (M2) is preferably 5 to 30% by mass with respect to the total amount of the solvent.
  • the content of the solvent in the resist composition is preferably set so that the solid content concentration is 0.5 to 30% by mass, and more preferably 1 to 20% by mass. By doing so, the coatability of the resist composition can be further improved.
  • the solid content means all components other than the solvent.
  • the resist composition may further contain an acid diffusion control agent.
  • the acid diffusion control agent acts as a quencher for trapping the acid generated from the photoacid generator, and plays a role of controlling the acid diffusion phenomenon in the resist film.
  • the acid diffusion control agent may be, for example, a basic compound.
  • the basic compound is preferably a compound having a structure represented by the following general formulas (A) to (E).
  • R 200 , R 201 and R 202 may be the same or different, and may be the same or different, and may be a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms), or a cycloalkyl group (preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms). Represents an aryl group (preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms), and R 201 and R 202 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the alkyl group having a substituent is preferably an aminoalkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a hydroxyalkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or a cyanoalkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • R 203 , R 204 , R 205 and R 206 may be the same or different and represent an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. It is more preferable that the alkyl groups in the general formula (A) and the general formula (E) are unsubstituted.
  • guanidine aminopyrrolidin, pyrazole, pyrazoline, piperazine, aminomorpholine, aminoalkylmorpholin (alkyl group portion may be linear or branched chain, partly replaced with ether group and / or ester group.
  • the total number of all amino acids other than the hydrogen atom of the alkyl group portion is preferably 1 to 17), or piperidine or the like is preferred.
  • a compound having an imidazole structure, a diazabicyclo structure, an onium hydroxide structure, an onium carboxylate structure, a trialkylamine structure, an aniline structure, or a pyridine structure, an alkylamine derivative having a hydroxyl group and / or an ether bond, or a hydroxyl group and / Or an aniline derivative having an ether bond or the like is more preferable.
  • Examples of the compound having an imidazole structure include imidazole, 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole, and benzimidazole.
  • Compounds having a diazabicyclo structure include, for example, 1,4-diazabicyclo [2,2,2] octane, 1,5-diazabicyclo [4,3,0] nona-5-ene, and 1,8-diazabicyclo [ 5,4,0] Undeca-7-en and the like.
  • Examples of the compound having an onium hydroxide structure include triarylsulfonium hydroxide, phenacylsulfonium hydroxide, and sulfonium hydroxide having a 2-oxoalkyl group.
  • triphenylsulfonium hydroxide tris (t-butylphenyl) sulfonium hydroxide, bis (t-butylphenyl) iodonium hydroxide, phenacylthiophenium hydroxydo, and 2-oxopropylthiophenium hydroxydo.
  • Examples of the compound having an onium carboxylate structure include those in which the anion portion of the compound having an onium hydroxide structure is carboxylated, and examples thereof include acetate, adamantane-1-carboxylate, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylate. Can be mentioned.
  • Examples of the compound having a trialkylamine structure include tri (n-butyl) amine and tri (n-octyl) amine.
  • Examples of the aniline compound include 2,6-diisopropylaniline, N, N-dimethylaniline, N, N-dibutylaniline, N, N-dihexylaniline and the like.
  • Examples of the alkylamine derivative having a hydroxyl group and / or an ether bond for example, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, tris (methoxyethoxyethyl) amine, and, (HO-C 2 H 4 -O-C2H4) 2 N ( -C 3 H 6 -O-CH 3 ) and the like.
  • Examples of the aniline derivative having a hydroxyl group and / or an ether bond include N, N-bis (hydroxyethyl) aniline and the like.
  • Preferred examples of the basic compound include an amine compound having a phenoxy group and an ammonium salt compound having a phenoxy group.
  • amine compound for example, primary, secondary and tertiary amine compounds can be used, and an amine compound in which at least one alkyl group is bonded to a nitrogen atom is preferable.
  • the amine compound is more preferably a tertiary amine compound.
  • the amine compound has a cycloalkyl group (preferably 3 to 20 carbon atoms) or an aryl group (preferably 3 to 20 carbon atoms) in addition to the alkyl group as long as at least one alkyl group (preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms) is bonded to the nitrogen atom.
  • the amine compound preferably has an oxyalkylene group.
  • the number of oxyalkylene groups is preferably 1 or more in the molecule, more preferably 3 to 9, and even more preferably 4 to 6.
  • an oxyethylene group (-CH 2 CH 2 O-) or an oxypropylene group (-CH (CH 3 ) CH 2 O- or CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 O-) is preferable, and an oxyethylene group. Is more preferable.
  • ammonium salt compound examples include primary, secondary, tertiary and quaternary ammonium salt compounds, and an ammonium salt compound in which at least one alkyl group is bonded to a nitrogen atom is preferable.
  • the ammonium salt compound has a cycloalkyl group (preferably 3 to 20 carbon atoms) or an aryl group in addition to the alkyl group as long as at least one alkyl group (preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms) is bonded to the nitrogen atom. (Preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms) may be bonded to the nitrogen atom.
  • the ammonium salt compound preferably has an oxyalkylene group.
  • the number of oxyalkylene groups is preferably 1 or more in the molecule, more preferably 3 to 9, and even more preferably 4 to 6.
  • an oxyethylene group (-CH 2 CH 2 O-) or an oxypropylene group (-CH (CH 3 ) CH 2 O- or -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 O-) is preferable.
  • Oxyethylene groups are more preferred.
  • the anion of the ammonium salt compound include a halogen atom, a sulfonate, a borate, and a phosphate, and among them, a halogen atom or a sulfonate is preferable.
  • the halogen atom is preferably a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, or an iodine atom.
  • the sulfonate is preferably an organic sulfonate having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the organic sulfonate include an alkyl sulfonate having 1 to 20 carbon atoms and an aryl sulfonate.
  • the alkyl group of the alkyl sulfonate may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an alkoxy group, an acyl group, an aromatic ring group and the like.
  • alkyl sulphonate examples include methane sulphonate, ethane sulphonate, butane sulphonate, hexane sulphonate, octane sulphonate, benzyl sulphonate, trifluoromethane sulphonate, pentafluoroethane sulphonate, nonafluorobutane sulphonate and the like.
  • aryl group of the aryl sulfonate examples include a benzene ring group, a naphthalene ring group, and an anthracene ring group.
  • the substituents that the benzene ring group, the naphthalene ring group, and the anthracene ring group can have are a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms or a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms. preferable.
  • Examples of the linear or branched alkyl group and cycloalkyl group include methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl group, i-butyl group and t-butyl group. Examples thereof include an n-hexyl group and a cyclohexyl group.
  • substituents include an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group and the like.
  • the amine compound having a phenoxy group and the ammonium salt compound having a phenoxy group are those having a phenoxy group at the terminal opposite to the nitrogen atom of the alkyl group of the amine compound or the ammonium salt compound.
  • the substituent of the phenoxy group include an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a carboxylic acid group, a carboxylic acid ester group, a sulfonic acid ester group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an acyloxy group, and Examples thereof include an aryloxy group.
  • the substituent of the substituent may be any of 2 to 6 positions.
  • the number of substituents may be any of 1 to 5.
  • oxyalkylene group between the phenoxy group and the nitrogen atom.
  • the number of oxyalkylene groups is preferably 1 or more in the molecule, more preferably 3 to 9, and even more preferably 4 to 6.
  • an oxyethylene group (-CH 2 CH 2 O-) or an oxypropylene group (-CH (CH 3 ) CH 2 O- or -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 O-) is preferable, and oxyethylene. Groups are more preferred.
  • a primary or secondary amine having a phenoxy group and a haloalkyl ether are heated and reacted, and then a strong base (for example, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, and tetraalkylammonium hydroxide) is added to the reaction system.
  • a strong base for example, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, and tetraalkylammonium hydroxide
  • Etc. is added, and the reaction product is further extracted with an organic solvent (for example, ethyl acetate, chloroform, etc.).
  • a compound (PA) that has a proton-accepting functional group and decomposes by irradiation with active light or radiation to reduce or eliminate the proton-accepting property, or to generate a compound that has changed from proton-accepting property to acidic.
  • the resist composition has a proton-accepting functional group as an acid diffusion control agent, and is decomposed by irradiation with active light or radiation to reduce or eliminate the proton-accepting property, or to change from the proton-accepting property to acidic. It may contain a compound that produces a modified compound (hereinafter, also referred to as compound (PA)).
  • the proton-accepting functional group is a group capable of electrostatically interacting with a proton or a functional group having an electron, for example, a functional group having a macrocyclic structure such as a cyclic polyether, or a functional group having a macrocyclic structure. It means a functional group having a nitrogen atom with an unshared electron pair that does not contribute to ⁇ -conjugation.
  • the nitrogen atom having an unshared electron pair that does not contribute to ⁇ conjugation is, for example, a nitrogen atom having a partial structure shown in the following general formula.
  • Preferred partial structures of the proton acceptor functional group include, for example, a crown ether structure, an aza crown ether structure, a primary to tertiary amine structure, a pyridine structure, an imidazole structure, a pyrazine structure and the like.
  • Compound (PA) is decomposed by irradiation with active light or radiation to generate a compound whose proton acceptor property is reduced or eliminated, or whose proton acceptor property is changed to acidic.
  • the decrease or disappearance of the proton acceptor property or the change from the proton acceptor property to the acidity is a change in the proton acceptor property due to the addition of a proton to the proton acceptor property functional group.
  • a low molecular weight compound having a nitrogen atom and a group desorbed by the action of an acid can also be used as an acid diffusion control agent.
  • the low molecular weight compound is preferably an amine derivative having a group eliminated by the action of an acid on a nitrogen atom.
  • the group eliminated by the action of the acid is preferably an acetal group, a carbonate group, a carbamate group, a tertiary ester group, a tertiary hydroxyl group, or a hemiaminol ether group, and a carbamate group or a hemiaminol ether group is more preferable. preferable.
  • the molecular weight of the low molecular weight compound is preferably 100 to 1000, more preferably 100 to 700, and even more preferably 100 to 500.
  • the low molecular weight compound may have a carbamate group having a protecting group on the nitrogen atom.
  • the content of the acid diffusion control agent is preferably 0.001 to 15% by mass, preferably 0.01 to 8% by mass, based on the total solid content of the resist composition. More preferred.
  • the acid diffusion control agent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the resist composition contains a compound represented by the general formula (PB) as a photoacid generator, the compound represented by the general formula (PB) includes a structure having a function corresponding to an acid diffusion control agent. Therefore, it is also preferable that the resist composition does not substantially contain the acid diffusion control agent.
  • the fact that the acid diffusion control agent is not substantially contained means that the content of the acid diffusion control agent is 5% by mass or less with respect to the content of the compound represented by the general formula (PB). ..
  • the molar ratio is preferably 2.5 or more from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, and the molar ratio is preferably 300 or less from the viewpoint of suppressing a decrease in resolution due to the thickening of the resist pattern over time from exposure to heat treatment.
  • the photoacid generator / acid diffusion control agent (molar ratio) is more preferably 5.0 to 200, and even more preferably 7.0 to 150.
  • Examples of the acid diffusion control agent include the compounds described in paragraphs [0140] to [0144] of JP2013-11833A (amine compounds, amide group-containing compounds, urea compounds, nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compounds, etc.). Can also be mentioned.
  • the resist composition may contain a hydrophobic resin different from the resin (A).
  • Hydrophobic resins are preferably designed to be unevenly distributed on the surface of the resist membrane, but unlike surfactants, they do not necessarily have to have hydrophilic groups in the molecule and are a uniform mixture of polar and non-polar substances. It does not have to contribute to.
  • the effects of adding the hydrophobic resin include controlling the static and dynamic contact angles of the resist film surface with respect to water, and suppressing outgas.
  • Hydrophobic resin from the viewpoint of uneven distribution in the film surface layer, "fluorine atom”, “silicon atom”, and has any one or more "CH 3 partial structure contained in the side chain portion of the resin” It is preferable to have two or more kinds. Further, the hydrophobic resin preferably has a hydrocarbon group having 5 or more carbon atoms. These groups may be contained in the main chain of the resin or may be substituted in the side chain.
  • the fluorine atoms and / or silicon atoms in the hydrophobic resin may be contained in the main chain of the resin and may be contained in the side chains. You may.
  • the partial structure having a fluorine atom is preferably an alkyl group having a fluorine atom, a cycloalkyl group having a fluorine atom, or an aryl group having a fluorine atom.
  • the alkyl group having a fluorine atom (preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms) is a linear or branched alkyl group in which at least one hydrogen atom is substituted with a fluorine atom. Further, it may have a substituent other than a fluorine atom.
  • the cycloalkyl group having a fluorine atom is a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkyl group in which at least one hydrogen atom is substituted with a fluorine atom, and may further have a substituent other than the fluorine atom.
  • the aryl group having a fluorine atom include those in which at least one hydrogen atom of an aryl group such as a phenyl group and a naphthyl group is substituted with a fluorine atom, and further have a substituent other than the fluorine atom. May be.
  • Examples of the repeating unit having a fluorine atom or a silicon atom include the repeating unit exemplified in paragraph [0519] of US2012 / 0251948A1.
  • the hydrophobic resin may preferably contain a CH 3 partial structure side chain moiety.
  • CH 3 partial structure contained in the side chain portion in the hydrophobic resin an ethyl group, and is intended to include CH 3 partial structure a propyl group has.
  • the methyl group directly bonded to the main chain of the hydrophobic resin (for example, the ⁇ -methyl group of the repeating unit having a methacrylic acid structure) contributes to the uneven distribution of the surface of the hydrophobic resin due to the influence of the main chain. small Therefore, not included in the CH 3 partial structures in the present invention.
  • the resins described in JP2011-24801A, JP2010-175859, and JP2012-032544 can also be preferably used.
  • the content of the hydrophobic resin is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 15% by mass, based on the total solid content of the resist composition. ..
  • the resist composition may contain a surfactant.
  • a surfactant is included, a pattern having better adhesion and fewer development defects can be formed.
  • the surfactant is preferably a fluorine-based and / or silicon-based surfactant.
  • Fluorine-based and / or silicon-based surfactants include, for example, the surfactants described in paragraph [0276] of US Patent Application Publication No. 2008/0248425.
  • Ftop EF301 or EF303 (manufactured by Shin-Akita Kasei Co., Ltd.); Florard FC430, 431, and 4430 (manufactured by Sumitomo 3M Co., Ltd.); Megafuck F171, F173, F176, F189, F113, F110, F177, F120, and R08 (manufactured by DIC Co., Ltd.); Surflon S-382, SC101, 102, 103, 104, 105 or 106 (manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.); Troysol S-366 (manufactured by Troy Chemical Co., Ltd.) ); GF-300 or GF-150 (manufactured by Toa Synthetic Chemical Co., Ltd.), Surflon S-393 (manufactured by Seimi Chemical Co., Ltd.); Ftop EF121, EF122A, EF122B, RF122C, EF125M, EF135M, EF
  • the surfactant is a fluoroaliphatic compound produced by a telomerization method (also referred to as a telomer method) or an oligomerization method (also referred to as an oligomer method) in addition to the known surfactants as shown above. May be synthesized using. Specifically, a polymer having a fluoroaliphatic group derived from this fluoroaliphatic compound may be used as a surfactant. This fluoroaliphatic compound can be synthesized, for example, by the method described in JP-A-2002-090991. In addition, surfactants other than the fluorine-based and / or silicon-based surfactants described in paragraph [0280] of U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2008/0248425 may be used.
  • one type may be used alone, or two or more types may be used.
  • the content of the surfactant is preferably 0.0001 to 2% by mass, more preferably 0.0005 to 1% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
  • the resist composition comprises a dissolution inhibitory compound, a dye, a plasticizer, a photosensitizer, a light absorber, and / or a compound that promotes solubility in a developing solution (for example, a phenol compound having a molecular weight of 1000 or less, or a carboxylic acid group. (Alicyclic or aliphatic compound) containing the above may be further contained.
  • the resist composition may further contain a dissolution inhibitory compound.
  • a dissolution inhibitory compound is a compound having a molecular weight of 3000 or less, which is decomposed by the action of an acid to reduce its solubility in an organic developer.
  • Step 1 Forming a resist film on a substrate using a resist composition
  • Step 2 Exposing the resist film (preferably with UV light)
  • Step 3 Using a developing solution to expose the exposed resist film Steps of developing and forming a pattern The procedure of each of the above steps will be described in detail below.
  • Step 1 is a step of forming a resist film on the substrate using the resist composition.
  • the definition of the resist composition is as described above.
  • Examples of the method of forming a resist film on a substrate using a resist composition include a method of applying a resist composition on a substrate. It is preferable to filter the resist composition as necessary before coating.
  • the pore size of the filter is preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 0.05 ⁇ m or less, still more preferably 0.03 ⁇ m or less.
  • the filter is preferably made of polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene, or nylon.
  • the resist composition can be applied onto a substrate (eg, silicon, silicon dioxide coating) such as that used in the manufacture of integrated circuit elements by an appropriate coating method such as a spinner or coater.
  • the coating method is preferably spin coating using a spinner.
  • the rotation speed at the time of spin coating using a spinner is preferably 1000 to 3000 rpm.
  • the substrate may be dried to form a resist film. If necessary, various undercoat films (inorganic film, organic film, antireflection film) may be formed under the resist film.
  • drying method examples include a method of heating and drying.
  • the heating can be carried out by a means provided in a normal exposure machine and / or a developing machine, and may be carried out by using a hot plate or the like.
  • the heating temperature is preferably 80 to 150 ° C, more preferably 80 to 140 ° C, and even more preferably 80 to 130 ° C.
  • the heating time is preferably 30 to 1000 seconds, more preferably 60 to 800 seconds, still more preferably 60 to 600 seconds.
  • the film thickness of the resist film is not particularly limited, but 10 to 65 nm is preferable, and 15 to 50 nm is more preferable, from the viewpoint of forming a fine pattern with higher accuracy.
  • a top coat may be formed on the upper layer of the resist film by using the top coat composition. It is preferable that the topcoat composition is not mixed with the resist film and can be uniformly applied to the upper layer of the resist film. Further, it is preferable to dry the resist film before forming the top coat. Next, the topcoat composition can be applied onto the obtained resist film by the same means as in the method for forming the resist film, and further dried to form a topcoat.
  • the film thickness of the top coat is preferably 10 to 200 nm, more preferably 20 to 100 nm, and even more preferably 40 to 80 nm.
  • the top coat is not particularly limited, and a conventionally known top coat can be formed by a conventionally known method.
  • a top coat is based on the description in paragraphs [0072] to [0082] of JP-A-2014-059543. Can be formed.
  • the basic compound that can be contained in the top coat include basic compounds that may be contained in the resist composition described later.
  • the top coat preferably contains a compound containing at least one group or bond selected from the group consisting of an ether bond, a thioether bond, a hydroxyl group, a thiol group, a carbonyl bond, and an ester bond.
  • Step 2 is a step of exposing the resist film (preferably with EUV light).
  • Examples of the exposure method include a method of irradiating the formed resist film with EUV light through a predetermined mask.
  • the heating temperature is preferably 80 to 150 ° C, more preferably 80 to 140 ° C, and even more preferably 80 to 130 ° C.
  • the heating time is preferably 10 to 1000 seconds, more preferably 10 to 180 seconds, still more preferably 30 to 120 seconds.
  • the heating can be carried out by means provided in a normal exposure machine and / or a developing machine, and may be carried out by using a hot plate or the like. This process is also called post-exposure baking.
  • Step 3 is a step of developing the exposed resist film using a developing solution to form a pattern.
  • the developer may be an alkaline developer or a developer containing an organic solvent (hereinafter, also referred to as an organic developer).
  • Examples of the developing method include a method of immersing the substrate in a tank filled with a developing solution for a certain period of time (dip method), and a method of raising the developing solution on the surface of the substrate by surface tension and allowing it to stand for a certain period of time for development (paddle). Method), a method of spraying the developer on the surface of the substrate (spray method), and a method of continuing to discharge the developer while scanning the developer discharge nozzle at a constant speed on the substrate rotating at a constant speed (dynamic discharge). Law). Further, after the step of performing the development, a step of stopping the development may be carried out while substituting with another solvent.
  • the development time is not particularly limited as long as the resin in the unexposed portion is sufficiently dissolved, and is preferably 10 to 300 seconds, more preferably 20 to 120 seconds.
  • the temperature of the developing solution is preferably 0 to 50 ° C, more preferably 15 to 35 ° C.
  • alkaline aqueous solution containing alkali is not particularly limited, and for example, a quaternary ammonium salt typified by tetramethylammonium hydroxide, an inorganic alkali, a primary amine, a secondary amine, a tertiary amine, an alcohol amine, a cyclic amine, or the like can be used.
  • Examples include alkaline aqueous solutions containing.
  • the alkaline developer is preferably an aqueous solution of a quaternary ammonium salt typified by tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH).
  • TMAH tetramethylammonium hydroxide
  • An appropriate amount of alcohols, surfactants and the like may be added to the alkaline developer.
  • the alkali concentration of the alkaline developer is usually 0.1 to 20% by mass.
  • the pH of the alkaline developer is usually 10.0 to 15.0.
  • the organic developer is a developer containing at least one organic solvent selected from the group consisting of a ketone solvent, an ester solvent, an alcohol solvent, an amide solvent, an ether solvent, and a hydrocarbon solvent. It is preferable to have it.
  • ketone solvent examples include 1-octanone, 2-octanone, 1-nonanonone, 2-nonanonone, acetone, 2-heptanone (methylamylketone), 4-heptanone, 1-hexanone, 2-hexanone, and diisobutylketone.
  • Examples thereof include cyclohexanone, methylcyclohexanone, phenylacetone, methylethylketone, methylisobutylketone, acetylacetone, acetonylacetone, ionone, diacetonyl alcohol, acetylcarbinol, acetophenone, methylnaphthylketone, isophorone, and propylene carbonate.
  • ester solvent examples include methyl acetate, butyl acetate, ethyl acetate, isopropyl acetate, pentyl acetate, isopentyl acetate, amyl acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate, and diethylene glycol monoethyl.
  • examples thereof include butyl, methyl 2-hydroxyisobutyrate, isoamyl acetate, isobutyl isobutyrate, butyl propionate and the like.
  • the alcohol solvent for example, the solvents disclosed in paragraphs [0715] to [0718] of US Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0070167A1 can be used. ..
  • a plurality of the above solvents may be mixed, or may be mixed with a solvent other than the above or water.
  • the water content of the developer as a whole is preferably less than 50% by mass, more preferably less than 20% by mass, further preferably less than 10% by mass, and particularly preferably substantially free of water.
  • the content of the organic solvent in the organic developer is preferably 50% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less, more preferably 80% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less, and 90% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less, based on the total amount of the developing solution. The following is more preferable, and 95% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less is particularly preferable.
  • the pattern forming method preferably includes a step of washing with a rinsing solution after the step 3.
  • Examples of the rinsing solution used in the rinsing step after the step of developing with an alkaline developer include pure water. An appropriate amount of surfactant may be added to pure water. An appropriate amount of surfactant may be added to the rinse solution.
  • the rinse solution used in the rinse step after the development step using the organic developer is not particularly limited as long as it does not dissolve the resist pattern, and a solution containing a general organic solvent can be used.
  • a rinsing solution a rinsing solution containing at least one organic solvent selected from the group consisting of a hydrocarbon solvent, a ketone solvent, an ester solvent, an alcohol solvent, an amide solvent, and an ether solvent is used. Is preferable.
  • the hydrocarbon solvent, the ketone solvent, the ester solvent, the alcohol solvent, the amide solvent, and the ether solvent include those similar to those described in the developing solution containing an organic solvent.
  • the method of the rinsing process is not particularly limited, and for example, a method of continuously discharging the rinsing liquid onto the substrate rotating at a constant speed (rotary coating method), or immersing the substrate in a tank filled with the rinsing liquid for a certain period of time. Examples thereof include a method (dip method) and a method of spraying a rinse liquid on the substrate surface (spray method).
  • the pattern forming method of the present invention may include a heating step (Post Bake) after the rinsing step. In this step, the developer and rinse liquid remaining between the patterns and inside the patterns are removed by baking. In addition, this step has the effect of smoothing the resist pattern and improving the surface roughness of the pattern.
  • the heating step after the rinsing step is usually performed at 40 to 250 ° C. (preferably 90 to 200 ° C.) for 10 seconds to 3 minutes (preferably 30 seconds to 120 seconds).
  • the substrate may be etched using the formed pattern as a mask. That is, the pattern formed in step 3 may be used as a mask to process the substrate (or the underlayer film and the substrate) to form the pattern on the substrate.
  • the processing method of the substrate (or the underlayer film and the substrate) is not particularly limited, but the substrate (or the underlayer film and the substrate) is dry-etched using the pattern formed in step 3 as a mask to obtain the substrate.
  • the method of forming the pattern is preferable.
  • the dry etching may be one-step etching or multi-step etching. When the etching is an etching consisting of a plurality of stages, the etching of each stage may be the same process or different processes.
  • etching any known method can be used for etching, and various conditions and the like are appropriately determined according to the type and application of the substrate.
  • the Bulletin of the International Society of Optical Engineering (Proc. Of SPIE) Vol. Etching can be performed according to 6924, 692420 (2008), Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-267112, and the like.
  • the method described in "Chapter 4 Etching" of "Semiconductor Process Textbook 4th Edition 2007 Published Publisher: SEMI Japan” can also be applied. Of these, oxygen plasma etching is preferable for dry etching.
  • the resist composition and various materials used in the pattern forming method of the present invention are made of metal or the like. It is preferable that it does not contain impurities.
  • the content of impurities contained in these materials is preferably 1 mass ppm or less, more preferably 10 mass ppb or less, further preferably 100 mass ppt or less, particularly preferably 10 mass ppt or less, and most preferably 1 mass ppt or less.
  • examples of the metal impurities include Na, K, Ca, Fe, Cu, Mg, Al, Li, Cr, Ni, Sn, Ag, As, Au, Ba, Cd, Co, Pb, Ti, V, etc. W, Zn and the like can be mentioned.
  • Examples of the method for removing impurities such as metals from various materials include filtration using a filter.
  • the pore size of the filter is preferably less than 100 nm, more preferably 10 nm or less, and even more preferably 5 nm or less.
  • the filter is preferably made of polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene, or nylon.
  • the filter may be composed of a composite material in which the above filter material and an ion exchange medium are combined.
  • a filter that has been previously washed with an organic solvent may be used.
  • a plurality of types of filters may be connected in series or in parallel. When a plurality of types of filters are used, filters having different pore diameters and / or materials may be used in combination.
  • various materials may be filtered a plurality of times, and the step of filtering the various materials a plurality of times may be a circulation filtration step.
  • the step of filtering the various materials a plurality of times may be a circulation filtration step.
  • a polyethylene filter having a pore diameter of 50 nm, a nylon filter having a pore diameter of 10 nm, and a polyethylene filter having a pore diameter of 3 nm in a permutation and perform circulation filtration 10 times or more.
  • the resist composition is 0.1 MPa or less, preferably 0.05 MPa or less, and more preferably 0.01 MPa or less.
  • the resist composition is filtered through a filter and then filled in a clean container.
  • the resist composition filled in the container is preferably stored in a refrigerator. As a result, performance deterioration over time is suppressed.
  • the shorter the time from the completion of filling the composition into the container to the start of refrigerated storage is preferably, generally within 24 hours, preferably within 16 hours, more preferably within 12 hours, and 10 Within hours is even more preferred.
  • the storage temperature is preferably 0 to 15 ° C, more preferably 0 to 10 ° C, and even more preferably 0 to 5 ° C.
  • a method of reducing impurities such as metals contained in various materials for example, a method of selecting a raw material having a low metal content as a raw material constituting various materials, and a filter filtration of the raw materials constituting various materials are performed. Examples thereof include a method of performing distillation under conditions in which contamination is suppressed as much as possible by lining the inside of the apparatus with Teflon (registered trademark).
  • impurities may be removed by an adsorbent, or filter filtration and an adsorbent may be used in combination.
  • a known adsorbent can be used, and for example, an inorganic adsorbent such as silica gel and zeolite, and an organic adsorbent such as activated carbon can be used.
  • an inorganic adsorbent such as silica gel and zeolite
  • an organic adsorbent such as activated carbon
  • Conductive compounds are added to organic treatment liquids such as rinse liquids to prevent damage to chemical liquid piping and various parts (filters, O-rings, tubes, etc.) due to static electricity charging and subsequent electrostatic discharge. You may.
  • the conductive compound is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include methanol.
  • the amount to be added is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass or less, in terms of maintaining preferable development characteristics or rinsing characteristics.
  • As the chemical solution piping for example, various piping coated with SUS (stainless steel), antistatic treated polyethylene, polypropylene, or fluororesin (polytetrafluoroethylene, perfluoroalkoxy resin, etc.). Can be used.
  • antistatic treated polyethylene, polypropylene, or fluororesin polytetrafluoroethylene, perfluoroalkoxy resin, etc.
  • a method for improving the surface roughness of the pattern may be applied to the pattern formed by the method of the present invention.
  • Examples of the method for improving the surface roughness of the pattern include a method of treating the pattern with a plasma of a hydrogen-containing gas disclosed in International Publication No. 2014/002808.
  • SPIE Vol. 8328 83280N-1 "EUV Resist Curing Technology for LWR Reduction and Etch Sensitivity Enhancement" can be mentioned.
  • the aspect ratio obtained by dividing the pattern height by the line width is preferably 2.5 or less, more preferably 2.1 or less, still more preferably 1.7 or less. ..
  • the pattern to be formed is a trench pattern or a contact hole pattern
  • the aspect ratio obtained by dividing the pattern height by the trench width or the hole diameter is preferably 4.0 or less, preferably 3.5. The following is more preferable, and 3.0 or less is further preferable.
  • the pattern forming method of the present invention can also be used for guide pattern forming in DSA (Directed Self-Assembly) (see, for example, ACS Nano Vol. 4 No. 8 Page 4815-4823).
  • DSA Directed Self-Assembly
  • the pattern formed by the above method can be used as, for example, the core material (core) of the spacer process disclosed in JP-A-3-270227 and JP2013-164509.
  • the present invention also relates to a method for manufacturing an electronic device including the above-mentioned pattern forming method, and an electronic device manufactured by this manufacturing method.
  • the electronic device of the present invention is suitably mounted on an electrical and electronic device (home appliance, OA (Office Automation), media-related device, optical device, communication device, etc.).
  • the table below shows the content, weight average molecular weight (Mw), and dispersity (Mw / Mn) occupied by each repeating unit in each resin.
  • the repeating molar ratios in the table are the contents (molar ratios) occupied by each repeating unit constituting each resin shown in the upper row in order from the left.
  • the content occupied by each repeating unit was measured by 13 C-NMR (nuclear magnetic resonance).
  • the weight average molecular weight and the degree of dispersion are values based on the polystyrene-equivalent amount measured by GPC (carrier: tetrahydrofuran (THF)).
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw: polystyrene equivalent) determined from the GPC (carrier: tetrahydrofuran (THF)) of the obtained resin A-1 was 6500, and the dispersity (Mw / Mn) was 1.52. 13
  • the photoacid generators B-1 to B-3 are compounds represented by the general formula (PB), and the photoacid generators C-1 to C-12 are compounds other than the compounds represented by the general formula (PB). It is a photoacid generator.
  • the photoacid generators C-9 to C-12 are compounds represented by the general formula (PA-1).
  • H-1 Megafuck F176 (manufactured by DIC Corporation, fluorine-based surfactant)
  • H-2 Megafuck R08 (manufactured by DIC Corporation, fluorine and silicon-based surfactant)
  • H-3 PF656 (manufactured by OMNOVA, fluorine-based surfactant)
  • the underlayer film forming composition AL412 (manufactured by Brewer Science) was applied onto a silicon wafer having a diameter of 12 inches and baked at 205 ° C. for 60 seconds to form a base film having a film thickness of 20 nm.
  • the resist composition shown in Table 3 was applied onto the resist composition and baked at 100 ° C. for 60 seconds to form a resist film having a film thickness of 30 nm.
  • a pattern obtained for a silicon wafer having a obtained resist film using an EUV exposure apparatus Micro Exposure Tool, NA0.3, Quadrupole, outer sigma 0.68, inner sigma 0.36, manufactured by Exitech).
  • Pattern irradiation was performed so that the average line width of the above was 20 nm.
  • the resist film after exposure was baked at 90 ° C. for 60 seconds, developed with n-butyl acetate for 30 seconds, and spin-dried to obtain a negative pattern.
  • A Number of defects is 50 or less
  • B Number of defects is more than 50 and 100 or less
  • C Number of defects is more than 100 and 200 or less
  • D Number of defects is more than 200 and 300 or less
  • E Number of defects is more than 300 and 400 or less
  • F Number of defects is more than 400 and less than 500
  • G Number of defects is more than 500
  • LWR performance after aging ⁇ Line with slagness after aging (LWR performance after aging, nm)>
  • the pattern obtained by the above method was observed from above the pattern using a length-measuring scanning electron microscope (SEM (Hitachi, Ltd. S-9380II)).
  • the line width of the pattern was observed at 100 points, and the measurement variation was evaluated by 3 ⁇ and used as LWR (nm).
  • a pattern was formed using the resist composition after preparation and then stored in a dark room at room temperature (25 ° C.) for 180 days for evaluation.
  • the LWR (nm) after aging is preferably 4.7 nm or less, 4.4 nm or less, 4.1 nm or less, 3.8 nm or less, 3.5 nm or 3.2 nm or less in this order.
  • the characteristics of the resist composition used and the evaluation results are shown in Table 3 below.
  • the “content” column in the table indicates whether or not the content of the photoacid generator with respect to the total solid content in the resist composition of the example is 15% by mass. If this requirement is satisfied, it is described as “A”, and if it is not satisfied, it is described as “B”.
  • the "Formula PA1” column indicates whether or not the resist composition of the example contains a compound represented by the general formula (PA-1) as a photoacid generator. If this requirement is satisfied, it is described as "A”, and if it is not satisfied, it is described as "B”.
  • the “Formula PB” column indicates whether or not the resist composition of the example contains a compound represented by the general formula (PB) as a photoacid generator.
  • the resin (acid-degradable resin) contained in the resist composition of the examples is the repeating unit a2 and the repeating unit, respectively. It indicates whether or not it has a3, a repeating unit a4, a repeating unit a5, a repeating unit a6, a repeating unit b5, and a repeating unit b6. If this requirement is satisfied, it is described as “A”, and if it is not satisfied, it is described as "B".
  • the resist composition of the present invention is excellent in defect suppression property and LWR performance after aging when a pattern is formed by organic solvent development.
  • the resist composition of the comparative example at least one of the defect suppressing property and the LWR performance after aging was insufficient.
  • the resist composition of Comparative Example 1-1 in the acid-degradable resin, only the repeating unit having no F atom at the ⁇ -position is used without using the repeating unit having the F atom at the ⁇ -position (repeating unit a1). It is considered that it is used and the shot noise of EUV light is large.
  • the acid-degradable resin uses a resin having 3 CF groups at the ⁇ -position without using a repeating unit having an F atom at the ⁇ -position, and is developed by an organic solvent. This is probably because the solubility in the solution was too high.
  • the acid-decomposable resin uses a resin having an I atom at the ⁇ -position instead of using a repeating unit having an F atom at the ⁇ -position, and is stable over time.
  • the resin contained in the resist composition preferably has the repeating unit a2, more preferably the repeating unit a3, and further preferably the repeating unit a4. It was confirmed that it is particularly preferable to have the repeating unit a5 or b5, and it is most preferable to have the repeating unit a6 or b6 (see the results of Examples 1-1 to 1-26, etc.).
  • the resist composition preferably contains a compound represented by the general formula (PA-1) from the viewpoint of more excellent effect of the present invention (comparison between Examples 1-1 and 1-27). , Comparison of Examples 1-5 and 1-28, Comparison of Examples 1-9 and 1-29, Comparison of Examples 1-11 and 1-30, Examples 1-19 and 1-31 Comparison, etc.).
  • the resist composition preferably contains a compound represented by the general formula (PB) (comparison and implementation of Examples 1-1 and 1-33). Comparison of Examples 1-5 and 1-34, Comparison of Examples 1-9 and 1-35, Comparison of Examples 1-11 and 1-36, Examples 1-19, 1-37 and 1- Comparison with 50, Comparison with Examples 1-20, 1-38 and 1-48, Comparison with Examples 1-21, 1-39 and 1-47, Examples 1-22, 1-40 and 1 See comparison between -41 and 1-49, etc.).
  • PB general formula
  • the resist composition preferably contains a photoacid generator in an amount of 15% by mass or more based on the total solid content (Examples 1-1 and 1-42). Comparison, comparison between Examples 1-5 and 1-43, comparison between Examples 1-9 and 1-44, comparison between Examples 1-11 and 1-45, Examples 1-19 and 1- Comparison with 46, comparison with Examples 1-39 and 1-47, comparison with Examples 1-41 and 1-49, etc.).
  • the underlayer film forming composition AL412 (manufactured by Brewer Science) was applied onto a silicon wafer having a diameter of 12 inches and baked at 205 ° C. for 60 seconds to form a base film having a film thickness of 20 nm.
  • the resist composition shown in Table 4 was applied onto the resist composition and baked at 100 ° C. for 60 seconds to form a resist film having a film thickness of 30 nm.
  • a pattern obtained for a silicon wafer having a obtained resist film using an EUV exposure apparatus Micro Exposure Tool, NA0.3, Quadrupole, outer sigma 0.68, inner sigma 0.36, manufactured by Exitech).
  • Pattern irradiation was performed so that the average line width of the above was 20 nm.
  • the resist film after exposure was baked at 90 ° C. for 60 seconds, developed with an aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (2.38% by mass) for 30 seconds, and then rinsed with pure water for 30 seconds. Then, this was spin-dried to obtain a positive pattern. Using the obtained positive pattern, the defect suppression property and the LWR performance after aging were evaluated in the same manner as described above.
  • the resist composition of the present invention is excellent in defect suppression property and LWR performance after aging even when a pattern is formed by alkaline development.
  • the resist composition of the comparative example at least one of the defect suppressing property and the LWR performance after aging was insufficient.
  • the resist composition of Comparative Example 2-1 in the acid-degradable resin only the repeating unit having no F atom at the ⁇ -position is used without using the repeating unit having the F atom at the ⁇ -position (repeating unit a1). It is considered that it is used and the shot noise of EUV light is large.

Abstract

Provided is an actinic-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition which, when used in pattern formation with EUV light, gives patterns having few defects and which, even after long-term storage, gives patterns having excellent LWR performance. Also provided are a method for forming a pattern and a method for producing an electronic device which relate to the actinic-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition. The actinic-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition comprises an acid-decomposable resin and a compound that generates an acid upon irradiation with actinic rays or radiation, wherein the acid-decomposable resin includes repeating unit a1, which is represented by general formula (A1). In general formula (A1), RQ represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group.

Description

感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物、パターン形成方法、電子デバイスの製造方法Actinic light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, pattern forming method, manufacturing method of electronic device
 本発明は、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物、パターン形成方法、及び、電子デバイスの製造方法に関する。 The present invention relates to a sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, a pattern forming method, and a method for manufacturing an electronic device.
 IC(Integrated Circuit、集積回路)及びLSI(Large Scale Integrated circuit、大規模集積回路)等の半導体デバイスの製造プロセスにおいては、感光性組成物を用いたリソグラフィーによる微細加工が行われている。
 リソグラフィーの方法として、感光性組成物によりレジスト膜を形成した後、得られた膜を露光して、その後、現像する方法が挙げられる。特に、近年、露光の際にEUV(Extreme ultraviolet)光を用いる検討がなされている(特許文献1)。
In the manufacturing process of semiconductor devices such as ICs (Integrated Circuits, integrated circuits) and LSIs (Large Scale Integrated Circuits, large-scale integrated circuits), micromachining by lithography using photosensitive compositions is performed.
Examples of the lithography method include a method of forming a resist film with a photosensitive composition, exposing the obtained film, and then developing the film. In particular, in recent years, studies have been made on the use of EUV (Extreme ultimate) light for exposure (Patent Document 1).
特開2016-85382号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-85382
 近年、EUV光を用いて形成されるパターンの欠陥をより少なくできることが求められている。また、製造してから長期間(例えば180日)保存した後に、パターン形成に適用した場合でも、得られるパターンのLWR(line width roughness)性能が良好であることが求められている。 In recent years, it has been required to reduce the defects of patterns formed by using EUV light. Further, even when it is applied to pattern formation after being stored for a long period of time (for example, 180 days) after being manufactured, it is required that the LWR (line width roughness) performance of the obtained pattern is good.
 そこで本発明は、EUV光を用いて形成されるパターンにおける欠陥の発生が抑制され、長期間保存をした場合でもLWR性能に優れるパターンを得られる感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を提供することを課題とする。
 また、本発明は、上記感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物に関する、パターン形成方法、及び、電子デバイスの製造方法を提供することを課題とする。
Therefore, the present invention provides a sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition that suppresses the occurrence of defects in a pattern formed by using EUV light and can obtain a pattern having excellent LWR performance even when stored for a long period of time. The task is to do.
Another object of the present invention is to provide a pattern forming method and a method for manufacturing an electronic device regarding the above-mentioned sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition.
 本発明者らは、以下の構成により上記課題を解決できることを見出した。 The present inventors have found that the above problems can be solved by the following configuration.
 〔1〕
 酸分解性樹脂と、活性光線又は放射線の照射により酸を発生する化合物と、を含み、
 上記酸分解性樹脂が、一般式(A1)で表される繰り返し単位a1を有する、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 一般式(A1)中、Rは水素原子又は有機基を表す。
 〔2〕
 上記繰り返し単位a1が、酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位a2を含む、〔1〕に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
 〔3〕
 上記繰り返し単位a2が、一般式(A2)で表される繰り返し単位a3を含む、〔2〕に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
 一般式(A2)中、RQ1~RQ3は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基を表す。
 RQ1~RQ3のうちの2つは互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
 〔4〕
 上記繰り返し単位a1が、
 Rが、水素原子、又は、
 ラクトン基、スルトン基、カーボネート基、水酸基、スルホンアミド基、アミド基、カルボン酸基、及び、光酸発生基からなる群から選択される1以上の特定基を有する基であって脱離基ではない基Xを表す、繰り返し単位a4を含む、〔1〕~〔3〕のいずれかに記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
 〔5〕
 上記繰り返し単位a4が、フッ素原子を更に有する上記基Xを有する繰り返し単位a5を含む、〔4〕に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
 〔6〕
 上記繰り返し単位a5が、ヘキサフルオロプロパノール基を有する上記基Xを有する繰り返し単位a6を含む、〔5〕に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
 〔7〕
 上記酸分解性樹脂が、一般式(B1)で表される繰り返し単位b5を有する、〔1〕~〔6〕のいずれかに記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
 一般式(B1)中、Xは、水素原子、アルキル基、又は、フッ素原子以外のハロゲン原子を表す。
 Lは、単結合又は-COO-を表す。
 RB1は、ラクトン基、スルトン基、カーボネート基、水酸基、スルホンアミド基、アミド基、カルボン酸基、及び、光酸発生基からなる群から選択される1以上の特定基、並びに、フッ素原子を有する基であって、脱離基ではない基Zを表す。
 〔8〕
 上記繰り返し単位b5が、ヘキサフルオロプロパノール基を有する上記基Zを有する繰り返し単位b6を含む、〔7〕に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
 〔9〕
 上記活性光線又は放射線の照射により酸を発生する化合物が、一般式(PA-1)で表される化合物を含む、〔1〕~〔8〕のいずれかに記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
 一般式(PA-1)中、A及びAは、それぞれ独立に、-SO-R、又は、-CO-Rを表す。Rは、有機基を表す。
 Mは、カチオンを表す。
 〔10〕
 上記活性光線又は放射線の照射により酸を発生する化合物が、一般式(PB)で表される化合物を含む、〔1〕~〔9〕のいずれかに記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
 M  A-L-B M     (PB)
 一般式(PB)中、M 及びM は、それぞれ独立に、有機カチオンを表す。
 Lは、2価の有機基を表す。
 Aは、酸アニオン基を表す。
 ただし、一般式(PB)で表される化合物のM 及びM がそれぞれ水素原子で置換されたHA-L-BHで表される化合物において、HAで表される基のpKaは、BHで表される基のpKaよりも低い。
 Bは、一般式(B-1)~(B-4)のいずれかで表される基を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 上記一般式(B-1)~(B-4)中、*は、結合位置を表す。
 上記一般式(B-1)~(B-4)中、Rは、有機基を表す。
 〔11〕
 上記活性光線又は放射線の照射により酸を発生する化合物の含有量が、全固形分に対して15質量%以上である、〔1〕~〔10〕のいずれかに記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
 〔12〕
 〔1〕~〔11〕のいずれかに記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を用いて、基板上にレジスト膜を形成する工程と、
 上記レジスト膜を露光する工程と、
 現像液を用いて、上記露光されたレジスト膜を現像し、パターンを形成する工程と、を有するパターン形成方法。
 〔13〕
 〔12〕に記載のパターン形成方法を含む、電子デバイスの製造方法。
[1]
It contains an acid-degradable resin and a compound that generates an acid when irradiated with active light or radiation.
A photosensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition in which the acid-decomposable resin has a repeating unit a1 represented by the general formula (A1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
In the general formula (A1), RQ represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group.
[2]
The actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to [1], wherein the repeating unit a1 contains a repeating unit a2 having an acid-degradable group.
[3]
The actinic light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to [2], wherein the repeating unit a2 includes a repeating unit a3 represented by the general formula (A2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
In the general formula (A2), RQ1 to RQ3 each independently represent an alkyl group.
Two of RQ1 to RQ3 may be combined with each other to form a ring.
[4]
The repeating unit a1 is
RQ is a hydrogen atom or
A group having one or more specific groups selected from the group consisting of a lactone group, a sulton group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group, a sulfonamide group, an amide group, a carboxylic acid group, and a photoacid generating group. The sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of [1] to [3], which comprises a repeating unit a4 and represents no group X.
[5]
The actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to [4], wherein the repeating unit a4 includes the repeating unit a5 having the group X further having a fluorine atom.
[6]
The actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to [5], wherein the repeating unit a5 contains a repeating unit a6 having the group X having a hexafluoropropanol group.
[7]
The actinic light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of [1] to [6], wherein the acid-decomposable resin has a repeating unit b5 represented by the general formula (B1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
In the general formula (B1), X represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or a halogen atom other than a fluorine atom.
L B represents a single bond or -COO-.
R B1 is a lactone group, a sultone group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group, a sulfonamido group, an amide group, a carboxylic acid group, and one or more specific groups selected from the group consisting of photoacid generator groups, as well as a fluorine atom Represents a group Z that has a group and is not a elimination group.
[8]
The actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to [7], wherein the repeating unit b5 contains the repeating unit b6 having the group Z having a hexafluoropropanol group.
[9]
The actinic cheilitis or radiation according to any one of [1] to [8], wherein the compound that generates an acid by irradiation with active light or radiation contains a compound represented by the general formula (PA-1). Sex resin composition.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
In formula (PA-1), A 1 and A 2 are each independently, -SO 2 -R P, or represents -CO-R P. R P represents an organic group.
M + represents a cation.
[10]
The actinic light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin according to any one of [1] to [9], wherein the compound that generates an acid by irradiation with active light or radiation contains a compound represented by the general formula (PB). Composition.
M 1 + A - - LB M 2 + (PB)
In formula (PB), M 1 + and M 2 + each independently represents an organic cation.
L represents a divalent organic group.
A represents an acid anion group.
However, in the compound represented by HA-L-BH in which M 1 + and M 2 + of the compound represented by the general formula (PB) are respectively substituted with hydrogen atoms, the pKa of the group represented by HA is It is lower than the pKa of the group represented by BH.
B represents a group represented by any of the general formulas (B-1) to (B-4).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
In the above general formulas (B-1) to (B-4), * represents a bonding position.
In the general formula (B-1) ~ (B -4), R B represents an organic group.
[11]
The actinic cheilitis or sensation according to any one of [1] to [10], wherein the content of the compound that generates an acid by irradiation with the active light or radiation is 15% by mass or more with respect to the total solid content. Radiation resin composition.
[12]
A step of forming a resist film on a substrate using the actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of [1] to [11].
The process of exposing the resist film and
A pattern forming method comprising a step of developing the exposed resist film using a developing solution to form a pattern.
[13]
A method for manufacturing an electronic device, which comprises the pattern forming method according to [12].
 本発明によれば、EUV光を用いて形成されるパターンにおける欠陥の発生が抑制され、長期間保存をした場合でもLWR性能に優れるパターンを得られる感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を提供できる。
 また、本発明によれば、上記感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物に関する、パターン形成方法、及び、電子デバイスの製造方法を提供できる。
According to the present invention, an actinic light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition capable of suppressing the occurrence of defects in a pattern formed by using EUV light and obtaining a pattern having excellent LWR performance even when stored for a long period of time. Can be provided.
Further, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a pattern forming method and a method for manufacturing an electronic device regarding the above-mentioned sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition.
 以下に、本発明を実施するための形態の一例を説明する。
 なお、本明細書において「~」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む範囲を意味する。
 本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換又は無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有していない基と共に置換基を有する基をも含む。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも含む。
 置換基は、特に断らない限り、1価の置換基が好ましい。
 本明細書中における「有機基」とは、少なくとも1個の炭素原子を含む基をいう。
Hereinafter, an example of a mode for carrying out the present invention will be described.
The numerical range represented by using "-" in the present specification means a range including the numerical values before and after "-" as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
In the notation of a group (atomic group) in the present specification, the notation that does not describe substitution or non-substitution includes a group having a substituent as well as a group having no substituent. For example, the "alkyl group" includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
Unless otherwise specified, the substituent is preferably a monovalent substituent.
As used herein, the term "organic group" refers to a group containing at least one carbon atom.
 本明細書において、ハロゲン原子としては、例えば、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、及び、ヨウ素原子が挙げられる。 In the present specification, examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
 本明細書において表記される2価の基の結合方向は、特に断らない限り制限されない。例えば、「X-Y-Z」なる一般式で表される化合物中の、Yが-COO-である場合、Yは、-CO-O-であってもよく、-O-CO-であってもよい。また、上記化合物は「X-CO-O-Z」であってもよく「X-O-CO-Z」であってもよい。 The bonding direction of the divalent group described in the present specification is not limited unless otherwise specified. For example, when Y is -COO- in the compound represented by the general formula "XYZ", Y may be -CO-O-, and is -O-CO-. You may. Moreover, the said compound may be "X-CO-O-Z" or "X-O-CO-Z".
 本明細書における、「(メタ)アクリル」とは、アクリル及びメタクリルを含む総称であり、「アクリル及びメタクリルの少なくとも1種」を意味する。同様に「(メタ)アクリル酸」とは、「アクリル酸及びメタクリル酸の少なくとも1種」を意味する。 In the present specification, "(meth) acrylic" is a general term including acrylic and methacrylic, and means "at least one of acrylic and methacrylic". Similarly, "(meth) acrylic acid" means "at least one of acrylic acid and methacrylic acid".
 本明細書中における「活性光線」又は「放射線」とは、例えば、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光: Extreme Ultraviolet)、X線、及び電子線(EB:Electron Beam)等を意味する。本明細書中における「光」とは、活性光線又は放射線を意味する。
 本明細書中における「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線、X線、及びEUV光等による露光のみならず、電子線、及びイオンビーム等の粒子線による描画も含む。
As used herein, the term "active ray" or "radiation" refers to, for example, the emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light: Extreme Ultraviolet), X rays, and electron beams (EB). : Electron Beam) and the like. As used herein, "light" means active light or radiation.
Unless otherwise specified, the term "exposure" as used herein refers to not only exposure to the emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet rays, X-rays, EUV light, etc., but also electron beams and It also includes drawing with particle beams such as ion beams.
 本明細書において、樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)、数平均分子量(Mn)、及び分散度(分子量分布ともいう)(Mw/Mn)は、GPC(Gel Permeation Chromatography)装置(東ソー社製HLC-8120GPC)によるGPC測定(溶媒:テトラヒドロフラン、流量(サンプル注入量):10μL、カラム:東ソー社製TSK gel Multipore HXL-M、カラム温度:40℃、流速:1.0mL/分、検出器:示差屈折率検出器(Refractive Index Detector))によるポリスチレン換算値として定義される。 In the present specification, the weight average molecular weight (Mw), the number average molecular weight (Mn), and the degree of dispersion (also referred to as molecular weight distribution) (Mw / Mn) of the resin are GPC (Gel Permeation Chromatography) apparatus (HLC-manufactured by Toso Co., Ltd.). 8120 GPC) GPC measurement (solvent: tetrahydrofuran, flow rate (sample injection volume): 10 μL, column: TSK gel Multipore HXL-M manufactured by Toso Co., Ltd., column temperature: 40 ° C., flow velocity: 1.0 mL / min, detector: differential refractometer It is defined as a polystyrene conversion value by a rate detector (Refractive Index Detector).
 1Åは1×10-10mである。 1 Å is 1 x 10-10 m.
 本明細書において酸解離定数(pKa)とは、水溶液中でのpKaを表し、具体的には、下記ソフトウェアパッケージ1を用いて、ハメットの置換基定数及び公知文献値のデータベースに基づいた値を、計算により求められる値である。本明細書中に記載したpKaの値は、全て、このソフトウェアパッケージを用いて計算により求めた値を示す。 In the present specification, the acid dissociation constant (pKa) represents pKa in an aqueous solution, and specifically, the following software package 1 is used to obtain a value based on a database of Hammett's substituent constants and known literature values. , It is a value obtained by calculation. All pKa values described herein indicate values calculated using this software package.
 ソフトウェアパッケージ1: Advanced Chemistry Development (ACD/Labs) Software V8.14 for Solaris (1994-2007 ACD/Labs)。 Software Package 1: Advanced Chemistry Development (ACD / Labs) Software V8.14 for Solaris (1994-2007 ACD / Labors).
 一方で、pKaは、分子軌道計算法によっても求められる。この具体的な方法としては、熱力学サイクルに基づいて、溶媒中におけるH解離自由エネルギーを計算して算出する手法が挙げられる。(なお、本明細書において、上記溶媒としては、通常は水を使用し、水ではpKaを求められない場合にはDMSO(ジメチルスルホキシド)を使用する。)
 H解離自由エネルギーの計算方法については、例えばDFT(密度汎関数法)により計算できるが、他にも様々な手法が文献等で報告されており、これに制限されるものではない。なお、DFTを実施できるソフトウェアは複数存在するが、例えば、Gaussian16が挙げられる。
On the other hand, pKa can also be obtained by the molecular orbital calculation method. As a specific method for this, there is a method of calculating H + dissociation free energy in a solvent based on a thermodynamic cycle. (In the present specification, water is usually used as the solvent, and DMSO (dimethyl sulfoxide) is used when pKa cannot be obtained with water.)
The calculation method of H + dissociation free energy can be calculated by, for example, DFT (density functional theory), but various other methods have been reported in the literature and are not limited to this. There are a plurality of software that can perform DFT, and examples thereof include Gaussian16.
 本明細書中のpKaとは、上述した通り、ソフトウェアパッケージ1を用いて、ハメットの置換基定数及び公知文献値のデータベースに基づいた値を計算により求められる値を指すが、この手法によりpKaが算出できない場合には、DFT(密度汎関数法)に基づいてGaussian16により得られる値を採用するものとする。 As described above, pKa in the present specification refers to a value obtained by calculation based on a database of Hammett's substituent constants and publicly known literature values using software package 1, and pKa is calculated by this method. If it cannot be calculated, the value obtained by Gaussian 16 based on DFT (density functional theory) shall be adopted.
[感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物]
 本発明の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物(以下、「レジスト組成物」とも言う)について説明する。
 本発明のレジスト組成物は、ポジ型のレジスト組成物であっても、ネガ型のレジスト組成物であってもよい。また、アルカリ現像用のレジスト組成物であっても、有機溶剤現像用のレジスト組成物であってもよい。
 本発明の組成物は、典型的には、化学増幅型のレジスト組成物である。
[Actinic cheilitis or radiation-sensitive resin composition]
The actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition of the present invention (hereinafter, also referred to as “resist composition”) will be described.
The resist composition of the present invention may be a positive type resist composition or a negative type resist composition. Further, it may be a resist composition for alkaline development or a resist composition for organic solvent development.
The composition of the present invention is typically a chemically amplified resist composition.
 本発明のレジスト組成物は、酸分解性樹脂と、活性光線又は放射線の照射により酸を発生する化合物と、を含み、上記酸分解性樹脂が、後述する一般式(A1)で表される繰り返し単位である、繰り返し単位a1を有する。
 このような構成で本発明の課題が解決されるメカニズムは必ずしも明らかではないが、本発明者らは以下のように考えている。
 EUV光は波長13.5nmであり、ArF(波長193nm)光等に比べて、より短波長であるため、同じ感度で露光された際の入射フォトン数が少ない。そのため、確率的にフォトンの数がばらつく“フォトンショットノイズ”の影響が大きく、得られるパターンにおける欠陥の増加及びLWR性能の悪化を招く。
 そこで本発明では、レジスト組成物に含まれる酸分解性樹脂が、α位にフッ素原子を有するアクリル系繰り返し単位(α-フルオロアクリル系繰り返し単位)である繰り返し単位a1を含んでいる。このような繰り返し単位のα位におけるフッ素原子の存在が、EUV光の吸収効率を向上させつつも、樹脂の現像液に対する相溶性を適切な範囲に調整し、形成されるパターンにおける欠陥の発生及びLWR性能の悪化を抑制していると考えられる。
 また、上記α位におけるフッ素原子は、酸分解性樹脂の安定性に対する悪影響が小さく、レジスト組成物を長期間保存した場合でも、形成されるパターンのLWR性能の劣化が抑制されたと考えられる。
 以下、本明細書において、形成されるパターンにおける欠陥の発生が抑制されるレジスト組成物の特性を、レジスト組成物が欠陥抑制性に優れるとも言う。また、レジスト組成物を長期間保存した後に形成されるパターンのLWR性能が優れることを、レジスト組成物の経時後LWR性能が優れるとも言う。
 レジスト組成物の、欠陥抑制性及び経時後LWR性能の少なくとも一方が優れることを、本発明の効果が優れるとも言う。
The resist composition of the present invention contains an acid-degradable resin and a compound that generates an acid by irradiation with active light or radiation, and the acid-degradable resin is repeatedly represented by the general formula (A1) described later. It has a repeating unit a1 which is a unit.
The mechanism by which the problem of the present invention is solved by such a configuration is not always clear, but the present inventors consider it as follows.
EUV light has a wavelength of 13.5 nm, which is shorter than that of ArF (wavelength 193 nm) light and the like, so that the number of incident photons when exposed with the same sensitivity is small. Therefore, the influence of "photon shot noise" in which the number of photons varies stochastically is large, which causes an increase in defects in the obtained pattern and deterioration of LWR performance.
Therefore, in the present invention, the acid-decomposable resin contained in the resist composition contains a repeating unit a1 which is an acrylic repeating unit (α-fluoroacrylic repeating unit) having a fluorine atom at the α-position. The presence of fluorine atoms at the α-position of such repeating units adjusts the compatibility of the resin with the developer within an appropriate range while improving the absorption efficiency of EUV light, causing defects in the formed pattern and the occurrence of defects. It is considered that the deterioration of LWR performance is suppressed.
Further, it is considered that the fluorine atom at the α-position has a small adverse effect on the stability of the acid-degradable resin, and the deterioration of the LWR performance of the formed pattern is suppressed even when the resist composition is stored for a long period of time.
Hereinafter, in the present specification, the characteristics of the resist composition in which the occurrence of defects in the formed pattern is suppressed are also referred to as the resist composition having excellent defect suppressing properties. Further, it is also said that the excellent LWR performance of the pattern formed after the resist composition is stored for a long period of time is excellent in the LWR performance of the resist composition after aging.
It is also said that the effect of the present invention is excellent when at least one of the defect suppressing property and the LWR performance after aging is excellent in the resist composition.
〔レジスト組成物の成分〕
 以下、レジスト組成物が含み得る成分について詳述する。
[Components of resist composition]
Hereinafter, the components that the resist composition may contain will be described in detail.
<(A)酸分解性樹脂>
 レジスト組成物は、酸分解性樹脂(以下、「樹脂(A)」ともいう)を含む。
 樹脂(A)は、典型的には、酸の作用により極性が増大してアルカリ現像液に対する溶解度が増大し、有機溶剤に対する溶解度が減少する樹脂である。
 樹脂(A)は、酸の作用により分解して極性基を生じる基(言い換えると、酸の作用により脱離する脱離基で極性基が保護された構造)を有する。このような基(構造)を酸分解性基とも言う。酸分解性基を有する樹脂(つまり、酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位を有する樹脂)は、酸の作用により極性が増大してアルカリ現像液に対する溶解度が増大し、有機溶剤に対する溶解度が減少する。
 なお、後述するように、樹脂(A)は、光酸発生基を有する繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
 中でも、樹脂(A)は、酸解離定数(pKa)が13以下の酸基を有するのが好ましい。上記酸基の酸解離定数は、上記のように、13以下が好ましく、3~13がより好ましく、5~10が更に好ましい。
 上記所定のpKaの酸基を有する場合、レジスト組成物の保存安定性が優れ、現像がより良好に進行する。
 酸解離定数(pKa)が13以下の酸基としては、例えば、カルボン酸基、フェノール性水酸基、フッ素化アルコール基(好ましくはヘキサフルオロイソプロパノール基)、スルホン酸基、又は、スルホンアミド基等が挙げられる。
<(A) Acid-degradable resin>
The resist composition contains an acid-decomposable resin (hereinafter, also referred to as “resin (A)”).
The resin (A) is typically a resin in which the polarity is increased by the action of an acid, the solubility in an alkaline developer is increased, and the solubility in an organic solvent is decreased.
The resin (A) has a group that decomposes by the action of an acid to generate a polar group (in other words, a structure in which the polar group is protected by a leaving group that is eliminated by the action of an acid). Such a group (structure) is also called an acid-degradable group. A resin having an acid-degradable group (that is, a resin having a repeating unit having an acid-degradable group) has an increased polarity due to the action of an acid, an increase in solubility in an alkaline developer, and a decrease in solubility in an organic solvent.
As will be described later, the resin (A) may have a repeating unit having a photoacid generating group.
Above all, the resin (A) preferably has an acid group having an acid dissociation constant (pKa) of 13 or less. As described above, the acid dissociation constant of the acid group is preferably 13 or less, more preferably 3 to 13, and even more preferably 5 to 10.
When it has the above-mentioned acid group of predetermined pKa, the storage stability of the resist composition is excellent, and the development proceeds more satisfactorily.
Examples of the acid group having an acid dissociation constant (pKa) of 13 or less include a carboxylic acid group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, a fluorinated alcohol group (preferably a hexafluoroisopropanol group), a sulfonic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and the like. Be done.
(繰り返し単位a1)
 樹脂(A)は、繰り返し単位a1を有する。
 繰り返し単位a1は、一般式(A1)で表される繰り返し単位である。
(Repeating unit a1)
The resin (A) has a repeating unit a1.
The repeating unit a1 is a repeating unit represented by the general formula (A1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 一般式(A1)中、Rは水素原子又は有機基を表す。
 Rで表される有機基に制限はなく、例えば、-COO-R全体として酸分解性基を形成する基(この場合Rは脱離基である)であってもよいし、そうでなくてもよい。
 Rの一部分又は全体が酸分解性基である基であってもよいし、そうでなくてもよい。
 Rは、極性基であってもよいし、極性を有さない基であってもよい。
 Rは、ラクトン基、スルトン基、カーボネート基、水酸基(非芳香族性水酸基でも芳香族性水酸基でもよい)、スルホンアミド基、アミド基、カルボン酸基、及び、光酸発生基からなる群から選択される1以上の特定基を有する基であってもよいし、そうでなくてもよい。
 Rは、フッ素原子を有していてもよく、有していなくてもよい。
In the general formula (A1), RQ represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group.
Limiting the organic group represented by R Q is not, for example, group (in this case R Q is a leaving group) to form an acid-decomposable group as a whole -COO-R Q may be a, so It does not have to be.
It part or whole of R Q may be a group which is an acid-decomposable group, or not.
RQ may be a polar group or a non-polar group.
R Q is a lactone group, a sultone group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group (or aromatic hydroxyl groups in a non-aromatic hydroxyl groups), a sulfonamido group, an amide group, a carboxylic acid group, and, from the group consisting of photoacid generator groups It may or may not be a group having one or more specific groups to be selected.
R Q may have a fluorine atom, or may not have.
 樹脂(A)中、一般式(A1)で表される繰り返し単位の含有量は、樹脂(A)の全繰り返し単位に対して、5~100モル%が好ましく、10~100モル%がより好ましく、20~100モル%が更に好ましい。
 一般式(A1)で表される繰り返し単位は、2種以上を使用してもよい。
The content of the repeating unit represented by the general formula (A1) in the resin (A) is preferably 5 to 100 mol%, more preferably 10 to 100 mol%, based on all the repeating units of the resin (A). , 20-100 mol% is more preferred.
Two or more kinds of repeating units represented by the general formula (A1) may be used.
・繰り返し単位a2
 繰り返し単位a1が、酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位a2を含むのも好ましい。
 つまり、樹脂(A)は、繰り返し単位a2を有するのも好ましい。
 より詳細には、繰り返し単位a2は、一般式(A1)で表される繰り返し単位であって、酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位(酸の作用により脱離する脱離基で極性基が保護された構造を有する繰り返し単位)である。
 言い換えると、繰り返し単位a2は、繰り返し単位a1の一形態である。
・ Repeat unit a2
It is also preferable that the repeating unit a1 includes the repeating unit a2 having an acid-degradable group.
That is, it is also preferable that the resin (A) has the repeating unit a2.
More specifically, the repeating unit a2 is a repeating unit represented by the general formula (A1), and the repeating unit having an acid-degradable group (the polar group is protected by a leaving group that is eliminated by the action of an acid). It is a repeating unit having a structure.
In other words, the repeating unit a2 is a form of the repeating unit a1.
 酸の作用により脱離する脱離基で極性基が保護された構造(酸分解性基)を有する繰り返し単位における極性基は、アルカリ可溶性基が好ましく、例えば、カルボン酸基、フェノール性水酸基、フッ素化アルコール基、スルホン酸基、スルホンアミド基、スルホニルイミド基、(アルキルスルホニル)(アルキルカルボニル)メチレン基、(アルキルスルホニル)(アルキルカルボニル)イミド基、ビス(アルキルカルボニル)メチレン基、ビス(アルキルカルボニル)イミド基、ビス(アルキルスルホニル)メチレン基、ビス(アルキルスルホニル)イミド基、トリス(アルキルカルボニル)メチレン基、及び、トリス(アルキルスルホニル)メチレン基等の酸性基、並びに、アルコール性水酸基等が挙げられる。
 中でも、極性基は、カルボン酸基、フェノール性水酸基、フッ素化アルコール基(好ましくはヘキサフルオロイソプロパノール基)、又は、スルホン酸基が好ましい。
 極性基がカルボン酸基である場合、一般式(A1)におけるRが脱離基そのものであってもよい。つまりこの場合、脱離基(R)で極性基(カルボン酸基)が保護された構造(酸分解性基)が形成され、一般式(A1)における-COO-Rが全体として酸分解性基を構成している。
 また、一般式(A1)におけるRの一部に酸分解性基が含まれていてもよいし、Rが全体として酸分解性基を構成していてもよい。
The polar group in the repeating unit having a structure in which the polar group is protected by the desorbing group desorbed by the action of an acid (acid-degradable group) is preferably an alkali-soluble group, for example, a carboxylic acid group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, or fluorine. Alcohol chemical group, sulfonic acid group, sulfonamide group, sulfonylimide group, (alkylsulfonyl) (alkylcarbonyl) methylene group, (alkylsulfonyl) (alkylcarbonyl) imide group, bis (alkylcarbonyl) methylene group, bis (alkylcarbonyl) ) Methylene group, bis (alkylsulfonyl) methylene group, bis (alkylsulfonyl) imide group, tris (alkylcarbonyl) methylene group, acidic group such as tris (alkylsulfonyl) methylene group, alcoholic hydroxyl group and the like. Be done.
Among them, the polar group is preferably a carboxylic acid group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, a fluorinated alcohol group (preferably a hexafluoroisopropanol group), or a sulfonic acid group.
If the polar group is a carboxylic acid group, R Q may be a leaving group itself in the general formula (A1). That is, in this case, the leaving group (R Q) polar group (carboxylic acid group) is protected by the structure (acid-decomposable group) is formed, as a whole acidolysis -COO-R Q in the general formula (A1) is It constitutes a sex group.
Further, it may be contained partially in the acid-decomposable group of R Q in the general formula (A1), R Q may constitute the acid-decomposable group as a whole.
 酸の作用により脱離する脱離基としては、例えば、式(Y1)~(Y4)で表される基が挙げられる。
式(Y1):-C(Rx)(Rx)(Rx
式(Y2):-C(=O)OC(Rx)(Rx)(Rx
式(Y3):-C(R36)(R37)(OR38
式(Y4):-C(Rn)(H)(Ar)
Examples of the leaving group that are eliminated by the action of an acid include groups represented by the formulas (Y1) to (Y4).
Equation (Y1): -C (Rx 1 ) (Rx 2 ) (Rx 3 )
Equation (Y2): -C (= O) OC (Rx 1 ) (Rx 2 ) (Rx 3 )
Equation (Y3): -C (R 36 ) (R 37 ) (OR 38 )
Formula (Y4): -C (Rn) (H) (Ar)
 式(Y1)及び式(Y2)中、Rx~Rxは、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基(直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状)、シクロアルキル基(単環若しくは多環)、アルケニル基(直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状)、又は、アリール基(単環若しくは多環)を表す。なお、Rx~Rxの全てがアルキル基(直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状)である場合、Rx~Rxのうち少なくとも2つはメチル基であるのが好ましい。
 中でも、Rx~Rxは、それぞれ独立に、直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基を表すのが好ましい。
 Rx~Rxの2つが結合して、単環又は多環を形成してもよい。
 Rx~Rxのアルキル基は、メチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、イソプロピル基、n-ブチル基、イソブチル基、及び、t-ブチル基等の炭素数1~5のアルキル基が好ましい。上記アルキル基が有してもよい置換基は、水酸基又はハロゲン原子が好ましい。上記アルキル基は、無置換のアルキル基、又は、置換基として、水酸基及びハロゲン原子からなる群から選択されるのみを有するアルキル基が好ましい。
 Rx~Rxのシクロアルキル基は、シクロペンチル基、若しくは、シクロヘキシル基等の単環のシクロアルキル基、又は、ノルボルニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、若しくは、アダマンチル基等の多環のシクロアルキル基が好ましい。
 Rx~Rxのアリール基は、炭素数6~10のアリール基が好ましく、例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基、及びアントリル基等が挙げられる。
 Rx~Rxのアルケニル基は、ビニル基が好ましい。
 Rx~Rxの2つが結合して形成される環は、シクロアルキル基が好ましい。Rx~Rxの2つが結合して形成されるシクロアルキル基は、シクロペンチル基、若しくは、シクロヘキシル基等の単環のシクロアルキル基、又は、ノルボルニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、若しくは、アダマンチル基等の多環のシクロアルキル基が好ましい。
 Rx~Rxの2つが結合して形成されるシクロアルキル基は、例えば、環を構成するメチレン基の1つが、酸素原子等のヘテロ原子、カルボニル基等のヘテロ原子を有する基、又はビニリデン基で置き換わっていてもよい。また、これらのシクロアルキル基は、シクロアルカン環を構成するエチレン基の1つ以上が、ビニレン基で置き換わっていてもよい。
 Rx~Rxの2つが結合して形成される環が有してもよい置換基は、パーハロゲン化アルキル基(直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。好ましくはパーフルオロアルキル基、好ましくは炭素数1~3)、水酸基、又は、ハロゲン原子が好ましい。上記環は、無置換の環、又は、置換基として、パーハロゲン化アルキル基、水酸基、及び、ハロゲン原子からなる群から選択される置換基のみを有する環が好ましい。
 式(Y1)又は式(Y2)で表される基は、例えば、Rxがメチル基又はエチル基であり、RxとRxとが結合して上述のシクロアルキル基を形成している態様が好ましい。
In formulas (Y1) and (Y2), Rx 1 to Rx 3 are independently alkyl groups (linear or branched chain), cycloalkyl groups (monocyclic or polycyclic), and alkenyl groups (straight chain). (Orchid or branched chain) or aryl group (monocyclic or polycyclic). When all of Rx 1 to Rx 3 are alkyl groups (linear or branched chain), it is preferable that at least two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 are methyl groups.
Among them, it is preferable that Rx 1 to Rx 3 independently represent a linear or branched alkyl group.
Two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 may be combined to form a monocyclic or polycyclic ring.
The alkyl group of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an isopropyl group, an n-butyl group, an isobutyl group, and a t-butyl group. .. The substituent that the alkyl group may have is preferably a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom. The alkyl group is preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group or an alkyl group having only one selected from the group consisting of a hydroxyl group and a halogen atom as the substituent.
The cycloalkyl groups of Rx 1 to Rx 3 include a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclopentyl group or a cyclohexyl group, or a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, an adamantyl group, or the like. Polycyclic cycloalkyl groups are preferred.
The aryl group of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, and an anthryl group.
The alkenyl group of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is preferably a vinyl group.
The ring formed by bonding two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is preferably a cycloalkyl group. The cycloalkyl group formed by combining two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is a cyclopentyl group, a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclohexyl group, or a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, or a tetracyclododecanyl. A polycyclic cycloalkyl group such as a group or an adamantyl group is preferable.
The cycloalkyl group formed by combining two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is, for example, a group in which one of the methylene groups constituting the ring has a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom, a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group, or vinylidene. It may be replaced by a group. Further, in these cycloalkyl groups, one or more of the ethylene groups constituting the cycloalkane ring may be replaced with a vinylene group.
The substituent that the ring formed by combining two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 may have is a perhalogenated alkyl group (either linear or branched chain, preferably a perfluoroalkyl group, preferably). The number of carbon atoms 1 to 3), a hydroxyl group, or a halogen atom is preferable. The ring is preferably an unsubstituted ring or a ring having only a substituent selected from the group consisting of a perhalogenated alkyl group, a hydroxyl group, and a halogen atom as a substituent.
The group represented by the formula (Y1) or the formula (Y2) is, for example, an embodiment in which Rx 1 is a methyl group or an ethyl group, and Rx 2 and Rx 3 are bonded to form the above-mentioned cycloalkyl group. Is preferable.
 式(Y3)中、R36~R38は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の有機基を表す。R37とR38とは、互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。1価の有機基としては、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、及び、アルケニル基等が挙げられる。R36は水素原子であるのも好ましい。
 なお、上記アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、及び、アラルキル基には、酸素原子等のヘテロ原子及び/又はカルボニル基等のヘテロ原子を有する基が含まれていてもよい。例えば、上記アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、及び、アラルキル基は、例えば、メチレン基の1つ以上が、酸素原子等のヘテロ原子及び/又はカルボニル基等のヘテロ原子を有する基で置き換わっていてもよい。
In formula (Y3), R 36 to R 38 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group. R 37 and R 38 may be combined with each other to form a ring. Examples of the monovalent organic group include an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group and the like. It is also preferable that R 36 is a hydrogen atom.
The alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, and aralkyl group may contain a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom and / or a group having a heteroatom such as a carbonyl group. For example, in the above-mentioned alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, and aralkyl group, for example, one or more methylene groups are replaced with a group having a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom and / or a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group. You may.
 式(Y3)は、下記式(Y3-1)で表される基が好ましい。 The formula (Y3) is preferably a group represented by the following formula (Y3-1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
 ここで、L及びLは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、又は、これらを組み合わせた基(例えば、アルキル基とアリール基とを組み合わせた基)を表す。
 Mは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 Qは、ヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよいアルキル基、ヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよいシクロアルキル基、ヘテロ原子を含んでいてもよいアリール基、アミノ基、アンモニウム基、メルカプト基、シアノ基、アルデヒド基、又は、これらを組み合わせた基(例えば、アルキル基とシクロアルキル基とを組み合わせた基)を表す。
 アルキル基及びシクロアルキル基は、例えば、メチレン基の1つが、酸素原子等のヘテロ原子、又は、カルボニル基等のヘテロ原子を有する基で置き換わっていてもよい。
 アルキル基は、例えば、水素原子の1つ以上が、フッ素原子で置換されてフルオロアルキル基(例えば、炭素数1~5のフルオロアルキル基)となっているのも好ましい。
 なお、L及びLのうち一方は水素原子であり、他方はアルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、又は、アルキレン基とアリール基とを組み合わせた基であるのが好ましい。
 Q、M、及び、Lの少なくとも2つが結合して環(好ましくは、5員若しくは6員環)を形成してもよい。
 パターンの微細化の点では、Lは2級又は3級アルキル基が好ましく、3級アルキル基がより好ましい。2級アルキル基としては、例えば、イソプロピル基、シクロヘキシル基、及び、ノルボルニル基が挙げられ、3級アルキル基としては、例えば、tert-ブチル基及びアダマンチル基が挙げられる。これらの態様では、Tg(ガラス転移温度)及び活性化エネルギーが高くなるため、膜強度の担保に加え、かぶりの抑制ができる。
Here, L 1 and L 2 independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, or a group in which these are combined (for example, a group in which an alkyl group and an aryl group are combined). ..
M represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Q is an alkyl group that may contain a hetero atom, a cycloalkyl group that may contain a hetero atom, an aryl group that may contain a hetero atom, an amino group, an ammonium group, a mercapto group, a cyano group, and an aldehyde. Represents a group or a group in which these are combined (for example, a group in which an alkyl group and a cycloalkyl group are combined).
As for the alkyl group and the cycloalkyl group, for example, one of the methylene groups may be replaced with a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom or a group having a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group.
As the alkyl group, for example, it is preferable that one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms to form a fluoroalkyl group (for example, a fluoroalkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms).
It is preferable that one of L 1 and L 2 is a hydrogen atom and the other is an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, or a group in which an alkylene group and an aryl group are combined.
Q, M, and, at least two members to the ring (preferably, 5-membered or 6-membered ring) L 1 may be formed.
From the viewpoint of pattern miniaturization, L 2 is preferably a secondary or tertiary alkyl group, and more preferably a tertiary alkyl group. Examples of the secondary alkyl group include an isopropyl group, a cyclohexyl group and a norbornyl group, and examples of the tertiary alkyl group include a tert-butyl group and an adamantyl group. In these aspects, since Tg (glass transition temperature) and activation energy are high, fog can be suppressed in addition to ensuring the film strength.
 式(Y4)中、Arは、芳香環基を表す。Rnは、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、又は、アリール基を表す。RnとArとは互いに結合して非芳香族環を形成してもよい。Arはアリール基が好ましい。 In the formula (Y4), Ar represents an aromatic ring group. Rn represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, or an aryl group. Rn and Ar may be combined with each other to form a non-aromatic ring. Ar is preferably an aryl group.
 繰り返し単位の酸分解性が優れる点から、極性基を保護する脱離基において、極性基(又はその残基)に非芳香族環が直接結合している場合、上記非芳香族環中の、上記極性基(又はその残基)と直接結合している環員原子に隣接する環員原子は、置換基としてフッ素原子等のハロゲン原子を有さないのも好ましい。 In the desorbing group that protects the polar group, when the non-aromatic ring is directly bonded to the polar group (or its residue), in the non-aromatic ring, from the viewpoint of excellent acid decomposition property of the repeating unit, It is also preferable that the ring member atom adjacent to the ring member atom directly bonded to the polar group (or its residue) does not have a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom as a substituent.
 酸の作用により脱離する脱離基は、他にも、3-メチル-2-シクロペンテニル基のような置換基(アルキル基等)を有する2-シクロペンテニル基、及び、1,1,4,4-テトラメチルシクロヘキシル基のような置換基(アルキル基等)を有するシクロヘキシル基でもよい。 Other desorbing groups eliminated by the action of an acid include a 2-cyclopentenyl group having a substituent (alkyl group, etc.) such as a 3-methyl-2-cyclopentenyl group, and 1,1,4. , A cyclohexyl group having a substituent (alkyl group, etc.) such as 4-tetramethylcyclohexyl group may be used.
・・繰り返し単位a3
 繰り返し単位a2が、一般式(A2)で表される繰り返し単位a3を含むのも好ましい。
 つまり、樹脂(A)は、繰り返し単位a3を有するのも好ましい。
 言い換えると、繰り返し単位a3は、一般式(A2)で表される繰り返し単位であり、繰り返し単位a2の一形態である。
・ ・ Repeat unit a3
It is also preferable that the repeating unit a2 includes the repeating unit a3 represented by the general formula (A2).
That is, the resin (A) preferably has the repeating unit a3.
In other words, the repeating unit a3 is a repeating unit represented by the general formula (A2), and is a form of the repeating unit a2.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 一般式(A2)中、RQ1~RQ3は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基(直鎖状又は分岐鎖状)を表す。
 RQ1~RQ3のアルキル基は、それぞれ独立に、メチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、イソプロピル基、n-ブチル基、イソブチル基、及び、t-ブチル基等の炭素数1~5のアルキル基が好ましい。上記アルキル基が有してもよい置換基は、水酸基又はハロゲン原子が好ましい。上記アルキル基は、無置換のアルキル基、又は、置換基として、水酸基及びハロゲン原子からなる群から選択されるのみを有するアルキル基が好ましい。
In the general formula (A2), RQ1 to RQ3 each independently represent an alkyl group (linear or branched chain).
The alkyl groups of RQ1 to RQ3 independently have 1 to 5 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an isopropyl group, an n-butyl group, an isobutyl group, and a t-butyl group. Alkyl groups are preferred. The substituent that the alkyl group may have is preferably a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom. The alkyl group is preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group or an alkyl group having only one selected from the group consisting of a hydroxyl group and a halogen atom as the substituent.
 RQ1~RQ3のうちの2つは互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
 RQ1~RQ3のうちの2つが結合して形成される環は、シクロアルキル基が好ましい。
 RQ1~RQ3のうちの2つが結合して形成されるシクロアルキル基は、シクロペンチル基、若しくは、シクロヘキシル基等の単環のシクロアルキル基、又は、ノルボルニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、若しくは、アダマンチル基等の多環のシクロアルキル基が好ましい。
 RQ1~RQ3のうちの2つが結合して形成されるシクロアルキル基は、環を構成するメチレン基の1つが、酸素原子等のヘテロ原子、カルボニル基等のヘテロ原子を有する基、又はビニリデン基で置き換わっていてもよい。また、これらのシクロアルキル基は、シクロアルカン環を構成するエチレン基の1つ以上が、ビニレン基で置き換わっていてもよい。
 RQ1~RQ3のうちの2つが結合して形成される環が有してもよい置換基は、パーハロゲン化アルキル基(直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。好ましくはパーフルオロアルキル基、好ましくは炭素数1~3)、水酸基、又は、ハロゲン原子が好ましい。上記環は、無置換の環、又は、置換基として、パーハロゲン化アルキル基、水酸基、及び、ハロゲン原子からなる群から選択される置換基のみを有する環が好ましい。
Two of RQ1 to RQ3 may be combined with each other to form a ring.
A cycloalkyl group is preferable for the ring formed by bonding two of RQ1 to RQ3 .
Two of the cycloalkyl group formed by binding of R Q1 ~ R Q3 is cyclopentyl, or a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as cyclohexyl group, or a norbornyl group, tetra tricyclodecanyl group, tetracyclo A polycyclic cycloalkyl group such as a dodecanyl group or an adamantyl group is preferable.
In the cycloalkyl group formed by bonding two of RQ1 to RQ3 , one of the methylene groups constituting the ring is a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom, a group having a heteroatom such as a carbonyl group, or vinylidene. It may be replaced by a group. Further, in these cycloalkyl groups, one or more of the ethylene groups constituting the cycloalkane ring may be replaced with a vinylene group.
The substituent that the ring formed by combining two of RQ1 to RQ3 may have is an alkyl perhalogenated group (either linear or branched chain, preferably a perfluoroalkyl group, It preferably has 1 to 3 carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, or a halogen atom. The ring is preferably an unsubstituted ring or a ring having only a substituent selected from the group consisting of a perhalogenated alkyl group, a hydroxyl group, and a halogen atom as a substituent.
 樹脂(A)が繰り返し単位a2(好ましくは繰り返し単位a3)を有する場合、その含有量は、樹脂(A)の全繰り返し単位に対して、5~90モル%が好ましく、10~85モル%がより好ましく、20~70モル%が更に好ましい。
 繰り返し単位a2(好ましくは繰り返し単位a3)は、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
When the resin (A) has the repeating unit a2 (preferably the repeating unit a3), the content thereof is preferably 5 to 90 mol% and 10 to 85 mol% with respect to all the repeating units of the resin (A). More preferably, 20 to 70 mol% is further preferable.
As the repeating unit a2 (preferably the repeating unit a3), one type may be used alone, or two or more types may be used.
・繰り返し単位a4(繰り返し単位a5、繰り返し単位a6)
 繰り返し単位a1が、繰り返し単位a4を含むのも好ましい。
 つまり、樹脂(A)は、繰り返し単位a4を有するのも好ましい。
 繰り返し単位a4は、一般式(A1)で表される繰り返し単位(繰り返し単位a1)における、Rが、水素原子、又は、基Xを表す、繰り返し単位である。
 基Xは、ラクトン基、スルトン基、カーボネート基、水酸基(非芳香族性水酸基でも芳香族性水酸基でもよい)、スルホンアミド基、アミド基、カルボン酸基、及び、光酸発生基からなる群から選択される1以上の特定基を有する基であって脱離基ではない基である。
 繰り返し単位a4は、繰り返し単位a1の一形態である。
-Repeating unit a4 (repeating unit a5, repeating unit a6)
It is also preferable that the repeating unit a1 includes the repeating unit a4.
That is, the resin (A) preferably has the repeating unit a4.
Repeating units a4 is in the repeating unit represented by the general formula (A1) (repeating unit a1), R Q is a hydrogen atom, or a group X, a repeating unit.
Group X consists of a group consisting of a lactone group, a sulton group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group (which may be a non-aromatic hydroxyl group or an aromatic hydroxyl group), a sulfonamide group, an amide group, a carboxylic acid group, and a photoacid generating group. A group having one or more specific groups to be selected, not a leaving group.
The repeating unit a4 is a form of the repeating unit a1.
 繰り返し単位a4において、Rの選択肢である基Xは、特定基を有する基であって、かつ、脱離基ではない基である。
 「脱離基ではない基」とは、繰り返し単位a2に関して説明した「酸の作用により脱離する脱離基」ではない基を意味する。具体的には、「脱離基ではない基」は、上述の式(Y1)~(Y4)で表される基には該当しない。
 繰り返し単位a4は、繰り返し単位a2及び/又は繰り返し単位a3とは異なるのが好ましい。
In the repeating unit a4, group X is a choice of R Q is a group having a specific group, and a group not leaving group.
The "group that is not a leaving group" means a group that is not the "leaving group that is eliminated by the action of an acid" described with respect to the repeating unit a2. Specifically, the "group that is not a leaving group" does not correspond to the group represented by the above formulas (Y1) to (Y4).
The repeating unit a4 is preferably different from the repeating unit a2 and / or the repeating unit a3.
 Rが、基Xである場合、Rが特定基そのものであってもよく、Rの一部分に特定基が含まれていてもよい。 R Q is is a group X, may be R Q is a specific group itself may contain certain groups in a part of R Q.
 樹脂(A)が繰り返し単位a4を有する場合、その含有量は、樹脂(A)の全繰り返し単位に対して、1~70モル%が好ましく、2~60モル%がより好ましく、3~50モル%が更に好ましい。
 繰り返し単位a4は1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
When the resin (A) has the repeating unit a4, the content thereof is preferably 1 to 70 mol%, more preferably 2 to 60 mol%, and 3 to 50 mol% with respect to all the repeating units of the resin (A). % Is more preferable.
The repeating unit a4 may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 繰り返し単位a4が、フッ素原子を更に有する基Xを有する繰り返し単位a5を含むのも好ましい。
 つまり、樹脂(A)は、繰り返し単位a5を有するのも好ましい。
 より詳細には、繰り返し単位a5は、一般式(A1)で表される繰り返し単位において、Rが、上述の基Xであり、かつ、上記基Xがフッ素原子を有する基である態様の繰り返し単位である。
 つまり、繰り返し単位a5は、繰り返し単位a4の一形態である。
It is also preferable that the repeating unit a4 includes a repeating unit a5 having a group X further having a fluorine atom.
That is, the resin (A) preferably has the repeating unit a5.
More specifically, the repeating unit a5 is a repeating unit represented by the general formula (A1), wherein the RQ is the above-mentioned group X and the above-mentioned group X is a group having a fluorine atom. It is a unit.
That is, the repeating unit a5 is a form of the repeating unit a4.
 中でも、繰り返し単位a5が、ヘキサフルオロプロパノール基(「-C(CFOH」で表される基)を有する基Xを有する繰り返し単位a6を含むのも好ましい。
 つまり、樹脂(A)は、繰り返し単位a6を有するのも好ましい。
 より詳細には、繰り返し単位6は、一般式(A1)で表される繰り返し単位において、Rが、上述の基Xであり、かつ、上記基Xがヘキサフルオロイソプロパノール基を有する基である態様の繰り返し単位である。
 つまり、繰り返し単位a6は、繰り返し単位a4及び繰り返し単位a5の一形態でもある。
Among them, it is also preferable that the repeating unit a5 includes a repeating unit a6 having a group X having a hexafluoropropanol group (a group represented by "-C (CF 3 ) 2 OH").
That is, the resin (A) preferably has the repeating unit a6.
More specifically, the repeating unit 6, in the repeating unit represented by formula (A1), R Q is a foregoing group X, and is a group where the group X has a hexafluoroisopropanol group aspects It is a repeating unit of.
That is, the repeating unit a6 is also a form of the repeating unit a4 and the repeating unit a5.
・・繰り返し単位a4-0
 一般式(A1)で表される繰り返し単位のRが水素原子である場合、このような繰り返し単位を、繰り返し単位a4-0とも言う。
 樹脂(A)が繰り返し単位a4-0を有する場合、その含有量は、樹脂(A)の全繰り返し単位に対して、1~30モル%が好ましく、2~20モル%がより好ましく、3~15モル%が更に好ましい。
・ ・ Repeat unit a4-0
If R Q of the repeating unit represented by formula (A1) is a hydrogen atom, such repeating units, also referred to as repeating units A4-0.
When the resin (A) has the repeating unit a4-0, the content thereof is preferably 1 to 30 mol%, more preferably 2 to 20 mol%, and 3 to 3 to all the repeating units of the resin (A). 15 mol% is more preferred.
・・繰り返し単位a4-1
 繰り返し単位a4において、Rが、特定基として、ラクトン基、スルトン基、及び、カーボネート基からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を有する基Xである場合、このような繰り返し単位a4を、繰り返し単位a4-1とも言う。
・ ・ Repeat unit a4-1
In the repeating unit a4, R Q is, as a specific group, lactone group, sultone group, and, if a group X with at least one selected from the group consisting of carbonate group, such repeating units a4, repeated Also called the unit a4-1.
 上記ラクトン基、上記スルトン基、及び、上記カーボネート基は、置換基としてフッ素原子を有するのも好ましい。つまり、繰り返し単位a4-1が、繰り返し単位a5であるのも好ましい。 It is also preferable that the lactone group, the sultone group, and the carbonate group have a fluorine atom as a substituent. That is, it is also preferable that the repeating unit a4-1 is the repeating unit a5.
 繰り返し単位a4-1のラクトン基又はスルトン基は、ラクトン構造又はスルトン構造を有していればよい。ラクトン構造又はスルトン構造は、5~7員環ラクトン構造又は5~7員環スルトン構造が好ましい。中でも、ラクトン構造は、ビシクロ構造若しくはスピロ構造を形成する形で5~7員環ラクトン構造に他の環構造が縮環している構造が好ましい。スルトン構造は、ビシクロ構造若しくはスピロ構造を形成する形で5~7員環スルトン構造に他の環構造が縮環しているもの、がより好ましい。
 ラクトン基は、下記一般式(LC1-1)~(LC1-22)のいずれかで表されるラクトン構造の環員原子から、水素原子を1つ以上引き抜いてなるラクトン基が好ましい。スルトン基は、下記一般式(SL1-1)~(SL1-3)のいずれかで表されるスルトン構造の環員原子から、水素原子を1つ以上引き抜いてなるスルトン基が好ましい。
The lactone group or sultone group of the repeating unit a4-1 may have a lactone structure or a sultone structure. The lactone structure or sultone structure is preferably a 5- to 7-membered ring lactone structure or a 5- to 7-membered ring sultone structure. Among them, the lactone structure is preferably a structure in which another ring structure is condensed into a 5- to 7-membered ring lactone structure so as to form a bicyclo structure or a spiro structure. The sultone structure is more preferably a 5- to 7-membered ring sultone structure in which another ring structure is fused to form a bicyclo structure or a spiro structure.
The lactone group is preferably a lactone group obtained by extracting one or more hydrogen atoms from a ring member atom having a lactone structure represented by any of the following general formulas (LC1-1) to (LC1-22). The sultone group is preferably a sultone group obtained by extracting one or more hydrogen atoms from a ring member atom having a sultone structure represented by any of the following general formulas (SL1-1) to (SL1-3).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
 上記ラクトン構造又はスルトン構造部分は、置換基(Rb)を有していてもよい。好ましい置換基(Rb)としては、例えば、炭素数1~8のアルキル基、炭素数4~7のシクロアルキル基、炭素数1~8のアルコキシ基、炭素数1~8のアルコキシカルボニル基、カルボン酸基、ハロゲン原子(好ましくはフッ素原子)、水酸基、及び、シアノ基等が挙げられる。n2は、0~4の整数を表す。n2が2以上の時、複数存在するRbは、異なっていてもよく、また、複数存在するRb同士が結合して環を形成してもよい。 The lactone structure or sultone structure portion may have a substituent (Rb 2 ). Preferred substituents (Rb 2 ) include, for example, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 4 to 7 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms. Examples thereof include a carboxylic acid group, a halogen atom (preferably a fluorine atom), a hydroxyl group, and a cyano group. n2 represents an integer of 0 to 4. When n2 is 2 or more, Rb 2 existing in plural numbers may be different or may be bonded to form a ring Rb 2 between the plurality of.
 一般式(LC1-1)~(LC1-22)のいずれかで表されるラクトン構造の環員原子から、水素原子を1つ以上引き抜いてなるラクトン基を有する繰り返し単位a4-1、及び、一般式(SL1-1)~(SL1-3)のいずれかで表されるスルトン構造の環員原子から、水素原子を1つ以上引き抜いてなるスルトン基を有する繰り返し単位a4-1は、一般式(A3)で表される繰り返し単位が好ましい。 A repeating unit a4-1 having a lactone group obtained by extracting one or more hydrogen atoms from a ring member atom having a lactone structure represented by any of the general formulas (LC1-1) to (LC1-22), and general The repeating unit a4-1 having a sultone group obtained by extracting one or more hydrogen atoms from a ring member atom having a sultone structure represented by any of the formulas (SL1-1) to (SL1-3) is a general formula (SL1-1). The repeating unit represented by A3) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
 一般式(A3)中、Abは、単結合、アルキレン基、単環又は多環の脂環炭化水素構造を有する2価の連結基、エーテル基、エステル基、カルボニル基、カルボン酸基、又は、これらを組み合わせた2価の基を表す。
 中でも、単結合、又は-Ab-COO-で表される連結基が好ましい。
 Abは、単結合又は2価の連結基であり、直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状のアルキレン基、又は単環若しくは多環のシクロアルキレン基であり、メチレン基、エチレン基、シクロヘキシレン基、アダマンチレン基、又は、ノルボルニレン基が好ましい。
 Vは、一般式(LC1-1)~(LC1-22)のいずれかで表されるラクトン構造の環員原子から水素原子を1つ引き抜いてなる基、又は一般式(SL1-1)~(SL1-3)のいずれかで表されるスルトン構造の環員原子から水素原子を1つ引き抜いてなる基を表す。
In the general formula (A3), Ab is a divalent linking group having a single bond, an alkylene group, a monocyclic or polycyclic alicyclic hydrocarbon structure, an ether group, an ester group, a carbonyl group, a carboxylic acid group, or It represents a divalent group that combines these.
Among them, a single bond, or a -Ab 1 -COO- linking group represented by are preferred.
Ab 1 is a monobonded or divalent linking group, a linear or branched alkylene group, or a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkylene group, which is a methylene group, an ethylene group, a cyclohexylene group, or an adaman. A tylene group or a norbornylene group is preferable.
V is a group formed by extracting one hydrogen atom from a ring member atom having a lactone structure represented by any of the general formulas (LC1-1) to (LC1-22), or general formulas (SL1-1) to (SL1-1). It represents a group formed by extracting one hydrogen atom from a ring member atom having a sultone structure represented by any of SL1-3).
 ラクトン基又はスルトン基を有する繰り返し単位a4-1に、光学異性体が存在する場合、いずれの光学異性体を用いてもよい。また、1種の光学異性体を単独で用いても、複数の光学異性体を混合して用いてもよい。1種の光学異性体を主に用いる場合、その光学純度(ee)は90以上が好ましく、95以上がより好ましい。 If an optical isomer is present in the repeating unit a4-1 having a lactone group or a sultone group, any optical isomer may be used. Further, one kind of optical isomer may be used alone, or a plurality of optical isomers may be mixed and used. When one kind of optical isomer is mainly used, its optical purity (ee) is preferably 90 or more, more preferably 95 or more.
 カーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位a4-1におけるカーボネート基は、環状炭酸エステル基に含まれているのが好ましい。
 カーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位a4-1は、一般式(A4)で表される繰り返し単位が好ましい。
The carbonate group in the repeating unit a4-1 having a carbonate group is preferably contained in the cyclic carbonate group.
The repeating unit a4-1 having a carbonate group is preferably a repeating unit represented by the general formula (A4).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 一般式(A4)中、nは、0以上(好ましくは0~3)の整数を表す。
 R は、置換基を表す。nが2以上の場合、複数存在するR は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 Aは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。上記2価の連結基は、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~4)、単環又は多環の脂環炭化水素構造を有する2価の連結基、エーテル基、エステル基、カルボニル基、カルボン酸基、又はこれらを組み合わせた2価の基が好ましい。
 Zは、式中の-O-CO-O-で表される基と共に単環又は多環を形成する原子団を表す。
 Zが式中の-O-CO-O-で表される基と共に形成する単環又は多環は、5員環の環状炭酸エステル基が好ましく、下記一般式(CC1-1)で表される環状炭酸エステル構造がより好ましい。
 つまり、一般式(A4)中のAは、下記一般式(CC1-1)で表される環状炭酸エステル構造の環員原子から水素原子を1つ引き抜いてなる基と結合しているのが好ましい。
In the general formula (A4), n represents an integer of 0 or more (preferably 0 to 3).
R A 2 represents a substituent. when n is 2 or more, R A 2 existing in plural, may each be the same or different.
A represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. The divalent linking group is an alkylene group (preferably having 1 to 4 carbon atoms), a divalent linking group having a monocyclic or polycyclic alicyclic hydrocarbon structure, an ether group, an ester group, a carbonyl group, and a carboxylic acid. A group or a divalent group in which these are combined is preferable.
Z represents an atomic group forming a monocyclic or polycyclic ring with a group represented by —O—CO—O— in the formula.
The monocyclic or polycyclic ring formed by Z together with the group represented by —O—CO—O— in the formula is preferably a 5-membered cyclic carbonate group, and is represented by the following general formula (CC1-1). A cyclic carbonate structure is more preferred.
That is, it is preferable that A in the general formula (A4) is bonded to a group formed by extracting one hydrogen atom from the ring member atom of the cyclic carbonate structure represented by the following general formula (CC1-1). ..
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 一般式(CC1-1)における環状炭酸エステル構造部分は、置換基(Rb)を有していてもよい。好ましい置換基(Rb)としては、例えば、炭素数1~8のアルキル基、炭素数4~7のシクロアルキル基、炭素数1~8のアルコキシ基、炭素数1~8のアルコキシカルボニル基、カルボン酸基、ハロゲン原子(好ましくはフッ素原子)、水酸基、及び、シアノ基等が挙げられる。n3は、0又は1の整数を表す。 The cyclic carbonate structure portion in the general formula (CC1-1) may have a substituent (Rb 2 ). Preferred substituents (Rb 2 ) include, for example, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 4 to 7 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and an alkoxycarbonyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms. Examples thereof include a carboxylic acid group, a halogen atom (preferably a fluorine atom), a hydroxyl group, and a cyano group. n3 represents an integer of 0 or 1.
 樹脂(A)が繰り返し単位a4-1を有する場合、その含有量は、樹脂(A)の全繰り返し単位に対して、3~60モル%が好ましく、5~50モル%がより好ましく、7~45モル%が更に好ましい。
 繰り返し単位a4-1は1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
When the resin (A) has the repeating unit a4-1, the content thereof is preferably 3 to 60 mol%, more preferably 5 to 50 mol%, and 7 to 7 to all the repeating units of the resin (A). 45 mol% is more preferred.
The repeating unit a4-1 may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
・・繰り返し単位a4-2
 繰り返し単位a4において、Rが、特定基として非芳香族性水酸基を有する基Xであり、上記非芳香族性水酸基が、フッ素化アルコール基に含まれる水酸基以外の水酸基である場合、このような繰り返し単位a4を、繰り返し単位a4-2とも言う。
 非芳香族性水酸基とは、芳香族性水酸基以外の水酸基であり、例えば、芳香族環に直接結合する水酸基以外の水酸基を意図する。非芳香族性水酸基は、例えば、アルコール性水酸基が挙げられる。
 フッ素化アルコール基に含まれる水酸基以外の水酸基とは、例えば、水酸基が炭素原子に結合しており、上記水酸基が結合する炭素原子(α炭素)に、フッ素原子及び-CFR(2つのRはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換基を表す。-CFRとしては-CF等が挙げられる)のいずれも結合していない場合における上記水酸基である。
 繰り返し単位a4-2は、繰り返し単位a4-1とは異なるのが好ましい。
 繰り返し単位a4-2は、フッ素化アルコール基を有さないのが好ましい。
・ ・ Repeat unit a4-2
In the repeating unit a4, R Q is a group X having a non-aromatic hydroxyl group as a specific group, if the non-aromatic hydroxyl groups, a hydroxyl group other than hydroxyl groups contained in a fluorinated alcohol group, like this The repeating unit a4 is also referred to as a repeating unit a4-2.
The non-aromatic hydroxyl group is a hydroxyl group other than the aromatic hydroxyl group, and is intended, for example, a hydroxyl group other than the hydroxyl group directly bonded to the aromatic ring. Examples of the non-aromatic hydroxyl group include an alcoholic hydroxyl group.
The hydroxyl groups other than the hydroxyl group contained in the fluorinated alcohol group include, for example, a hydroxyl group bonded to a carbon atom, and the carbon atom (α carbon) to which the hydroxyl group is bonded, a fluorine atom and −CFR 2 (two Rs are Each of them independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. -CFR 2 includes -CF 3 and the like), and is the above-mentioned hydroxyl group when none of them is bonded.
The repeating unit a4-2 is preferably different from the repeating unit a4-1.
The repeating unit a4-2 preferably has no fluorinated alcohol group.
 繰り返し単位a4-2は、一般式(A5)で表される繰り返し単位であるのが好ましい。 The repeating unit a4-2 is preferably a repeating unit represented by the general formula (A5).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
 一般式(A5)中、RQ5は、アルキル基(直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状。好ましくは炭素数1~5)、又は、非芳香族性環基を表す。 In the general formula (A5), RQ5 represents an alkyl group (linear or branched chain, preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms) or a non-aromatic ring group.
 上記非芳香族性環基としては、例えば、単環式炭化水素環基及び多環式炭化水素環基が挙げられる。
 単環式炭化水素環基としては、例えば、炭素数3~12(好ましくは炭素数3~7)のシクロアルカン環基、及び、炭素数3~12のシクロアルケン環基が挙げられる。
 多環式炭化水素環基としては、例えば、環集合炭化水素環基及び架橋環式炭化水素環基が挙げられる。
 架橋環式炭化水素環としては、例えば、2環式炭化水素環、3環式炭化水素環、及び、4環式炭化水素環等が挙げられる。また、架橋環式炭化水素環は、5~8員シクロアルカン環が複数個縮合した縮合環でもよい。
 架橋環式炭化水素環基は、ノルボルナン環基、アダマンタン環基、ビシクロオクタン環基、又は、トリシクロ[5、2、1、02,6]デカン環基が好ましい。
Examples of the non-aromatic ring group include a monocyclic hydrocarbon ring group and a polycyclic hydrocarbon ring group.
Examples of the monocyclic hydrocarbon ring group include a cycloalkane ring group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms (preferably 3 to 7 carbon atoms) and a cycloalkene ring group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms.
Examples of the polycyclic hydrocarbon ring group include a ring-assembled hydrocarbon ring group and a crosslinked ring-type hydrocarbon ring group.
Examples of the crosslinked ring-type hydrocarbon ring include a bicyclic hydrocarbon ring, a three-ring hydrocarbon ring, and a four-ring hydrocarbon ring. Further, the crosslinked cyclic hydrocarbon ring may be a condensed ring in which a plurality of 5- to 8-membered cycloalkane rings are condensed.
The crosslinked cyclic hydrocarbon ring group is preferably a norbornane ring group, an adamantane ring group, a bicyclooctane ring group, or a tricyclo [5, 2, 1, 0 2, 6 ] decane ring group.
 上記アルキル基及び上記非芳香族性環基は、-(OH)q5以外の置換基を有さないのも好ましい。 It is also preferable that the alkyl group and the non-aromatic ring group do not have a substituent other than − (OH) q5 .
 一般式(A5)中、q5は、1~5の整数を表す。 In the general formula (A5), q5 represents an integer from 1 to 5.
 樹脂(A)が繰り返し単位a4-2を有する場合、その含有量は、樹脂(A)の全繰り返し単位に対して、3~60モル%が好ましく、5~50モル%がより好ましく、10~45モル%が更に好ましい。
 繰り返し単位a4-2は1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
When the resin (A) has the repeating unit a4-2, the content thereof is preferably 3 to 60 mol%, more preferably 5 to 50 mol%, and 10 to 10 to all the repeating units of the resin (A). 45 mol% is more preferred.
The repeating unit a4-2 may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
・・繰り返し単位a4-3
 繰り返し単位a4において、Rが、特定基として非芳香族性水酸基を有する基Xであり、上記非芳香族性水酸基が、フッ素化アルコール基に含まれる水酸基である場合、このような繰り返し単位a4を、繰り返し単位a4-3とも言う。
 フッ素化アルコール基に含まれる水酸基とは、例えば、水酸基が炭素原子に結合しており、上記水酸基が結合する炭素原子(α炭素)に、フッ素原子及び-CFR(2つのRはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は置換基を表す。-CFRとしては-CF等が挙げられる)の少なくとも一方が結合している場合の上記水酸基である。
 つまり、繰り返し単位a4-3は、繰り返し単位a5に該当する。
 繰り返し単位a4-3は、繰り返し単位a4-1及び/又は繰り返し単位a4-2とは異なるのが好ましい。
・ ・ Repeat unit a4-3
In the repeating unit a4, R Q is a group X having a non-aromatic hydroxyl group as a specific group, the non-aromatic hydroxyl groups, when a hydroxyl group contained in a fluorinated alcohol group, such repeating units a4 Is also referred to as a repeating unit a4-3.
The hydroxyl groups contained in the fluorinated alcohol group include, for example, a hydroxyl group bonded to a carbon atom, and the carbon atom (α carbon) to which the hydroxyl group is bonded, a fluorine atom and -CFR 2 (two Rs are independent of each other). It represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. -CFR 2 includes -CF 3 and the like), and is the above-mentioned hydroxyl group when at least one is bonded.
That is, the repeating unit a4-3 corresponds to the repeating unit a5.
The repeating unit a4-3 is preferably different from the repeating unit a4-1 and / or the repeating unit a4-2.
 フッ素化アルコール基に含まれる水酸基は、ヘキサフルオロイソプロパノール基(「-C(CFOH」で表される基)に含まれる水酸基であるのが好ましい。
 つまり、繰り返し単位a4-3は、繰り返し単位a6に該当するのが好ましい。
The hydroxyl group contained in the fluorinated alcohol group is preferably a hydroxyl group contained in a hexafluoroisopropanol group (a group represented by "-C (CF 3 ) 2 OH").
That is, the repeating unit a4-3 preferably corresponds to the repeating unit a6.
 繰り返し単位a4-3は、一般式(A6)で表される繰り返し単位であるのが好ましい。 The repeating unit a4-3 is preferably a repeating unit represented by the general formula (A6).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 一般式(A6)中、RQ6は、アルキル基(直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状。好ましくは炭素数1~5)、非芳香族性環基、又は、芳香環基を表す。 In the general formula (A6), RQ6 represents an alkyl group (linear or branched chain, preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms), a non-aromatic ring group, or an aromatic ring group.
 上記非芳香族性環基としては、例えば、単環式炭化水素環基及び多環式炭化水素環基が挙げられる。
 単環式炭化水素環基としては、例えば、炭素数3~12(好ましくは炭素数3~7)のシクロアルカン環基、及び、炭素数3~12のシクロアルケン環基が挙げられる。
 多環式炭化水素環基としては、例えば、環集合炭化水素環基及び架橋環式炭化水素環基が挙げられる。
 架橋環式炭化水素環としては、例えば、2環式炭化水素環、3環式炭化水素環、及び、4環式炭化水素環等が挙げられる。また、架橋環式炭化水素環は、5~8員シクロアルカン環が複数個縮合した縮合環でもよい。
 架橋環式炭化水素環基は、ノルボルナン環基、アダマンタン環基、ビシクロオクタン環基、又は、トリシクロ[5、2、1、02,6]デカン環基が好ましい。
Examples of the non-aromatic ring group include a monocyclic hydrocarbon ring group and a polycyclic hydrocarbon ring group.
Examples of the monocyclic hydrocarbon ring group include a cycloalkane ring group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms (preferably 3 to 7 carbon atoms) and a cycloalkene ring group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms.
Examples of the polycyclic hydrocarbon ring group include a ring-assembled hydrocarbon ring group and a crosslinked ring-type hydrocarbon ring group.
Examples of the crosslinked ring-type hydrocarbon ring include a bicyclic hydrocarbon ring, a three-ring hydrocarbon ring, and a four-ring hydrocarbon ring. Further, the crosslinked cyclic hydrocarbon ring may be a condensed ring in which a plurality of 5- to 8-membered cycloalkane rings are condensed.
The crosslinked cyclic hydrocarbon ring group is preferably a norbornane ring group, an adamantane ring group, a bicyclooctane ring group, or a tricyclo [5, 2, 1, 0 2, 6 ] decane ring group.
 上記芳香環基は、炭素数6~18の芳香環基が好ましく、ベンゼン環基、ナフタレン環基、アントラセン環基、又は、ビフェニレン環基がより好ましい。 The aromatic ring group preferably has an aromatic ring group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably a benzene ring group, a naphthalene ring group, an anthracene ring group, or a biphenylene ring group.
 上記アルキル基、上記非芳香族性環基、及び、上記芳香環基は、-(-C(CFOH)q6以外の置換基を有さないのも好ましい。 It is also preferable that the alkyl group, the non-aromatic ring group, and the aromatic ring group do not have a substituent other than − (−C (CF 3 ) 2 OH) q6 .
 一般式(A6)中、q6は、1~5の整数を表す。 In the general formula (A6), q6 represents an integer from 1 to 5.
 樹脂(A)が繰り返し単位a4-3を有する場合、その含有量は、樹脂(A)の全繰り返し単位に対して、3~50モル%が好ましく、5~40モル%がより好ましく、10~35モル%が更に好ましい。
 繰り返し単位a4-3は1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
When the resin (A) has the repeating unit a4-3, the content thereof is preferably 3 to 50 mol%, more preferably 5 to 40 mol%, and 10 to 10 to all the repeating units of the resin (A). 35 mol% is more preferred.
The repeating unit a4-3 may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
・・繰り返し単位a4-4
 繰り返し単位a4において、Rが、特定基として光酸発生基を有する基Xである場合、このような繰り返し単位a4を、繰り返し単位a4-4とも言う。
 繰り返し単位a4-4において、Rがフッ素原子を有しているのも好ましい。つまり繰り返し単位a4-4は、繰り返し単位a5に該当するのが好ましい。
 繰り返し単位a4-4は、繰り返し単位a4-1、繰り返し単位a4-2、及び/又は、繰り返し単位a4-3とは異なるのが好ましい。
・ ・ Repeat unit a4-4
In the repeating unit a4, R Q is is a group X having a photoacid generating group as a specific group, such a repeating unit a4, also referred to as repeating units A4-4.
In the repeating unit A4-4, also preferred R Q has a fluorine atom. That is, the repeating unit a4-4 preferably corresponds to the repeating unit a5.
The repeating unit a4-4 is preferably different from the repeating unit a4-1, the repeating unit a4-2, and / or the repeating unit a4-3.
 繰り返し単位a4-4は、一般式(A7)で表される繰り返し単位であるのが好ましい。 The repeating unit a4-4 is preferably a repeating unit represented by the general formula (A7).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
 一般式(A7)中、2つのXfは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、フッ素原子、又は、少なくとも1つのフッ素原子で置換されたアルキル基(好ましくはCF)を表す。
 2つのXfのうち、少なくとも一方は水素原子以外が好ましい。
 上記アルキル基は、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。上記アルキル基の炭素数は1~10が好ましい。上記アルキル基は、置換基としてフッ素原子のみを有するのが好ましい。
In the general formula (A7), the two Xfs independently represent an alkyl group (preferably CF 3 ) substituted with a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or at least one fluorine atom.
Of the two Xfs, at least one is preferably a non-hydrogen atom.
The alkyl group may be linear or branched. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkyl group preferably has only a fluorine atom as a substituent.
 一般式(A7)中、R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、フッ素原子、又は、アルキル基を表し、複数存在する場合のR及びRは、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 上記アルキル基は、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。上記アルキル基の炭素数は1~10が好ましい。上記アルキル基の置換基はフッ素原子が好ましい。上記アルキル基が置換基を有する場合、置換基としてフッ素原子のみを有するのが好ましい。
In the general formula (A7), R 1 and R 2 independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or an alkyl group, and when a plurality of them are present, R 1 and R 2 may be the same or different. Good.
The alkyl group may be linear or branched. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The substituent of the alkyl group is preferably a fluorine atom. When the alkyl group has a substituent, it is preferable that the alkyl group has only a fluorine atom as the substituent.
 一般式(A7)中、Lは、2価の連結基を表し、複数存在する場合のLは同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 Lの2価の連結基は、-COO-、-CO-、-O-、-S-、-SO-、-SO-、アルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、アルケニレン基、及び、これらの複数が連結した連結基等が挙げられ、総炭素数12以下の連結基が好ましい。
In the general formula (A7), L represents a divalent linking group, and when a plurality of L are present, L may be the same or different.
The divalent linking group of L is -COO-, -CO-, -O-, -S-, -SO-, -SO 2- , alkylene group, cycloalkylene group, alkenylene group, and a plurality of these. Examples thereof include linked linking groups, and linking groups having a total carbon number of 12 or less are preferable.
 一般式(A7)中、xは1~20の整数を表し、yは0~10の整数を表し、zは0~10の整数を表す。 In the general formula (A7), x represents an integer of 1 to 20, y represents an integer of 0 to 10, and z represents an integer of 0 to 10.
 一般式(A7)中、Mはカチオンを表す。Mの詳細は、例えば、後述する一般式(PA-1)におけるMと同様のカチオンを使用できる。 In the general formula (A7), M + represents a cation. For details of M + , for example, the same cation as M + in the general formula (PA-1) described later can be used.
 樹脂(A)が繰り返し単位a4-4を有する場合、その含有量は、樹脂(A)の全繰り返し単位に対して、3~40モル%が好ましく、5~25モル%がより好ましく、7~20モル%が更に好ましい。
 繰り返し単位a4-4は1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
When the resin (A) has the repeating unit a4-4, the content thereof is preferably 3 to 40 mol%, more preferably 5 to 25 mol%, and 7 to 7 to all the repeating units of the resin (A). 20 mol% is more preferred.
The repeating unit a4-4 may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
・繰り返し単位a1-2
 繰り返し単位a1は、繰り返し単位a2、繰り返し単位a3、繰り返し単位a4のいずれにも該当しない繰り返し単位を含んでもよい。
 つまり、樹脂(A)は、繰り返し単位a2、繰り返し単位a3、繰り返し単位a4のいずれにも該当しない繰り返し単位a1を有してもよい。このような繰り返し単位a1を、繰り返し単位a1-2とも言う。
・ Repeat unit a1-2
The repeating unit a1 may include a repeating unit that does not correspond to any of the repeating unit a2, the repeating unit a3, and the repeating unit a4.
That is, the resin (A) may have a repeating unit a1 that does not correspond to any of the repeating unit a2, the repeating unit a3, and the repeating unit a4. Such a repeating unit a1 is also referred to as a repeating unit a1-2.
 繰り返し単位a1-2は、一般式(A1-2)で表される繰り返し単位であるのが好ましい。 The repeating unit a1-2 is preferably a repeating unit represented by the general formula (A1-2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
 一般式(A1-2)中、RQ12は、アルキル基(直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状。好ましくは炭素数1~5)、非芳香族性環基、又は、芳香環基を表す。
 ただし、RQ12は、脱離基ではない。
In the general formula (A1-2), RQ12 represents an alkyl group (linear or branched chain, preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms), a non-aromatic ring group, or an aromatic ring group.
However, RQ12 is not a leaving group.
 上記非芳香族性環基としては、例えば、単環式炭化水素環基及び多環式炭化水素環基が挙げられる。
 単環式炭化水素環基としては、例えば、炭素数3~12(好ましくは炭素数3~7)のシクロアルカン環基、及び、炭素数3~12のシクロアルケン環基が挙げられる。
 多環式炭化水素環基としては、例えば、環集合炭化水素環基及び架橋環式炭化水素環基が挙げられる。
 架橋環式炭化水素環としては、例えば、2環式炭化水素環、3環式炭化水素環、及び、4環式炭化水素環等が挙げられる。また、架橋環式炭化水素環は、5~8員シクロアルカン環が複数個縮合した縮合環でもよい。
 架橋環式炭化水素環基は、ノルボルナン環基、アダマンタン環基、ビシクロオクタン環基、又は、トリシクロ[5、2、1、02,6]デカン環基が好ましい。
Examples of the non-aromatic ring group include a monocyclic hydrocarbon ring group and a polycyclic hydrocarbon ring group.
Examples of the monocyclic hydrocarbon ring group include a cycloalkane ring group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms (preferably 3 to 7 carbon atoms) and a cycloalkene ring group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms.
Examples of the polycyclic hydrocarbon ring group include a ring-assembled hydrocarbon ring group and a crosslinked ring-type hydrocarbon ring group.
Examples of the crosslinked ring-type hydrocarbon ring include a bicyclic hydrocarbon ring, a three-ring hydrocarbon ring, and a four-ring hydrocarbon ring. Further, the crosslinked cyclic hydrocarbon ring may be a condensed ring in which a plurality of 5- to 8-membered cycloalkane rings are condensed.
The crosslinked cyclic hydrocarbon ring group is preferably a norbornane ring group, an adamantane ring group, a bicyclooctane ring group, or a tricyclo [5, 2, 1, 0 2, 6 ] decane ring group.
 上記芳香環基は、炭素数6~18の芳香環基が好ましく、ベンゼン環基、ナフタレン環基、アントラセン環基、及び、ビフェニレン環基が好ましい。 The aromatic ring group preferably has an aromatic ring group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and preferably a benzene ring group, a naphthalene ring group, an anthracene ring group, and a biphenylene ring group.
 上記アルキル基、上記非芳香族性環基、及び、上記芳香環基は、置換基として、繰り返し単位a4に関して説明した特定基及び一部分に特定基を含む基を有さない。上記アルキル基、上記非芳香族性環基、及び、上記芳香環基は、無置換が好ましい。 The alkyl group, the non-aromatic ring group, and the aromatic ring group do not have, as substituents, the specific group described with respect to the repeating unit a4 and a group containing a specific group in a part thereof. The alkyl group, the non-aromatic ring group, and the aromatic ring group are preferably unsubstituted.
 樹脂(A)が繰り返し単位a1-2を有する場合、その含有量は、樹脂(A)の全繰り返し単位に対して、1~30モル%が好ましく、3~25モル%がより好ましく、5~20モル%が更に好ましい。
 繰り返し単位a1-2は1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
When the resin (A) has the repeating unit a1-2, the content thereof is preferably 1 to 30 mol%, more preferably 3 to 25 mol%, and 5 to 5 to all the repeating units of the resin (A). 20 mol% is more preferred.
The repeating unit a1-2 may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
(繰り返し単位b1)
 樹脂(A)は、繰り返し単位a1に該当しない繰り返し単位(つまり一般式(A1)で表される繰り返し単位に該当しない繰り返し単位)を有してもよい。
 このような繰り返し単位a1に該当しない繰り返し単位を、繰り返し単位b1ともいう。
 繰り返し単位b1としては、例えば、一般式(A1-b)で表される繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
(Repeating unit b1)
The resin (A) may have a repeating unit that does not correspond to the repeating unit a1 (that is, a repeating unit that does not correspond to the repeating unit represented by the general formula (A1)).
Such a repeating unit that does not correspond to the repeating unit a1 is also referred to as a repeating unit b1.
Examples of the repeating unit b1 include a repeating unit represented by the general formula (A1-b).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
 一般式(A1-b)中、Xは、水素原子、アルキル基、又は、フッ素原子以外のハロゲン原子を表す。
 上記アルキル基は、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。上記アルキル基の炭素数は1~10が好ましい。上記アルキル基の置換基は水酸基又はハロゲン原子が好ましい。上記アルキル基が置換基を有する場合、置換基として水酸基及び/又はハロゲン原子のみを有するのが好ましい。上記アルキル基は-CHが好ましい。
 上記フッ素原子以外のハロゲン原子は、塩素原子、臭素原子、又は、ヨウ素原子が好ましい。
In the general formula (A1-b), X represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or a halogen atom other than a fluorine atom.
The alkyl group may be linear or branched. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The substituent of the alkyl group is preferably a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom. When the alkyl group has a substituent, it is preferable that the alkyl group has only a hydroxyl group and / or a halogen atom as the substituent. The alkyl group is preferably -CH 3 .
The halogen atom other than the fluorine atom is preferably a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, or an iodine atom.
 一般式(A1-b)中、Lは、単結合又は-COO-を表す。-COO-におけるカルボニル炭素は、繰り返し単位の主鎖に直接結合しているのが好ましい。 In the general formula (A1-b), L B represents a single bond or -COO-. The carbonyl carbon in -COO- is preferably directly attached to the main chain of the repeating unit.
 一般式(A1-b)中のRは、一般式(A1)中のRと同様である。 R Q in formula (A1-b) in is the same as R Q in the general formula (A1).
 樹脂(A)中、繰り返し単位b1(一般式(A1-b)で表される繰り返し単位等)の含有量は、樹脂(A)の全繰り返し単位に対して、0~95モル%が好ましく、9~90モル%がより好ましく、0~80モル%が更に好ましい。
 一般式(A1)で表される繰り返し単位は、2種以上を使用してもよい。
The content of the repeating unit b1 (repeating unit represented by the general formula (A1-b), etc.) in the resin (A) is preferably 0 to 95 mol% with respect to all the repeating units of the resin (A). 9 to 90 mol% is more preferable, and 0 to 80 mol% is further preferable.
Two or more kinds of repeating units represented by the general formula (A1) may be used.
・繰り返し単位b2
 繰り返し単位b1が、繰り返し単位b2を含むのも好ましい。
 つまり、樹脂(A)は、繰り返し単位b2を有するのも好ましい。
 繰り返し単位b2は、繰り返し単位a1以外の繰り返し単位であって、酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位(酸の作用により脱離する脱離基で極性基が保護された構造を有する繰り返し単位)である。
 酸分解性基、脱離基、極性基についての説明は上述の通りである。
-Repeating unit b2
It is also preferable that the repeating unit b1 includes the repeating unit b2.
That is, the resin (A) preferably has the repeating unit b2.
The repeating unit b2 is a repeating unit other than the repeating unit a1 and is a repeating unit having an acid-degradable group (a repeating unit having a structure in which a polar group is protected by a leaving group that is eliminated by the action of an acid). ..
The description of the acid-degradable group, the leaving group, and the polar group is as described above.
・・繰り返し単位b3
 繰り返し単位b2が、繰り返し単位b3を含むのも好ましい。
 樹脂(A)は、繰り返し単位b3を有するのも好ましい。
 繰り返し単位b3は、繰り返し単位b2の一形態である。
 繰り返し単位b3は、一般式(A2-b)で表される繰り返し単位である。
.. Repeat unit b3
It is also preferable that the repeating unit b2 includes the repeating unit b3.
The resin (A) also preferably has the repeating unit b3.
The repeating unit b3 is a form of the repeating unit b2.
The repeating unit b3 is a repeating unit represented by the general formula (A2-b).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 一般式(A2-b)中のXは、水素原子、アルキル基、又は、フッ素原子以外のハロゲン原子を表し、一般式(A1-b)中のXと同様である。
 一般式(A2-b)中のRQ1~RQ3は、一般式(A2)中のRQ1~RQ3と同様である。
X in the general formula (A2-b) represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or a halogen atom other than a fluorine atom, and is the same as X in the general formula (A1-b).
R Q1 ~ R Q3 in formula (A2-b) in is the same as R Q1 ~ R Q3 in the general formula (A2).
 樹脂(A)が繰り返し単位b2(好ましくは繰り返し単位b3)を有する場合、その含有量は、樹脂(A)の全繰り返し単位に対して、5~90モル%が好ましく、10~85モル%がより好ましく、20~70モル%が更に好ましい。
 繰り返し単位a2(好ましくは繰り返し単位a3)は、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
 樹脂(A)における繰り返し単位a2(好ましくは繰り返し単位a3)と繰り返し単位b2(好ましくは繰り返し単位b3)との合計含有量は、樹脂(A)の全繰り返し単位に対して、15~98モル%が好ましく、25~85モル%がより好ましく、35~80モル%が更に好ましい。
When the resin (A) has the repeating unit b2 (preferably the repeating unit b3), the content thereof is preferably 5 to 90 mol% and 10 to 85 mol% with respect to all the repeating units of the resin (A). More preferably, 20 to 70 mol% is further preferable.
As the repeating unit a2 (preferably the repeating unit a3), one type may be used alone, or two or more types may be used.
The total content of the repeating unit a2 (preferably the repeating unit a3) and the repeating unit b2 (preferably the repeating unit b3) in the resin (A) is 15 to 98 mol% with respect to all the repeating units of the resin (A). Is preferable, 25 to 85 mol% is more preferable, and 35 to 80 mol% is further preferable.
・繰り返し単位b4(繰り返し単位b5、繰り返し単位b6)
 繰り返し単位b1が、繰り返し単位b4を含むのも好ましい。
 つまり、樹脂(A)は、繰り返し単位b4を有するのも好ましい。
 繰り返し単位b4は、繰り返し単位a1以外の繰り返し単位であって、ラクトン基、スルトン基、カーボネート基、水酸基(非芳香族性水酸基でも芳香族性水酸基でもよい)、スルホンアミド基、アミド基、カルボン酸基、及び、光酸発生基からなる群から選択される1以上の特定基を有する基を有する繰り返し単位である。
 上記特定基を有する基は、上記「特定基を有する基」が特定基そのものであってもよく上記「特定基を有する基」の一部分に特定基が含まれていてもよい。
 繰り返し単位b4は、繰り返し単位b2及び/又は繰り返し単位b3とは異なるのが好ましい。
-Repeating unit b4 (repeating unit b5, repeating unit b6)
It is also preferable that the repeating unit b1 includes the repeating unit b4.
That is, the resin (A) preferably has the repeating unit b4.
The repeating unit b4 is a repeating unit other than the repeating unit a1, and is a lactone group, a sulton group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group (which may be a non-aromatic hydroxyl group or an aromatic hydroxyl group), a sulfonamide group, an amide group, and a carboxylic acid. A repeating unit having a group having one or more specific groups selected from the group consisting of a group and a photoacid generating group.
As for the group having the specific group, the "group having the specific group" may be the specific group itself, or the specific group may be contained in a part of the "group having the specific group".
The repeating unit b4 is preferably different from the repeating unit b2 and / or the repeating unit b3.
 繰り返し単位b4は、一般式(B0)で表される繰り返し単位が好ましい。 The repeating unit b4 is preferably a repeating unit represented by the general formula (B0).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
 一般式(B0)中、Xは、水素原子、アルキル基、又は、フッ素原子以外のハロゲン原子を表す。
 上記アルキル基は、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。上記アルキル基の炭素数は1~10が好ましい。上記アルキル基の置換基は水酸基又はハロゲン原子が好ましい。上記アルキル基が置換基を有する場合、置換基として水酸基及び/又はハロゲン原子のみを有するのが好ましい。上記アルキル基は-CHが好ましい。
 一般式(B0)中、Lは、単結合又は-COO-を表す。-COO-におけるカルボニル炭素は、繰り返し単位の主鎖に直接結合しているのが好ましい。
 一般式(B0)中、RB0は、水素原子又は基Yを表す。
 ただし、RB0は、水素原子を表す場合、Lは-COO-を表し、-L-RB0の全体が-COOHを表す。
 基Yは、ラクトン基、スルトン基、カーボネート基、水酸基(非芳香族性水酸基でも芳香族性水酸基でもよい)、スルホンアミド基、アミド基、カルボン酸基、及び、光酸発生基からなる群から選択される1以上の特定基を有する基であって、脱離基ではない基である。
 また、基Yが「脱離基ではない」とは、具体的には、Lが-COO-である場合、-COO-RB0において、RB0(基Y)は、極性基(カルボン酸基)を保護する脱離基ではない基であることを意図する。
 「脱離基ではない基」とは、繰り返し単位a2に関して説明した「酸の作用により脱離する脱離基」ではない基を意味する。具体的には、「脱離基ではない基」は、上述の式(Y1)~(Y4)で表される基には該当しない。
 一般式(B0)中のRB0は、例えば、繰り返し単位a4におけるRと同様である。
In the general formula (B0), X represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or a halogen atom other than a fluorine atom.
The alkyl group may be linear or branched. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The substituent of the alkyl group is preferably a hydroxyl group or a halogen atom. When the alkyl group has a substituent, it is preferable that the alkyl group has only a hydroxyl group and / or a halogen atom as the substituent. The alkyl group is preferably -CH 3 .
In the general formula (B0), L B represents a single bond or -COO-. The carbonyl carbon in -COO- is preferably directly attached to the main chain of the repeating unit.
In the general formula (B0), RB0 represents a hydrogen atom or a group Y.
However, R B0, when represents a hydrogen atom, L B represents -COO-, overall -L B -R B0 represents -COOH.
Group Y consists of a group consisting of a lactone group, a sulton group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group (which may be a non-aromatic hydroxyl group or an aromatic hydroxyl group), a sulfonamide group, an amide group, a carboxylic acid group, and a photoacid generating group. A group having one or more specific groups to be selected, not a elimination group.
Moreover, "in not leaving" group Y is, specifically, when L B is -COO-, in -COO-R B0, R B0 (group Y) is a polar group (carboxylic acid It is intended to be a non-leaving group that protects the group.
The "group that is not a leaving group" means a group that is not the "leaving group that is eliminated by the action of an acid" described with respect to the repeating unit a2. Specifically, the "group that is not a leaving group" does not correspond to the group represented by the above formulas (Y1) to (Y4).
R B0 in the formula (B0) is, for example, the same as R Q in the repeating unit a4.
 中でも、繰り返し単位b4は、繰り返し単位b5を含むのが好ましい。
 つまり、樹脂(A)は、繰り返し単位b5を有するのも好ましい。
 繰り返し単位b5は、一般式(B1)で表される繰り返し単位である。
Above all, the repeating unit b4 preferably includes the repeating unit b5.
That is, the resin (A) preferably has the repeating unit b5.
The repeating unit b5 is a repeating unit represented by the general formula (B1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
 一般式(B1)中のXは、水素原子、アルキル基、又は、フッ素原子以外のハロゲン原子を表し、一般式(B0)中のXと同様である。
 一般式(B1)中、Lは、単結合又は-COO-を表す。-COO-におけるカルボニル炭素は、繰り返し単位の主鎖に直接結合しているのが好ましい。
 一般式(B1)中、RB1は、基Zを表す。
 基Zは、ラクトン基、スルトン基、カーボネート基、水酸基(非芳香族性水酸基でも芳香族性水酸基でもよい)、スルホンアミド基、アミド基、カルボン酸基、及び、光酸発生基からなる群から選択される1以上の特定基、並びに、フッ素原子を有する基であって、脱離基ではない基である。
 また、基Zが「脱離基ではない」とは、具体的には、Lが-COO-である場合、-COO-RB1において、RB1(基Z)は、極性基(カルボン酸基)を保護する脱離基ではない基であることを意図する。
 「脱離基ではない基」とは、繰り返し単位a2に関して説明した「酸の作用により脱離する脱離基」ではない基を意味する。具体的には、「脱離基ではない基」は、上述の式(Y1)~(Y4)で表される基には該当しない。
 一般式(B1)中のRB1(基Z)は、例えば、繰り返し単位a5におけるRと同様である。
X in the general formula (B1) represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or a halogen atom other than a fluorine atom, and is the same as X in the general formula (B0).
In the general formula (B1), L B represents a single bond or -COO-. The carbonyl carbon in -COO- is preferably directly attached to the main chain of the repeating unit.
In the general formula (B1), RB1 represents the group Z.
Group Z consists of a group consisting of a lactone group, a sulton group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group (which may be a non-aromatic hydroxyl group or an aromatic hydroxyl group), a sulfonamide group, an amide group, a carboxylic acid group, and a photoacid generating group. It is a group having one or more specific groups to be selected and a fluorine atom, and is not a elimination group.
Moreover, "in not leaving" group Z is, specifically, when L B is -COO-, in -COO-R B1, R B1 (group Z) is a polar group (carboxylic acid It is intended to be a non-leaving group that protects the group.
The "group that is not a leaving group" means a group that is not the "leaving group that is eliminated by the action of an acid" described with respect to the repeating unit a2. Specifically, the "group that is not a leaving group" does not correspond to the group represented by the above formulas (Y1) to (Y4).
R B1 in general formula (B1) (group Z) is, for example, the same as R Q in the repeating unit a5.
 中でも、繰り返し単位b5が、ヘキサフルオロプロパノール基(「-C(CFOH」で表される基)を有する基Zを有する繰り返し単位b6を含むのも好ましい。
 つまり、樹脂(A)は、繰り返し単位b6を有するのも好ましい。
 より詳細には、繰り返し単位b6は、一般式(B1)で表される繰り返し単位において、RB1がヘキサフルオロプロパノール基を有する基Zである繰り返し単位である。
 繰り返し単位b6は、繰り返し単位b4及び繰り返し単位b5の一形態でもある。
Among them, it is also preferable that the repeating unit b5 includes a repeating unit b6 having a group Z having a hexafluoropropanol group (a group represented by "-C (CF 3 ) 2 OH").
That is, the resin (A) preferably has the repeating unit b6.
More specifically, repeating units b6, in the repeating unit represented by formula (B1), a repeating unit R B1 is a group Z with a hexafluoropropanol group.
The repeating unit b6 is also a form of the repeating unit b4 and the repeating unit b5.
 樹脂(A)が繰り返し単位b4(好ましくは繰り返し単位b5、より好ましくは繰り返し単位b6)を有する場合、その含有量は、樹脂(A)の全繰り返し単位に対して、1~80モル%が好ましく、3~70モル%がより好ましく、5~65モル%が更に好ましい。
 繰り返し単位a4は1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
 また、樹脂(A)における繰り返し単位a4と繰り返し単位b4との合計含有量は、樹脂(A)の全繰り返し単位に対して、1~80モル%が好ましく、3~70モル%がより好ましく、5~65モル%が更に好ましい。
When the resin (A) has a repeating unit b4 (preferably a repeating unit b5, more preferably a repeating unit b6), the content thereof is preferably 1 to 80 mol% with respect to all the repeating units of the resin (A). 3 to 70 mol% is more preferable, and 5 to 65 mol% is further preferable.
The repeating unit a4 may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The total content of the repeating unit a4 and the repeating unit b4 in the resin (A) is preferably 1 to 80 mol%, more preferably 3 to 70 mol%, based on all the repeating units of the resin (A). More preferably, it is 5 to 65 mol%.
・・繰り返し単位b4-0
 繰り返し単位b4は、特定基としてカルボン酸基を有する繰り返し単位b4-0であってもよい。
 このような繰り返し単位b4-0の一形態として、繰り返し単位a4-0における繰り返し単位の主鎖に直接結合するフッ素原子が、一般式(B0)中のXに置き換わった繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
 繰り返し単位b4-0の好ましい含有量は、繰り返し単位a4-0と同様である。
 また、樹脂(A)における繰り返し単位a4-0と繰り返し単位b4-0との合計含有量は、樹脂(A)の全繰り返し単位に対して、1~30モル%が好ましく、2~20モル%がより好ましく、3~15モル%が更に好ましい。
・ ・ Repeat unit b4-0
The repeating unit b4 may be a repeating unit b4-0 having a carboxylic acid group as a specific group.
As one form of such a repeating unit b4-0, a repeating unit in which the fluorine atom directly bonded to the main chain of the repeating unit in the repeating unit a4-0 is replaced with X in the general formula (B0) can be mentioned.
The preferable content of the repeating unit b4-0 is the same as that of the repeating unit a4-0.
The total content of the repeating unit a4-0 and the repeating unit b4-0 in the resin (A) is preferably 1 to 30 mol%, preferably 2 to 20 mol%, based on all the repeating units of the resin (A). Is more preferable, and 3 to 15 mol% is further preferable.
・・繰り返し単位b4-1
 繰り返し単位b4が、特定基として(好ましくは、上述の基Y又は基Zの特定基として)、ラクトン基、スルトン基、及び、カーボネート基からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を有する繰り返し単位である場合、このような繰り返し単位b4を、繰り返し単位b4-1とも言う。
 ラクトン基を有する繰り返し単位b4-1において、ラクトン基は、上述の一般式(LC1-1)~(LC1-22)のいずれかで表されるラクトン構造の環員原子から、水素原子を1つ以上引き抜いてなるラクトン基が好ましい。また、上記ラクトン構造の環員原子の1つが繰り返し単位の主鎖となっていてもよいし、なっていなくてもよい。上記ラクトン構造の2つの環員原子が繰り返し単位の主鎖となっていてもよいし、なっていなくてもよい。
 スルトン基を有する繰り返し単位b4-1において、スルトン基は、上述の一般式(SL1-1)~(SL1-3)のいずれかで表されるスルトン構造の環員原子から、水素原子を1つ以上引き抜いてなるスルトン基が好ましい。また、上記スルトン構造の1つの環員原子が繰り返し単位の主鎖となっていてもよいし、なっていなくてもよい。上記スルトン構造の2つの環員原子が繰り返し単位の主鎖となっていてもよいし、なっていなくてもよい。
 カーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位b4-1において、カーボネート基は、上述の一般式(CC-1)のいずれかで表される環状炭酸エステル構造の環員原子から、水素原子を1つ以上引き抜いてなるスルトン基が好ましい。また、上記環状炭酸エステル構造の1つの環員原子が繰り返し単位の主鎖となっていてもよいし、なっていなくてもよい。上記環状炭酸エステル構造の2つの環員原子が繰り返し単位の主鎖となっていてもよいし、なっていなくてもよい。
・ ・ Repeat unit b4-1
A repeating unit having at least one selected from the group consisting of a lactone group, a sultone group, and a carbonate group as a specific group (preferably as a specific group of the above-mentioned group Y or group Z). In some cases, such a repeating unit b4 is also referred to as a repeating unit b4-1.
In the repeating unit b4-1 having a lactone group, the lactone group contains one hydrogen atom from the ring member atom of the lactone structure represented by any of the above general formulas (LC1-1) to (LC1-22). The lactone group extracted as described above is preferable. Further, one of the ring member atoms of the lactone structure may or may not be the main chain of the repeating unit. The two ring-membered atoms of the lactone structure may or may not be the main chain of the repeating unit.
In the repeating unit b4-1 having a sultone group, the sultone group contains one hydrogen atom from the ring-membered atom of the sultone structure represented by any of the above general formulas (SL1-1) to (SL1-3). The sultone group obtained by pulling out the above is preferable. Further, one ring member atom of the sultone structure may or may not be the main chain of the repeating unit. The two ring-membered atoms of the sultone structure may or may not be the main chain of the repeating unit.
In the repeating unit b4-1 having a carbonate group, the carbonate group is formed by extracting one or more hydrogen atoms from the ring-membered atom of the cyclic carbonate structure represented by any of the above general formula (CC-1). A sultone group is preferred. Further, one ring-membered atom of the cyclic carbonate structure may or may not be the main chain of the repeating unit. The two ring-membered atoms of the cyclic carbonate structure may or may not be the main chain of the repeating unit.
 繰り返し単位b4-1の一形態として、繰り返し単位a4-1(一般式(A3)で表される繰り返し単位、又は、一般式(A4)で表される繰り返し単位等)における繰り返し単位の主鎖に直接結合するフッ素原子が、一般式(B0)中のXに置き換わった繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
 繰り返し単位b4-1は、繰り返し単位b4-0とは異なるのが好ましい。
 繰り返し単位b4-1の好ましい含有量は、繰り返し単位a4-1と同様である。
 また、樹脂(A)における繰り返し単位a4-1と繰り返し単位b4-1との合計含有量は、樹脂(A)の全繰り返し単位に対して、3~60モル%が好ましく、5~50モル%がより好ましく、7~45モル%が更に好ましい。
As a form of the repeating unit b4-1, the main chain of the repeating unit in the repeating unit a4-1 (the repeating unit represented by the general formula (A3), the repeating unit represented by the general formula (A4), etc.) Examples thereof include repeating units in which the directly bonded fluorine atom is replaced with X in the general formula (B0).
The repeating unit b4-1 is preferably different from the repeating unit b4-0.
The preferable content of the repeating unit b4-1 is the same as that of the repeating unit a4-1.
The total content of the repeating unit a4-1 and the repeating unit b4-1 in the resin (A) is preferably 3 to 60 mol%, preferably 5 to 50 mol%, based on all the repeating units of the resin (A). Is more preferable, and 7 to 45 mol% is further preferable.
・・繰り返し単位b4-2
 繰り返し単位b4が、特定基として(好ましくは上述の基Y又は基Zの特定基として)非芳香族性水酸基を有する繰り返し単位であり、上記非芳香族性水酸基が、フッ素化アルコール基に含まれる水酸基以外の水酸基である場合、このような繰り返し単位b4を、繰り返し単位b4-2とも言う。
 繰り返し単位b4-2は、繰り返し単位b4-0、及び/又は、繰り返し単位b4-1とは異なるのが好ましい。
 このような繰り返し単位b4-2の一形態として、繰り返し単位a4-2(一般式(A5)で表される繰り返し単位等)において、主鎖に直接結合するフッ素原子が、一般式(B0)中のXに置き換わり、主鎖に直接結合する-COO-が、一般式(B0)中のLに置き換わった繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
 繰り返し単位b4-2の好ましい含有量は、繰り返し単位a4-2と同様である。
 また、樹脂(A)における繰り返し単位a4-2と繰り返し単位b4-2との合計含有量は、樹脂(A)の全繰り返し単位に対して、3~60モル%が好ましく、5~50モル%がより好ましく、10~45モル%が更に好ましい。
・ ・ Repeat unit b4-2
The repeating unit b4 is a repeating unit having a non-aromatic hydroxyl group as a specific group (preferably as the specific group of the above-mentioned group Y or group Z), and the above-mentioned non-aromatic hydroxyl group is contained in the fluorinated alcohol group. When it is a hydroxyl group other than a hydroxyl group, such a repeating unit b4 is also referred to as a repeating unit b4-2.
The repeating unit b4-2 is preferably different from the repeating unit b4-0 and / or the repeating unit b4-1.
As one form of such a repeating unit b4-2, in the repeating unit a4-2 (repeating unit represented by the general formula (A5), etc.), the fluorine atom directly bonded to the main chain is contained in the general formula (B0). replaces the X, -COO- directly bonded to the main chain, the general formula (B0) repeating units replaced by L B in the like.
The preferable content of the repeating unit b4-2 is the same as that of the repeating unit a4-2.
The total content of the repeating unit a4-2 and the repeating unit b4-2 in the resin (A) is preferably 3 to 60 mol%, preferably 5 to 50 mol%, based on all the repeating units of the resin (A). Is more preferable, and 10 to 45 mol% is further preferable.
・・繰り返し単位b4-3
 繰り返し単位b4が、特定基として(好ましくは上述の基Y又は基Zの特定基として)非芳香族性水酸基を有する繰り返し単位であり、上記非芳香族性水酸基が、フッ素化アルコール基に含まれる水酸基である場合、このような繰り返し単位b4を、繰り返し単位b4-3とも言う。
 繰り返し単位b4-3は、繰り返し単位b4-0、繰り返し単位b4-1、及び/又は、繰り返し単位b4-2とは異なるのが好ましい。
 繰り返し単位b4-3は、繰り返し単位b6に該当するのが好ましい。
 このような繰り返し単位b4-3の一形態として、繰り返し単位a4-3(一般式(A6)で表される繰り返し単位等)において、主鎖に直接結合するフッ素原子が、一般式(B0)中のXに置き換わり、主鎖に直接結合する-COO-が、一般式(B0)のLに置き換わった繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
 繰り返し単位b4-3の好ましい含有量は、繰り返し単位a4-3と同様である。
 また、樹脂(A)における繰り返し単位a4-3と繰り返し単位b4-3との合計含有量は、樹脂(A)の全繰り返し単位に対して、3~50モル%が好ましく、5~40モル%がより好ましく、10~35モル%が更に好ましい。
・ ・ Repeat unit b4-3
The repeating unit b4 is a repeating unit having a non-aromatic hydroxyl group as a specific group (preferably as the specific group of the above-mentioned group Y or group Z), and the above-mentioned non-aromatic hydroxyl group is contained in the fluorinated alcohol group. In the case of a hydroxyl group, such a repeating unit b4 is also referred to as a repeating unit b4-3.
The repeating unit b4-3 is preferably different from the repeating unit b4-0, the repeating unit b4-1, and / or the repeating unit b4-2.
The repeating unit b4-3 preferably corresponds to the repeating unit b6.
As one form of such a repeating unit b4-3, in the repeating unit a4-3 (repeating unit represented by the general formula (A6), etc.), the fluorine atom directly bonded to the main chain is contained in the general formula (B0). of replaces X, the main chain bonded directly to a -COO- are repeating units replaced by L B in the general formula (B0) and the like.
The preferable content of the repeating unit b4-3 is the same as that of the repeating unit a4-3.
The total content of the repeating unit a4-3 and the repeating unit b4-3 in the resin (A) is preferably 3 to 50 mol%, preferably 5 to 40 mol%, based on all the repeating units of the resin (A). Is more preferable, and 10 to 35 mol% is further preferable.
・・繰り返し単位b4-4
 繰り返し単位b4が、特定基として(好ましくは上述の基Y又は基Zの特定基として)光酸発生基を有する繰り返し単位である場合、このような繰り返し単位b4を、繰り返し単位b4-4とも言う。
 繰り返し単位b4-4は、繰り返し単位b5に該当するのが好ましい。
 繰り返し単位b4-4は、繰り返し単位b4-0、繰り返し単位b4-1、繰り返し単位b4-2、及び/又は、繰り返し単位b4-3とは異なるのが好ましい。
 このような繰り返し単位b4-4の一形態として、繰り返し単位a4-4(一般式(A7)で表される繰り返し単位等)において、主鎖に直接結合するフッ素原子が、一般式(B0)中のXに置き換わり、主鎖に直接結合する-COO-が、一般式(B0)中のLに置き換わった繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
 繰り返し単位b4-4の好ましい含有量は、繰り返し単位a4-4と同様である。
 また、樹脂(A)における繰り返し単位a4-4と繰り返し単位b4-4との合計含有量は、樹脂(A)の全繰り返し単位に対して、3~40モル%が好ましく、5~25モル%がより好ましく、7~20モル%が更に好ましい。
・ ・ Repeat unit b4-4
When the repeating unit b4 is a repeating unit having a photoacid generating group as a specific group (preferably as the specific group of the above-mentioned group Y or group Z), such a repeating unit b4 is also referred to as a repeating unit b4-4. ..
The repeating unit b4-4 preferably corresponds to the repeating unit b5.
The repeating unit b4-4 is preferably different from the repeating unit b4-0, the repeating unit b4-1, the repeating unit b4-2, and / or the repeating unit b4-3.
As one form of such a repeating unit b4-4, in the repeating unit a4-4 (repeating unit represented by the general formula (A7), etc.), the fluorine atom directly bonded to the main chain is contained in the general formula (B0). replaces the X, -COO- directly bonded to the main chain, the general formula (B0) repeating units replaced by L B in the like.
The preferable content of the repeating unit b4-4 is the same as that of the repeating unit a4-4.
The total content of the repeating unit a4-4 and the repeating unit b4-4 in the resin (A) is preferably 3 to 40 mol%, preferably 5 to 25 mol%, based on all the repeating units of the resin (A). Is more preferable, and 7 to 20 mol% is further preferable.
・・繰り返し単位b4-5
 繰り返し単位b4が、特定基として(好ましくは上述の基Y又は基Zの特定基として)芳香族性水酸基を有する基を有する繰り返し単位である場合、このような繰り返し単位b4を、繰り返し単位b4-5とも言う。
 繰り返し単位b4-5は、繰り返し単位b4-0、繰り返し単位b4-1、繰り返し単位b4-2、繰り返し単位b4-3、及び/又は、繰り返し単位b4-4とは異なるのが好ましい。
 繰り返し単位b4-5は、一般式(B2)で表される切り返し単位が好ましい。
・ ・ Repeat unit b4-5
When the repeating unit b4 is a repeating unit having a group having an aromatic hydroxyl group as a specific group (preferably as the specific group of the above-mentioned group Y or group Z), such a repeating unit b4 is referred to as the repeating unit b4-. Also called 5.
The repeating unit b4-5 is preferably different from the repeating unit b4-0, the repeating unit b4-1, the repeating unit b4-2, the repeating unit b4-3, and / or the repeating unit b4-4.
The repeating unit b4-5 is preferably a turning unit represented by the general formula (B2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
 一般式(B2)中、Xは、水素原子、アルキル基、又は、フッ素原子以外のハロゲン原子を表し、一般式(B0)中のXと同様である。 In the general formula (B2), X represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or a halogen atom other than a fluorine atom, and is the same as X in the general formula (B0).
 一般式(B2)中、Xは、単結合、-COO-、又は-CONR64-を表し、R64は、水素原子又はアルキル基(直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。好ましくは炭素数1~5)を表す。-COO-におけるカルボニル炭素は、繰り返し単位の主鎖に直接結合しているのが好ましい。 In the general formula (B2), X 4 represents a single bond, -COO-, or -CONR 64- , and R 64 is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group (which may be linear or branched, preferably having a number of carbon atoms). Represents 1 to 5). The carbonyl carbon in -COO- is preferably directly attached to the main chain of the repeating unit.
 一般式(B2)中、Lは、単結合又はアルキレン基(直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。好ましくは炭素数1~20)を表す。 In the general formula (B2), L 4 represents a single bond or an alkylene group (either linear or branched chain, preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms).
 一般式(B2)中、Arは、(n+1)価の芳香環基を表す。
 上記芳香環基は、ベンゼン環基、ナフタレン環基、及び、アントラセン環基等の炭素数6~18のアリーレン基、又は、チオフェン環基、フラン環基、ピロール環基、ベンゾチオフェン環基、ベンゾフラン環基、ベンゾピロール環基、トリアジン環基、イミダゾール環基、ベンゾイミダゾール環基、トリアゾール環基、チアジアゾール環基、及び、チアゾール環基等のヘテロ環を含む芳香環基が好ましく、ベンゼン環基がより好ましい。
In the general formula (B2), Ar 4 represents an (n + 1) -valent aromatic ring group.
The aromatic ring group is an arylene group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms such as a benzene ring group, a naphthalene ring group, and an anthracene ring group, or a thiophene ring group, a furan ring group, a pyrrole ring group, a benzothiophene ring group, and a benzofuran. Aromatic ring groups containing heterocycles such as a ring group, a benzopyrol ring group, a triazine ring group, an imidazole ring group, a benzoimidazole ring group, a triazole ring group, a thiadiazol ring group, and a thiazole ring group are preferable, and a benzene ring group is preferable. More preferred.
 一般式(B2)中、nは、1~5の整数を表す。
 (n+1)価の芳香環基は、更に置換基を有していてもよい。
In the general formula (B2), n represents an integer of 1 to 5.
The (n + 1) -valent aromatic ring group may further have a substituent.
 上述したR64のアルキル基、Lのアルキレン基、及び、Arの(n+1)価の芳香環基が有し得る置換基としては、例えば、ハロゲン原子(好ましくはフッ素原子)、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、ヒドロキシエトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ヒドロキシプロポキシ基、及び、ブトキシ基等のアルコキシ基;フェニル基等のアリール基;等が挙げられる。また、Arの(n+1)価の芳香環基が有し得る置換基としては、例えば、アルキル基(直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。好ましくは炭素数1~20)も挙げられる。 Examples of the substituent that the above-mentioned alkyl group of R 64 , alkylene group of L 4 and Ar 4 (n + 1) -valent aromatic ring group can have include a halogen atom (preferably a fluorine atom) and a methoxy group. Examples thereof include an alkoxy group such as an ethoxy group, a hydroxyethoxy group, a propoxy group, a hydroxypropoxy group and a butoxy group; an aryl group such as a phenyl group; and the like. Further, examples of the substituent that the (n + 1) -valent aromatic ring group of Ar 4 can have include an alkyl group (which may be linear or branched, preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms).
 以下、繰り返し単位b4-5の具体例を示すが、本発明は、これに限定されるものではない。式中、aは1又は2を表す。 Hereinafter, specific examples of the repeating unit b4-5 will be shown, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In the formula, a represents 1 or 2.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
 なお、上記繰り返し単位の中でも、以下に具体的に記載する繰り返し単位が好ましい。式中、Rは水素原子又はメチル基を表し、aは1~3の整数を表す。 Among the above repeating units, the repeating units specifically described below are preferable. In the formula, R represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and a represents an integer of 1 to 3.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
 樹脂(A)が繰り返し単位b4-5を有する場合、その含有量は、樹脂(A)の全繰り返し単位に対して、3~70モル%が好ましく、10~65モル%がより好ましく、7~60モル%が更に好ましい。
 繰り返し単位b4-5は1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
When the resin (A) has the repeating unit b4-5, the content thereof is preferably 3 to 70 mol%, more preferably 10 to 65 mol%, and 7 to 7 to all the repeating units of the resin (A). 60 mol% is more preferred.
The repeating unit b4-5 may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 樹脂(A)は、常法に従って(例えばラジカル重合)合成できる。
 GPC法によりポリスチレン換算値として、樹脂(A)の重量平均分子量は、1,000~200,000が好ましく、3,000~20,000がより好ましく、4,500~15,000が更に好ましい。樹脂(A)の重量平均分子量を、1,000~200,000とすれば、耐熱性及びドライエッチング耐性の劣化を防ぐことができ、更に、現像性の劣化、及び、粘度が高くなって製膜性が劣化することを防げる。
 樹脂(A)の分散度(分子量分布)は、通常1~5であり、1~3が好ましく、1.2~3.0がより好ましく、1.2~2.0が更に好ましい。分散度が小さいものほど、解像度、及び、レジスト形状が優れ、更に、レジストパターンの側壁がスムーズであり、ラフネス性に優れる。
The resin (A) can be synthesized according to a conventional method (for example, radical polymerization).
As a polystyrene conversion value by the GPC method, the weight average molecular weight of the resin (A) is preferably 1,000 to 200,000, more preferably 3,000 to 20,000, and even more preferably 4,500 to 15,000. When the weight average molecular weight of the resin (A) is set to 1,000 to 200,000, deterioration of heat resistance and dry etching resistance can be prevented, and further, deterioration of developability and high viscosity can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the film property from deteriorating.
The dispersity (molecular weight distribution) of the resin (A) is usually 1 to 5, preferably 1 to 3, more preferably 1.2 to 3.0, and even more preferably 1.2 to 2.0. The smaller the degree of dispersion, the better the resolution and the resist shape, the smoother the side wall of the resist pattern, and the better the roughness.
 樹脂(A)は、発生酸の過剰な拡散及び/又は現像時のパターン崩壊を抑制できる点から、ガラス転移温度(Tg)が高い方が好ましい。Tgは、90℃超が好ましく、100℃超がより好ましく、110℃超が更に好ましく、125℃超が特に好ましい。なお、過度な高Tg化は現像液への溶解速度低下を招くため、Tgは400℃以下が好ましく、350℃以下がより好ましい。
 なお、本明細書において、樹脂(A)等のポリマーのガラス転移温度(Tg)は、以下の方法で算出する。まず、ポリマー中に含まれる各繰り返し単位のみからなるホモポリマーのTgを、Bicerano法によりそれぞれ算出する。以後、算出されたTgを、「繰り返し単位のTg」という。次に、ポリマー中の全繰り返し単位に対する、各繰り返し単位の質量割合(%)を算出する。次に、Foxの式(Materials Letters 62(2008)3152等に記載)を用いて各質量割合におけるTgを算出して、それらを総和して、ポリマーのTg(℃)とする。
 Bicerano法はPrediction of polymer properties, Marcel Dekker Inc, New York(1993)等に記載されている。またBicerano法によるTgの算出は、ポリマーの物性概算ソフトウェアMDL Polymer(MDL Information Systems, Inc.)を用いて行える。
The resin (A) preferably has a high glass transition temperature (Tg) from the viewpoint of suppressing excessive diffusion of generated acid and / or pattern collapse during development. Tg is preferably over 90 ° C., more preferably over 100 ° C., even more preferably over 110 ° C., and particularly preferably over 125 ° C. In addition, since excessively high Tg causes a decrease in the dissolution rate in a developing solution, Tg is preferably 400 ° C. or lower, more preferably 350 ° C. or lower.
In the present specification, the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the polymer such as the resin (A) is calculated by the following method. First, the Tg of a homopolymer composed of only each repeating unit contained in the polymer is calculated by the Bicerano method. Hereinafter, the calculated Tg is referred to as "repeating unit Tg". Next, the mass ratio (%) of each repeating unit to all the repeating units in the polymer is calculated. Next, Tg at each mass ratio is calculated using the Fox formula (described in Materials Letters 62 (2008) 3152, etc.), and the sum of them is used as the Tg (° C.) of the polymer.
The Bicerano method is described in the Precision of developers, Marcel Dekker Inc, New York (1993) and the like. Further, the calculation of Tg by the Bicerano method can be performed using the polymer physical property estimation software MDL Polymer (MDL Information Systems, Inc.).
 樹脂(A)のTgを90℃より大きくするには、樹脂(A)の主鎖の運動性を低下させるのが好ましい。樹脂(A)の主鎖の運動性を低下させる方法は、以下の(a)~(e)の方法が挙げられる。
(a)主鎖への嵩高い置換基の導入
(b)主鎖への複数の置換基の導入
(c)主鎖近傍への樹脂(A)間の相互作用を誘発する置換基の導入
(d)環状構造での主鎖形成
(e)主鎖への環状構造の連結
 なお、樹脂(A)は、ホモポリマーのTgが130℃以上を示す繰り返し単位を有するのが好ましい。
 なお、ホモポリマーのTgが130℃以上を示す繰り返し単位の種類は特に制限されず、Bicerano法により算出されるホモポリマーのTgが130℃以上である繰り返し単位であればよい。なお、後述する式(A)~式(E)で表される繰り返し単位中の官能基の種類によっては、ホモポリマーのTgが130℃以上を示す繰り返し単位に該当する。
In order to increase the Tg of the resin (A) above 90 ° C., it is preferable to reduce the motility of the main chain of the resin (A). Examples of the method for reducing the motility of the main chain of the resin (A) include the following methods (a) to (e).
(A) Introduction of a bulky substituent into the main chain (b) Introduction of a plurality of substituents into the main chain (c) Introduction of a substituent that induces an interaction between the resins (A) in the vicinity of the main chain ( d) Main chain formation in a cyclic structure (e) Connection of a cyclic structure to the main chain The resin (A) preferably has a repeating unit in which the Tg of the homopolymer is 130 ° C. or higher.
The type of repeating unit having a homopolymer Tg of 130 ° C. or higher is not particularly limited, and any repeating unit having a homopolymer Tg of 130 ° C. or higher calculated by the Bicerano method may be used. Depending on the type of the functional group in the repeating unit represented by the formulas (A) to (E) described later, the homopolymer corresponds to the repeating unit having a Tg of 130 ° C. or higher.
 上記(a)の具体的な達成手段としては、例えば、樹脂(A)に式(A)で表される繰り返し単位を導入する方法が挙げられる。 As a specific means of achieving the above (a), for example, a method of introducing a repeating unit represented by the formula (A) into the resin (A) can be mentioned.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
 式(A)、Rは、多環構造を有する基を表す。Rは、水素原子、メチル基、又は、エチル基を表す。多環構造を有する基とは、複数の環構造を有する基であり、複数の環構造は縮合していても、縮合していなくてもよい。
 式(A)で表される繰り返し単位としては、例えば、下記繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
Formulas (A) and RA represent groups having a polycyclic structure. R x represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, or an ethyl group. The group having a polycyclic structure is a group having a plurality of ring structures, and the plurality of ring structures may or may not be condensed.
Examples of the repeating unit represented by the formula (A) include the following repeating units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
 上記式中、Rは、水素原子、メチル基、又は、エチル基を表す。
 Raは、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、アルケニル基、水酸基、アルコキシ基、アシロキシ基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アミノ基、ハロゲン原子、エステル基(-OCOR’’’又は-COOR’’’:R’’’は炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素化アルキル基)、又は、カルボン酸基を表す。なお、上記アルキル基、上記シクロアルキル基、上記アリール基、上記アラルキル基、及び、上記アルケニル基は、それぞれ、置換基を有してもよい。また、Raで表される基中の炭素原子に結合している水素原子は、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子で置換されていてもよい。
 また、R’及びR’’は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、アルケニル基、水酸基、アルコキシ基、アシロキシ基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アミノ基、ハロゲン原子、エステル基(-OCOR’’’又は-COOR’’’:R’’’は炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素化アルキル基)、又は、カルボン酸基を表す。なお、上記アルキル基、上記シクロアルキル基、上記アリール基、上記アラルキル基、及び、上記アルケニル基は、それぞれ、置換基を有してもよい。また、R’及びR’’で表される基中の炭素原子に結合している水素原子は、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子で置換されていてもよい。
 Lは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基としては、例えば、-COO-、-CO-、-O-、-S-、-SO-、-SO-、アルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、アルケニレン基、及び、これらの複数が連結した連結基等が挙げられる。
 m及びnは、それぞれ独立に、0以上の整数を表す。m及びnの上限は特に制限されないが、2以下の場合が多く、1以下の場合がより多い。
In the above formula, R represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, or an ethyl group.
Ra is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, and an ester group (-OCOR'''. Alternatively, -COOR "": R "" represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a fluorinated alkyl group) or a carboxylic acid group. The alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent. Further, the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by Ra may be replaced with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
In addition, R'and R'' are independently alkyl groups, cycloalkyl groups, aryl groups, aralkyl groups, alkenyl groups, hydroxyl groups, alkoxy groups, asyloxy groups, cyano groups, nitro groups, amino groups, halogen atoms, respectively. It represents an ester group (-OCOR ″ or −COOR ′ ″: R ″ is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a fluorinated alkyl group) or a carboxylic acid group. The alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent. Further, the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by R'and R'may be replaced with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Examples of the divalent linking group include -COO-, -CO-, -O-, -S-, -SO-, -SO 2- , an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group, and a plurality of these. Examples thereof include a linking group in which is linked.
m and n each independently represent an integer of 0 or more. The upper limits of m and n are not particularly limited, but are often 2 or less and more often 1 or less.
 上記(b)の具体的な達成手段としては、例えば、樹脂(A)に式(B)で表される繰り返し単位を導入する方法が挙げられる。 As a specific means of achieving the above (b), for example, a method of introducing a repeating unit represented by the formula (B) into the resin (A) can be mentioned.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
 式(B)中、Rb1~Rb4は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は有機基を表し、Rb1~Rb4のうち少なくとも2つ以上が有機基を表す。
 また、有機基の少なくとも1つが、繰り返し単位中の主鎖に直接環構造が連結している基である場合、他の有機基の種類は特に制限されない。
 また、有機基のいずれも繰り返し単位中の主鎖に直接環構造が連結している基ではない場合、有機基の少なくとも2つ以上は、水素原子を除く構成原子の数が3つ以上である置換基である。
In the formula (B), R b1 to R b4 independently represent a hydrogen atom or an organic group, and at least two or more of R b1 to R b4 represent an organic group.
Further, when at least one of the organic groups is a group in which the ring structure is directly linked to the main chain in the repeating unit, the types of other organic groups are not particularly limited.
Further, when none of the organic groups is a group in which the ring structure is directly linked to the main chain in the repeating unit, at least two or more organic groups have three or more constituent atoms excluding hydrogen atoms. It is a substituent.
 式(B)で表される繰り返し単位としては、例えば、下記繰り返し単位が挙げられる。 Examples of the repeating unit represented by the formula (B) include the following repeating units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
 上記式中、Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は有機基を表す。有機基としては、例えば、置換基を有してもよい、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、及び、アルケニル基、等の有機基が挙げられる。
 R’は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、アルケニル基、水酸基、アルコキシ基、アシロキシ基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アミノ基、ハロゲン原子、エステル基(-OCOR’’又は-COOR’’:R’’は炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素化アルキル基)、又は、カルボン酸基を表す。なお、上記アルキル基、上記シクロアルキル基、上記アリール基、上記アラルキル基、及び、上記アルケニル基は、それぞれ、置換基を有してもよい。また、R’で表される基中の炭素原子に結合している水素原子は、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子で置換されていてもよい。
 mは0以上の整数を表す。mの上限は特に制限されないが、2以下の場合が多く、1以下の場合がより多い。
In the above formula, R independently represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group. Examples of the organic group include organic groups such as an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, and an alkenyl group, which may have a substituent.
R'is independently an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, and an ester group (-OCOR'. 'Or-COOR'': R'' represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a fluorinated alkyl group) or a carboxylic acid group. The alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent. Further, the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by R'may be replaced with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
m represents an integer of 0 or more. The upper limit of m is not particularly limited, but it is often 2 or less, and more often 1 or less.
 上記(c)の具体的な達成手段としては、例えば、樹脂(A)に式(C)で表される繰り返し単位を導入する方法が挙げられる。 As a specific means of achieving the above (c), for example, a method of introducing a repeating unit represented by the formula (C) into the resin (A) can be mentioned.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
 式(C)中、Rc1~Rc4は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は有機基を表し、Rc1~Rc4のうち少なくとも1つが、主鎖炭素から原子数3以内に水素結合性の水素原子を有する基である。中でも、樹脂(A)の主鎖間の相互作用を誘発するうえで、原子数2以内(より主鎖近傍側)に水素結合性の水素原子を有するのが好ましい。 In the formula (C), R c1 to R c4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an organic group, and at least one of R c1 to R c4 is a hydrogen-bonding hydrogen within 3 atoms from the main chain carbon. It is a group having an atom. Above all, in order to induce the interaction between the main chains of the resin (A), it is preferable to have hydrogen-bonding hydrogen atoms within 2 atoms (closer to the main chain).
 式(C)で表される繰り返し単位としては、例えば、下記繰り返し単位が挙げられる。 Examples of the repeating unit represented by the formula (C) include the following repeating units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
 上記式中、Rは有機基を表す。有機基としては、例えば、置換基を有してもよい、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、アルケニル基、及び、エステル基(-OCOR又は-COOR:Rは炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素化アルキル基)等が挙げられる。
 R’は、水素原子又は有機基を表す。有機基としては、例えば、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、及び、アルケニル基、等の有機基が挙げられる。なお、有機基中の水素原子は、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子で置換されていてもよい。
In the above formula, R represents an organic group. Examples of the organic group include an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group, and an ester group (-OCOR or -COOR: R has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, which may have a substituent). Alkyl group or fluorinated alkyl group) and the like.
R'represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group. Examples of the organic group include an organic group such as an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, and an alkenyl group. The hydrogen atom in the organic group may be replaced with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
 上記(d)の具体的な達成手段としては、例えば、樹脂(A)に式(D)で表される繰り返し単位を導入する方法が挙げられる。
 樹脂(A)が式(D)で表される繰り返し単位を含む場合、その含有量は、樹脂(A)の全繰り返し単位に対して、1~50モル%が好ましく、3~40モル%がより好ましく、5~30モル%が更に好ましい。
As a specific means for achieving the above (d), for example, a method of introducing a repeating unit represented by the formula (D) into the resin (A) can be mentioned.
When the resin (A) contains a repeating unit represented by the formula (D), the content thereof is preferably 1 to 50 mol%, preferably 3 to 40 mol%, based on all the repeating units of the resin (A). More preferably, 5 to 30 mol% is further preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
 式(D)中、「cyclic」は、環状構造で主鎖を形成している基を表す。環の構成原子数は特に制限されない。 In the formula (D), "cyclic" represents a group forming a main chain with a cyclic structure. The number of constituent atoms of the ring is not particularly limited.
 式(D)で表される繰り返し単位としては、例えば、下記繰り返し単位が挙げられる。 Examples of the repeating unit represented by the formula (D) include the following repeating units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
 上記式中、Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、アルケニル基、水酸基、アルコキシ基、アシロキシ基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アミノ基、ハロゲン原子、エステル基(-OCOR’’又は-COOR’’:R’’は炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素化アルキル基)、又は、カルボン酸基を表す。なお、上記アルキル基、上記シクロアルキル基、上記アリール基、上記アラルキル基、及び、上記アルケニル基は、それぞれ、置換基を有してもよい。また、Rで表される基中の炭素原子に結合している水素原子は、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子で置換されていてもよい。
 上記式中、R’は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、アルケニル基、水酸基、アルコキシ基、アシロキシ基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アミノ基、ハロゲン原子、エステル基(-OCOR’’又は-COOR’’:R’’は炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素化アルキル基)、又は、カルボン酸基を表す。なお、上記アルキル基、上記シクロアルキル基、上記アリール基、上記アラルキル基、及び、上記アルケニル基は、それぞれ、置換基を有してもよい。また、R’で表される基中の炭素原子に結合している水素原子は、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子で置換されていてもよい。
 mは0以上の整数を表す。mの上限は特に制限されないが、2以下の場合が多く、1以下の場合がより多い。
In the above formula, R is independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, respectively. An ester group (-OCOR "or -COOR": R "is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a fluorinated alkyl group) or a carboxylic acid group. The alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent. Further, the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by R may be substituted with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
In the above formula, R'is independently an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom and an ester group. (-OCOR "or -COOR": R "is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a fluorinated alkyl group) or a carboxylic acid group. The alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent. Further, the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by R'may be replaced with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
m represents an integer of 0 or more. The upper limit of m is not particularly limited, but it is often 2 or less, and more often 1 or less.
 上記(e)の具体的な達成手段としては、例えば、樹脂(A)に式(E)で表される繰り返し単位を導入する方法が挙げられる。
 樹脂(A)が式(E)で表される繰り返し単位を含む場合、その含有量は、樹脂(A)の全繰り返し単位に対して、1~50モル%が好ましく、3~40モル%がより好ましく、5~30モル%が更に好ましい。
As a specific means for achieving the above (e), for example, a method of introducing a repeating unit represented by the formula (E) into the resin (A) can be mentioned.
When the resin (A) contains a repeating unit represented by the formula (E), the content thereof is preferably 1 to 50 mol%, preferably 3 to 40 mol%, based on all the repeating units of the resin (A). More preferably, 5 to 30 mol% is further preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
 式(E)中、Reは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は有機基を表す。有機基としては、例えば、置換基を有してもよい、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、及び、アルケニル基等が挙げられる。
 「cyclic」は、主鎖の炭素原子を含む環状基である。環状基に含まれる原子数は特に制限されない。
In formula (E), Re independently represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group. Examples of the organic group include an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkenyl group and the like, which may have a substituent.
"Cyclic" is a cyclic group containing a carbon atom in the main chain. The number of atoms contained in the cyclic group is not particularly limited.
 式(E)で表される繰り返し単位としては、例えば、下記繰り返し単位が挙げられる。 Examples of the repeating unit represented by the formula (E) include the following repeating units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
 上記式中、Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、及び、アルケニル基、水酸基、アルコキシ基、アシロキシ基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アミノ基、ハロゲン原子、エステル基(-OCOR’’又は-COOR’’:R’’は炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素化アルキル基)、又は、カルボン酸基を表す。なお、上記アルキル基、上記シクロアルキル基、上記アリール基、上記アラルキル基、及び、上記アルケニル基は、それぞれ、置換基を有してもよい。また、Rで表される基中の炭素原子に結合している水素原子は、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子で置換されていてもよい。
 R’は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、及び、アルケニル基、水酸基、アルコキシ基、アシロキシ基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アミノ基、ハロゲン原子、エステル基(-OCOR’’又は-COOR’’:R’’は炭素数1~20のアルキル基又はフッ素化アルキル基)、又は、カルボン酸基を表す。なお、上記アルキル基、上記シクロアルキル基、上記アリール基、上記アラルキル基、及び、上記アルケニル基は、それぞれ、置換基を有してもよい。また、R’で表される基中の炭素原子に結合している水素原子は、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子で置換されていてもよい。
 mは0以上の整数を表す。mの上限は特に制限されないが、2以下の場合が多く、1以下の場合がより多い。
 また、式(E-2)、式(E-4)、式(E-6)、及び、式(E-8)中、2つRは互いに結合して環を形成していてもよい。
In the above formula, R is independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, and an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, and a halogen. It represents an atom, an ester group (-OCOR "or -COOR": R "is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a fluorinated alkyl group), or a carboxylic acid group. The alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent. Further, the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by R may be substituted with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
R'is independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, and an alkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, and an ester. A group (-OCOR "or -COOR": R "is an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or a fluorinated alkyl group) or a carboxylic acid group. The alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, the aryl group, the aralkyl group, and the alkenyl group may each have a substituent. Further, the hydrogen atom bonded to the carbon atom in the group represented by R'may be replaced with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
m represents an integer of 0 or more. The upper limit of m is not particularly limited, but it is often 2 or less, and more often 1 or less.
Further, in the formula (E-2), the formula (E-4), the formula (E-6), and the formula (E-8), the two Rs may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
 レジスト組成物において、樹脂(A)の含有量は、全固形分中、50~99.9質量%が好ましく、60~99.0質量%がより好ましい。
 また、樹脂(A)は、1種で使用してもよいし、2種以上使用してもよい。
In the resist composition, the content of the resin (A) is preferably 50 to 99.9% by mass, more preferably 60 to 99.0% by mass, based on the total solid content.
Further, the resin (A) may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
<(B)活性光線又は放射線の照射により酸を発生する化合物>
 レジスト組成物は、活性光線又は放射線の照射により酸を発生する化合物(光酸発生剤)を含んでいてもよい。光酸発生剤は、露光(好ましくはEUV光の露光)により酸を発生する化合物である。
 光酸発生剤は、低分子化合物の形態であってもよく、重合体の一部に組み込まれた形態であってもよい。また、低分子化合物の形態と重合体の一部に組み込まれた形態を併用してもよい。
 光酸発生剤が、低分子化合物の形態である場合、分子量は3000以下が好ましく、2000以下がより好ましく、1000以下が更に好ましい。
 光酸発生剤が、重合体の一部に組み込まれた形態である場合、樹脂(A)の一部に組み込まれてもよく、樹脂(A)とは異なる樹脂に組み込まれてもよい。
 本発明において、光酸発生剤が、低分子化合物の形態であるのが好ましい。
 光酸発生剤は特に限定されず、中でも、EUV光の照射により、有機酸を発生する化合物が好ましく、分子中にフッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有する光酸発生剤がより好ましい。
 上記有機酸として、例えば、スルホン酸(脂肪族スルホン酸、芳香族スルホン酸、及び、カンファースルホン酸等)、カルボン酸(脂肪族カルボン酸、芳香族カルボン酸、及び、アラルキルカルボン酸等)、カルボニルスルホニルイミド酸、ビス(アルキルスルホニル)イミド酸、及び、トリス(アルキルスルホニル)メチド酸等が挙げられる。
<(B) Compound that generates acid by irradiation with active light or radiation>
The resist composition may contain a compound (photoacid generator) that generates an acid by irradiation with active light or radiation. The photoacid generator is a compound that generates an acid upon exposure (preferably exposure to EUV light).
The photoacid generator may be in the form of a low molecular weight compound or may be incorporated in a part of the polymer. Further, the form of the low molecular weight compound and the form incorporated in a part of the polymer may be used in combination.
When the photoacid generator is in the form of a low molecular weight compound, the molecular weight is preferably 3000 or less, more preferably 2000 or less, still more preferably 1000 or less.
When the photoacid generator is in the form of being incorporated in a part of the polymer, it may be incorporated in a part of the resin (A) or may be incorporated in a resin different from the resin (A).
In the present invention, the photoacid generator is preferably in the form of a low molecular weight compound.
The photoacid generator is not particularly limited, and among them, a compound that generates an organic acid by irradiation with EUV light is preferable, and a photoacid generator having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom in the molecule is more preferable.
Examples of the organic acid include sulfonic acid (aliphatic sulfonic acid, aromatic sulfonic acid, camphor sulfonic acid, etc.), carboxylic acid (aliphatic carboxylic acid, aromatic carboxylic acid, aralkylcarboxylic acid, etc.), carbonyl. Examples thereof include sulfonylimide acid, bis (alkylsulfonyl) imide acid, and tris (alkylsulfonyl) methidoic acid.
 光酸発生剤より発生する酸の体積は特に制限されないが、露光で発生した酸の非露光部への拡散を抑制し、解像性を良好にする点から、240Å以上が好ましく、305Å以上がより好ましく、350Å以上が更に好ましく、400Å以上が特に好ましい。
なお、感度又は塗布溶剤への溶解性の点から、光酸発生剤より発生する酸の体積は、1500Å以下が好ましく、1000Å以下がより好ましく、700Å以下が更に好ましい。
 上記体積の値は、富士通株式会社製の「WinMOPAC」を用いて求める。上記体積の値の計算にあたっては、まず、各例に係る酸の化学構造を入力し、次に、この構造を初期構造としてMM(Molecular Mechanics)3法を用いた分子力場計算により、各酸の最安定立体配座を決定し、その後、これら最安定立体配座についてPM(Parameterized Model number)3法を用いた分子軌道計算を行って、各酸の「accessible volume」を計算できる。
Although the volume of the acid generated from the photoacid generator is not particularly limited, and suppress the diffusion of the non-exposed portion of the acid generated by exposure, from the viewpoint of improving the resolution, 240 Å 3 or more are preferred, 305A 3 The above is more preferable, 350 Å 3 or more is further preferable, and 400 Å 3 or more is particularly preferable.
Incidentally, from the viewpoint of solubility in sensitivity or coating solvent, the volume of the acid generated by the photoacid generator is preferably 1500 Å 3 or less, more preferably 1000 Å 3 or less, 700 Å 3 or less is more preferable.
The value of the volume is obtained by using "WinMOPAC" manufactured by Fujitsu Limited. In calculating the volume value, first, the chemical structure of the acid according to each example is input, and then each acid is calculated by the molecular force field using the MM (Molecular Mechanics) 3 method with this structure as the initial structure. The most stable conformation of each acid can be determined, and then the molecular orbital calculation using the PM (Parameterized Model number) 3 method can be performed on these most stable conformations to calculate the "accessible volume" of each acid.
 光酸発生剤より発生する酸の構造は特に制限されないが、酸の拡散を抑制し、解像性を良好にする点で、光酸発生剤より発生する酸と樹脂(A)との間の相互作用が強いのが好ましい。この点から、光酸発生剤より発生する酸が有機酸である場合、例えば、スルホン酸基、カルボン酸基、カルボニルスルホニルイミド酸基、ビススルホニルイミド酸基、及び、トリススルホニルメチド酸基等の有機酸基、以外に、更に極性基を有するのが好ましい。
 極性基としては、例えば、エーテル基、エステル基、アミド基、アシル基、スルホ基、スルホニルオキシ基、スルホンアミド基、チオエーテル基、チオエステル基、ウレア基、カーボネート基、カーバメート基、水酸基、及び、メルカプト基が挙げられる。
 発生する酸が有する極性基の数は特に制限されず、1個以上であるのが好ましく、2個以上であるのがより好ましい。ただし、過剰な現像を抑制する点から、極性基の数は、6個未満であるのが好ましく、4個未満であるのがより好ましい。
The structure of the acid generated by the photoacid generator is not particularly limited, but the acid generated by the photoacid generator and the resin (A) are in that the diffusion of the acid is suppressed and the resolution is improved. It is preferable that the interaction is strong. From this point, when the acid generated by the photoacid generator is an organic acid, for example, a sulfonic acid group, a carboxylic acid group, a carbonylsulfonylimide acid group, a bissulfonylimide acid group, a trissulfonylmethidoic acid group, etc. It is preferable to have a polar group in addition to the organic acid group of.
Examples of the polar group include an ether group, an ester group, an amide group, an acyl group, a sulfo group, a sulfonyloxy group, a sulfonamide group, a thioether group, a thioester group, a urea group, a carbonate group, a carbamate group, a hydroxyl group, and a mercapto. The group is mentioned.
The number of polar groups contained in the generated acid is not particularly limited, and is preferably 1 or more, and more preferably 2 or more. However, from the viewpoint of suppressing excessive development, the number of polar groups is preferably less than 6, and more preferably less than 4.
 光酸発生剤は、以下に例示する酸を発生する光酸発生剤が好ましい。なお、例の一部には、体積の計算値を付記している(単位Å)。 The photoacid generator is preferably a photoacid generator that generates the acids exemplified below. In addition, the calculated value of the volume is added to a part of the example (unit: Å 3 ).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
 本発明の効果がより優れる点で、光酸発生剤は、アニオン及びカチオンを有する光酸発生剤であるのが好ましい。 The photoacid generator is preferably a photoacid generator having anions and cations because the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
(一般式(PA-1)で表される化合物)
 光酸発生剤は、一般式(PA-1)で表される化合物を含むのが好ましい。
(Compound represented by the general formula (PA-1))
The photoacid generator preferably contains a compound represented by the general formula (PA-1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
 一般式(PA-1)中、A及びAは、それぞれ独立に、-SO-R、又は、-CO-Rを表す。Rは、有機基を表す。
 一般式(PA-1)中に2つ存在するRは同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 一般式(PA-1)中に2つ存在するRの炭素数は、それぞれ独立に、1~25が好ましく、1~15がより好ましい。
 一般式(PA-1)中に2つ存在するRの水素原子を除く原子の数は、それぞれ独立に、2~30が好ましく、4~20がより好ましい。
 Rは、一般式(RF)で表される基が好ましい。
  -LRF-RRF    (RF)
In formula (PA-1), A 1 and A 2 are each independently, -SO 2 -R P, or represents -CO-R P. R P represents an organic group.
R P present two in the general formula (PA-1) may be the same or different.
Formula number of carbon atoms in R P present two to (PA-1) in each independently, preferably 1 to 25, more preferably from 1 to 15.
The number of the general formula (PA-1) atoms excluding two hydrogen atoms of the present R P during each independently 2 to 30, and more preferably from 4 to 20.
R P is a group represented by the general formula (RF) is preferred.
-L RF- R RF (RF)
 一般式(RF)中、LRFは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 上記2価の連結基としては、例えば、-COO-、-CONH-、-CO-、-O-、-S-、-SO-、-SO-、アルキレン基(直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。好ましくは炭素数1~6)、シクロアルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数3~15)、アルケニレン基(直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。好ましくは炭素数2~6)、及び、これらの複数を組み合わせた2価の連結基等が挙げられる。
 またこれらの2価の連結基が可能な場合に有し得る置換基は、ハロゲン原子が好ましく、フッ素原子がより好ましい。例えば、上記アルキレン基(複数を組み合わせた2価の連結基に含まれ得るアルキレン基も含む)がパーフルオロアルキレン基になっているのも好ましい。
 上記2価の連結基は、-アルキレン基-COO-又は-アルキレン基-SO-が好ましい。-アルキレン基-COO-及び-アルキレン基-SO-は、アルキレン基がN側に存在するのが好ましい。
In the general formula (RF), LRF represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Examples of the divalent linking group include -COO-, -CONH-, -CO-, -O-, -S-, -SO-, -SO 2- , and an alkylene group (linear or branched chain). It may be preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms), a cycloalkylene group (preferably 3 to 15 carbon atoms), an alkenylene group (may be linear or branched chain, preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms), and these. A divalent linking group obtained by combining a plurality of the above can be mentioned.
Further, as the substituent that can be possessed when these divalent linking groups are possible, a halogen atom is preferable, and a fluorine atom is more preferable. For example, it is also preferable that the alkylene group (including an alkylene group that can be contained in a divalent linking group in which a plurality of them are combined) is a perfluoroalkylene group.
The divalent linking group is preferably -alkylene group-COO- or -alkylene group-SO 2- . -The alkylene group-COO- and the -alkylene group-SO 2- preferably have an alkylene group on the N - side.
 一般式(RF)中、RRFは、シクロアルキル基又はアルキル基を表す。
 RRFがシクロアルキル基である場合、上記シクロアルキル基は単環でも多環でもよい。
 上記シクロアルキル基の炭素数は、3~15が好ましく、5~10がより好ましい。
 上記シクロアルキル基としては、例えば、ノルボルニル基、及び、デカリニル基、アダマンチル基が挙げられる。
 上記シクロアルキル基が有してもよい置換基は、アルキル基(直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。好ましくは炭素数1~5)が好ましい。上記シクロアルキル基はこれ以外の置換基を有さないのも好ましい。
 上記シクロアルキル基の環員原子である炭素原子のうちの1個以上が、カルボニル炭素原子及び/又はヘテロ原子で置き換わっていてもよい。例えば、シクロアルキル基中の、LRFと結合する炭素原子(-CH<)が窒素原子(-N<)で置き換わってもよい。
 RRFがアルキル基である場合、上記アルキル基は、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。
 上記アルキル基の炭素数は1~10が好ましく、1~5がより好ましい。
 上記アルキル基が有してもよい置換基は、シクロアルキル基、フッ素原子、又はシアノ基が好ましい。上記アルキル基はこれら以外の置換基を有さないのも好ましい。
 上記置換基としてのシクロアルキル基の例としては、例えば、RRFがシクロアルキル基である場合において説明したシクロアルキル基が同様に挙げられる。
 上記アルキル基が、上記置換基としてのフッ素原子を有する場合、上記アルキル基は、パーフルオロアルキル基となっていてもよいし、ならなくてもよい。上記アルキル基が、上記置換基としてのフッ素原子を有する場合、上記アルキル基の一部又は全部がパーフルオロメチル基であるのも好ましい。
In the general formula (RF), R RF represents a cycloalkyl group or an alkyl group.
When R RF is a cycloalkyl group, the cycloalkyl group may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
The cycloalkyl group preferably has 3 to 15 carbon atoms, and more preferably 5 to 10 carbon atoms.
Examples of the cycloalkyl group include a norbornyl group, a decalynyl group, and an adamantyl group.
The substituent that the cycloalkyl group may have is preferably an alkyl group (which may be linear or branched, preferably having 1 to 5 carbon atoms). It is also preferable that the cycloalkyl group has no other substituent.
One or more of the carbon atoms which are ring member atoms of the cycloalkyl group may be replaced with carbonyl carbon atoms and / or heteroatoms. For example, the carbon atom (-CH <) bonded to LRF in the cycloalkyl group may be replaced with the nitrogen atom (-N <).
When R RF is an alkyl group, the alkyl group may be linear or branched.
The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
The substituent that the alkyl group may have is preferably a cycloalkyl group, a fluorine atom, or a cyano group. It is also preferable that the alkyl group does not have a substituent other than these.
Examples of the cycloalkyl group as the substituent include, for example, the cycloalkyl group described in the case where R RF is a cycloalkyl group.
When the alkyl group has a fluorine atom as the substituent, the alkyl group may or may not be a perfluoroalkyl group. When the alkyl group has a fluorine atom as the substituent, it is also preferable that a part or all of the alkyl group is a perfluoromethyl group.
 一般式(PA-1)中、「A-N-A」に含まれる二つのRが互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。 In formula (PA-1), - two R P included in "A 1 -N -A 2 'are bonded to each other may form a ring.
 一般式(PA-1)中、Mは、カチオンを表す。
 Mのカチオンは、有機カチオンが好ましい。
 上記有機カチオンは、それぞれ独立に、一般式(ZaI)で表されるカチオン(カチオン(ZaI))又は一般式(ZaII)で表されるカチオン(カチオン(ZaII))が好ましい。
In the general formula (PA-1), M + represents a cation.
The M + cation is preferably an organic cation.
The organic cations are preferably cations represented by the general formula (ZaI) (cations (ZaI)) or cations represented by the general formula (ZaII) (cations (ZaII)) independently of each other.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
 上記一般式(ZaI)において、
 R201、R202、及びR203は、それぞれ独立に、有機基を表す。
 R201、R202、及びR203としての有機基の炭素数は、通常1~30であり、1~20が好ましい。また、R201~R203のうち2つが結合して環構造を形成してもよく、環内に酸素原子、硫黄原子、エステル基、アミド基、又は、カルボニル基を含んでいてもよい。R201~R203の内の2つが結合して形成する基としては、例えば、アルキレン基(例えば、ブチレン基、ペンチレン基)、及び、-CH-CH-O-CH-CH-が挙げられる。
In the above general formula (ZaI)
R 201 , R 202 , and R 203 each independently represent an organic group.
The carbon number of the organic group as R 201 , R 202 , and R 203 is usually 1 to 30, preferably 1 to 20. Further, two of R 201 to R 203 may be bonded to form a ring structure, and the ring may contain an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an ester group, an amide group, or a carbonyl group. The two of the group formed by bonding of the R 201 ~ R 203, for example, an alkylene group (e.g., butylene, pentylene), and, -CH 2 -CH 2 -O-CH 2 -CH 2 - Can be mentioned.
 一般式(ZaI)におけるカチオンとしては、例えば、後述する、カチオン(ZaI-1)、カチオン(ZaI-2)、一般式(ZaI-3b)で表されるカチオン(カチオン(ZaI-3b))、及び、一般式(ZaI-4b)で表されるカチオン(カチオン(ZaI-4b))が挙げられる。 Examples of the cation in the general formula (ZaI) include a cation (ZaI-1), a cation (ZaI-2), and a cation represented by the general formula (ZaI-3b) (cation (ZaI-3b)), which will be described later. In addition, a cation (cation (ZaI-4b)) represented by the general formula (ZaI-4b) can be mentioned.
 まず、カチオン(ZaI-1)について説明する。
 カチオン(ZaI-1)は、上記一般式(ZaI)のR201~R203の少なくとも1つがアリール基である、アリールスルホニウムカチオンである。
 アリールスルホニウムカチオンは、R201~R203の全てがアリール基でもよいし、R201~R203の一部がアリール基であり、残りがアルキル基又はシクロアルキル基であってもよい。
 また、R201~R203のうちの1つがアリール基であり、R201~R203のうちの残りの2つが結合して環構造を形成してもよく、環内に酸素原子、硫黄原子、エステル基、アミド基、又は、カルボニル基を含んでいてもよい。R201~R203のうちの2つが結合して形成する基としては、例えば、1つ以上のメチレン基が酸素原子、硫黄原子、エステル基、アミド基、及び/又はカルボニル基で置換されていてもよいアルキレン基(例えば、ブチレン基、ペンチレン基、又は-CH-CH-O-CH-CH-)が挙げられる。
 アリールスルホニウムカチオンとしては、例えば、トリアリールスルホニウムカチオン、ジアリールアルキルスルホニウムカチオン、アリールジアルキルスルホニウムカチオン、ジアリールシクロアルキルスルホニウムカチオン、及び、アリールジシクロアルキルスルホニウムカチオンが挙げられる。
First, the cation (ZaI-1) will be described.
The cation (ZaI-1) is an aryl sulfonium cation in which at least one of R 201 to R 203 of the above general formula (ZaI) is an aryl group.
As the aryl sulfonium cation, all of R 201 to R 203 may be an aryl group, or a part of R 201 to R 203 may be an aryl group and the rest may be an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group.
Further, one of R 201 to R 203 may be an aryl group, and the remaining two of R 201 to R 203 may be bonded to form a ring structure, and an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom may be formed in the ring. It may contain an ester group, an amide group, or a carbonyl group. As a group formed by bonding two of R 201 to R 203 , for example, one or more methylene groups are substituted with an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an ester group, an amide group, and / or a carbonyl group. also an alkylene group (e.g., butylene group, pentylene group, or -CH 2 -CH 2 -O-CH 2 -CH 2 -) and the like.
Examples of the aryl sulfonium cation include a triaryl sulfonium cation, a diarylalkyl sulfonium cation, an aryl dialkyl sulfonium cation, a diarylcycloalkyl sulfonium cation, and an aryl dicycloalkyl sulfonium cation.
 アリールスルホニウムカチオンに含まれるアリール基は、フェニル基又はナフチル基が好ましく、フェニル基がより好ましい。アリール基は、酸素原子、窒素原子、又は硫黄原子等を有するヘテロ環構造を有するアリール基であってもよい。ヘテロ環構造としては、例えば、ピロール残基、フラン残基、チオフェン残基、インドール残基、ベンゾフラン残基、及び、ベンゾチオフェン残基等が挙げられる。アリールスルホニウムカチオンが2つ以上のアリール基を有する場合に、2つ以上あるアリール基は同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 アリールスルホニウムカチオンが必要に応じて有しているアルキル基又はシクロアルキル基は、炭素数1~15の直鎖状アルキル基、炭素数3~15の分岐鎖状アルキル基、又は、炭素数3~15のシクロアルキル基が好ましく、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、n-ブチル基、sec-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基、及び、シクロヘキシル基等が挙げられる。
The aryl group contained in the arylsulfonium cation is preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group, and more preferably a phenyl group. The aryl group may be an aryl group having a heterocyclic structure having an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom or the like. Examples of the heterocyclic structure include pyrrole residues, furan residues, thiophene residues, indole residues, benzofuran residues, benzothiophene residues and the like. When the aryl sulfonium cation has two or more aryl groups, the two or more aryl groups may be the same or different.
The alkyl group or cycloalkyl group that the arylsulfonium cation has as needed is a linear alkyl group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, a branched alkyl group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms, or a branched alkyl group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms. Fifteen cycloalkyl groups are preferred, and examples thereof include methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, n-butyl group, sec-butyl group, t-butyl group, cyclopropyl group, cyclobutyl group, cyclohexyl group and the like.
 R201~R203のアリール基、アルキル基、及び、シクロアルキル基が有していてもよい置換基は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基(例えば炭素数1~15)、シクロアルキル基(例えば炭素数3~15)、アリール基(例えば炭素数6~14)、アルコキシ基(例えば炭素数1~15)、シクロアルキルアルコキシ基(例えば炭素数1~15)、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、又は、フェニルチオ基が好ましい。
 上記置換基は可能な場合は更に置換基を有していてもよく、例えば、上記アルキル基が置換基としてハロゲン原子を有して、トリフルオロメチル基等のハロゲン化アルキル基となっていてもよい。
The aryl group, alkyl group, and substituent which the cycloalkyl group may have of R 201 to R 203 are independently an alkyl group (for example, 1 to 15 carbon atoms) and a cycloalkyl group (for example, carbon number of carbon atoms). 3 to 15), aryl group (for example, 6 to 14 carbon atoms), alkoxy group (for example, 1 to 15 carbon atoms), cycloalkyl alkoxy group (for example, 1 to 15 carbon atoms), halogen atom, hydroxyl group, or phenylthio group. preferable.
If possible, the substituent may further have a substituent. For example, even if the alkyl group has a halogen atom as a substituent and is an alkyl halide group such as a trifluoromethyl group. Good.
 次に、カチオン(ZaI-2)について説明する。
 カチオン(ZaI-2)は、式(ZaI)におけるR201~R203が、それぞれ独立に、芳香環を有さない有機基を表すカチオンである。ここで芳香環とは、ヘテロ原子を含む芳香族環も包含する。
 R201~R203としての芳香環を有さない有機基は、一般的に炭素数1~30であり、炭素数1~20が好ましい。
 R201~R203は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリル基、又はビニル基が好ましく、直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の2-オキソアルキル基、2-オキソシクロアルキル基、又は、アルコキシカルボニルメチル基がより好ましく、直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の2-オキソアルキル基が更に好ましい。
Next, the cation (ZaI-2) will be described.
The cation (ZaI-2) is a cation in which R 201 to R 203 in the formula (ZaI) independently represent an organic group having no aromatic ring. Here, the aromatic ring also includes an aromatic ring containing a hetero atom.
The organic group having no aromatic ring as R 201 to R 203 generally has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
R 201 to R 203 are each independently preferably an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an allyl group, or a vinyl group, and are linear or branched 2-oxoalkyl groups, 2-oxocycloalkyl groups, or Alkoxycarbonylmethyl groups are more preferred, and linear or branched 2-oxoalkyl groups are even more preferred.
 R201~R203のアルキル基及びシクロアルキル基としては、例えば、炭素数1~10の直鎖状アルキル基又は炭素数3~10の分岐鎖状アルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、及び、ペンチル基)、並びに、炭素数3~10のシクロアルキル基(例えば、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基、及び、ノルボルニル基)が挙げられる。
 R201~R203は、ハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基(例えば炭素数1~5)、水酸基、シアノ基、又は、ニトロ基によって更に置換されていてもよい。
Examples of the alkyl group and cycloalkyl group of R 201 to R 203 include a linear alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or a branched chain alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, and a propyl group). Groups, butyl groups, and pentyl groups), and cycloalkyl groups having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, cyclopentyl groups, cyclohexyl groups, and norbornyl groups).
R 201 to R 203 may be further substituted with a halogen atom, an alkoxy group (for example, 1 to 5 carbon atoms), a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, or a nitro group.
 次に、カチオン(ZaI-3b)について説明する。
 カチオン(ZaI-3b)は、下記一般式(ZaI-3b)で表されるカチオンである。
Next, the cation (ZaI-3b) will be described.
The cation (ZaI-3b) is a cation represented by the following general formula (ZaI-3b).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
 一般式(ZaI-3b)中、
 R1c~R5cは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アルキルカルボニルオキシ基、シクロアルキルカルボニルオキシ基、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、ニトロ基、アルキルチオ基、又は、アリールチオ基を表す。
 R6c及びR7cは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基(t-ブチル基等)、シクロアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、又は、アリール基を表す。
 R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、2-オキソアルキル基、2-オキソシクロアルキル基、アルコキシカルボニルアルキル基、アリル基、又は、ビニル基を表す。
In the general formula (ZaI-3b),
R 1c to R 5c are independently hydrogen atom, alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, alkoxy group, aryloxy group, alkoxycarbonyl group, alkylcarbonyloxy group, cycloalkylcarbonyloxy group, halogen atom, hydroxyl group. , Nitro group, alkylthio group, or arylthio group.
R 6c and R 7c independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (t-butyl group, etc.), a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an aryl group.
R x and R y each independently represent an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a 2-oxoalkyl group, a 2-oxocycloalkyl group, an alkoxycarbonylalkyl group, an allyl group, or a vinyl group.
 R1c~R5c中のいずれか2つ以上、R5cとR6c、R6cとR7c、R5cとR、及びRとRは、それぞれ結合して環を形成してもよく、この環は、それぞれ独立に酸素原子、硫黄原子、ケトン基、エステル結合、又は、アミド結合を含んでいてもよい。
 上記環としては、例えば、芳香族又は非芳香族の炭化水素環、芳香族又は非芳香族のヘテロ環、及びこれらの環が2つ以上組み合わされてなる多環縮合環が挙げられる。環は、3~10員環が挙げられ、4~8員環が好ましく、5又は6員環がより好ましい。
Any two or more of R 1c to R 5c , R 5c and R 6c , R 6c and R 7c , R 5c and R x , and R x and R y may be combined to form a ring, respectively. , This ring may independently contain an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a ketone group, an ester bond, or an amide bond.
Examples of the ring include an aromatic or non-aromatic hydrocarbon ring, an aromatic or non-aromatic heterocycle, and a polycyclic condensed ring formed by combining two or more of these rings. The ring includes a 3- to 10-membered ring, preferably a 4- to 8-membered ring, and more preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring.
 R1c~R5c中のいずれか2つ以上、R6cとR7c、及び、RとRが結合して形成する基としては、例えば、ブチレン基及びペンチレン基等のアルキレン基が挙げられる。このアルキレン基中のメチレン基が酸素原子等のヘテロ原子で置換されていてもよい。
 R5cとR6c、及び、R5cとRが結合して形成する基は、単結合又はアルキレン基が好ましい。アルキレン基としては、例えば、メチレン基及びエチレン基等が挙げられる。
Examples of the group formed by combining any two or more of R 1c to R 5c , R 6c and R 7c , and R x and R y include an alkylene group such as a butylene group and a pentylene group. .. The methylene group in the alkylene group may be substituted with a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom.
The group formed by bonding R 5c and R 6c , and R 5c and R x is preferably a single bond or an alkylene group. Examples of the alkylene group include a methylene group and an ethylene group.
 次に、カチオン(ZaI-4b)について説明する。
 カチオン(ZaI-4b)は、下記一般式(ZaI-4b)で表されるカチオンである。
Next, the cation (ZaI-4b) will be described.
The cation (ZaI-4b) is a cation represented by the following general formula (ZaI-4b).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
 一般式(ZaI-4b)中、
 lは0~2の整数を表す。
 rは0~8の整数を表す。
 R13は、水素原子、フッ素原子、水酸基、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、又は、シクロアルキル基を有する基(シクロアルキル基そのものであってもよく、シクロアルキル基を一部に含む基であってもよい)を表す。これらの基は置換基を有してもよい。
 R14は、水酸基、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アルキルカルボニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、シクロアルキルスルホニル基、又は、シクロアルキル基を有する基(シクロアルキル基そのものであってもよく、シクロアルキル基を一部に含む基であってもよい)を表す。これらの基は置換基を有してもよい。R14は、複数存在する場合はそれぞれ独立して、水酸基等の上記基を表す。
 R15は、それぞれ独立して、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、又は、ナフチル基を表す。これらの基は置換基を有してもよい。2つのR15が互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。2つのR15が互いに結合して環を形成するとき、環骨格内に、酸素原子、又は、窒素原子等のヘテロ原子を含んでもよい。一態様において、2つのR15がアルキレン基であり、互いに結合して環構造を形成するのが好ましい。
In the general formula (ZaI-4b),
l represents an integer of 0 to 2.
r represents an integer from 0 to 8.
R 13 is a group having a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, or a cycloalkyl group (the cycloalkyl group itself may be used, and a group containing a cycloalkyl group as a part). May be). These groups may have substituents.
R 14 is a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkylcarbonyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, a cycloalkylsulfonyl group, or a group having a cycloalkyl group (the cycloalkyl group itself may be a cycloalkyl group). It may be a group containing a group as a part). These groups may have substituents. When a plurality of R 14 are present, each independently represents the above group such as a hydroxyl group.
R 15 independently represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, or a naphthyl group. These groups may have substituents. Bonded to two R 15 each other may form a ring. When two R 15 are combined to form a ring together, in the ring skeleton, an oxygen atom, or may contain a hetero atom such as nitrogen atom. In one embodiment, two R 15 is an alkylene group, preferably bonded together to form a ring structure.
 一般式(ZaI-4b)において、R13、R14、及び、R15のアルキル基は、直鎖状又は分岐鎖状である。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましい。アルキル基は、メチル基、エチル基、n-ブチル基、又は、t-ブチル基等がより好ましい。 In the general formula (ZaI-4b), the alkyl groups of R 13 , R 14 and R 15 are linear or branched chain. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkyl group is more preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-butyl group, a t-butyl group or the like.
 次に、一般式(ZaII)について説明する。
 一般式(ZaII)中、R204及びR205は、それぞれ独立に、アリール基、アルキル基、又は、シクロアルキル基を表す。
 R204及びR205のアリール基は、フェニル基、又は、ナフチル基が好ましく、フェニル基がより好ましい。R204及びR205のアリール基は、酸素原子、窒素原子、又は、硫黄原子等を有するヘテロ環を有するアリール基であってもよい。ヘテロ環を有するアリール基の骨格としては、例えば、ピロール、フラン、チオフェン、インドール、ベンゾフラン、及び、ベンゾチオフェン等が挙げられる。
 R204及びR205のアルキル基及びシクロアルキル基は、炭素数1~10の直鎖状アルキル基又は炭素数3~10の分岐鎖状アルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、又はペンチル基)、又は、炭素数3~10のシクロアルキル基(例えばシクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基、又はノルボルニル基)が好ましい。
Next, the general formula (ZaII) will be described.
In the general formula (ZaII), R 204 and R 205 each independently represent an aryl group, an alkyl group, or a cycloalkyl group.
The aryl group of R 204 and R 205 is preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group, and more preferably a phenyl group. The aryl group of R 204 and R 205 may be an aryl group having a heterocycle having an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom or the like. Examples of the skeleton of the aryl group having a heterocycle include pyrrole, furan, thiophene, indole, benzofuran, and benzothiophene.
The alkyl group and cycloalkyl group of R 204 and R 205 are a linear alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or a branched chain alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, butyl group). A group or a pentyl group), or a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, or a norbornyl group) is preferable.
 R204及びR205のアリール基、アルキル基、及び、シクロアルキル基は、それぞれ独立に、置換基を有していてもよい。R204及びR205のアリール基、アルキル基、及び、シクロアルキル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、例えば、アルキル基(例えば炭素数1~15)、シクロアルキル基(例えば炭素数3~15)、アリール基(例えば炭素数6~15)、アルコキシ基(例えば炭素数1~15)、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、及び、フェニルチオ基等が挙げられる。 The aryl group, alkyl group, and cycloalkyl group of R 204 and R 205 may each independently have a substituent. Examples of the substituents that the aryl group, alkyl group, and cycloalkyl group of R 204 and R 205 may have include an alkyl group (for example, 1 to 15 carbon atoms) and a cycloalkyl group (for example, 3 carbon atoms). -15), aryl groups (for example, 6 to 15 carbon atoms), alkoxy groups (for example, 1 to 15 carbon atoms), halogen atoms, hydroxyl groups, phenylthio groups and the like.
(一般式(PB)で表される化合物)
 光酸発生剤は、一般式(PB)で表される化合物を含むのも好ましい。
 M  A-L-B M     (PB)
(Compound represented by the general formula (PB))
The photoacid generator also preferably contains a compound represented by the general formula (PB).
M 1 + A - - LB M 2 + (PB)
 一般式(PB)で表される化合物は、通常の光酸発生剤に相当する機能を有する構造(「M  A-」に相当する部分)と、酸拡散制御剤に相当する機能を有する構造(「-B M 」に相当する部分)との両方を一分子中に含むため、レジスト膜中で、上記構造のそれぞれの存在比率を一定にできる。
 そのため、レジスト膜が露光された際にも、レジスト膜中で生じる酸の量及び拡散が均一になりやすく、現像後に得られるパターンの幅が安定する、と本発明者らは推測している。
The compound represented by formula (PB), the structure having a function equivalent to an ordinary photoacid generator - and ( "M 1 + A -" portion corresponding to), a function corresponding to the acid diffusion controller structure with - to include both the (part corresponding to "-B M 2 +") in the molecule, a resist film can be constant each occurrence ratio of the structure.
Therefore, the present inventors speculate that even when the resist film is exposed, the amount and diffusion of the acid generated in the resist film tends to be uniform, and the width of the pattern obtained after development is stable.
 一般式(PB)中、M 及びM は、それぞれ独立に、有機カチオンを表す。
 M 及びM の有機カチオンは、それぞれ独立に、一般式(PA-1)のMについての説明の中で挙げた有機カチオンが同様に使用できる。
In formula (PB), M 1 + and M 2 + each independently represents an organic cation.
M 1 + and M 2 + organic cation, each independently, an organic cation listed in the description of the M + of the general formula (PA-1) can be used as well.
 一般式(PB)中、Lは、2価の有機基を表す。
 上記2価の有機基としては、例えば、-COO-、-CONH-、-CO-、アルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数1~6。直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい)、シクロアルキレン基(好ましくは炭素数3~15)、アルケニレン基(好ましくは炭素数2~6)、及び、これらの複数を組み合わせた2価の連結基等が挙げられる。
 上記シクロアルキレン基のシクロアルカン環を構成するメチレン基の1個以上が、カルボニル炭素及び/又はヘテロ原子(酸素原子等)で置き換わっていてもよい。
 これらの2価の連結基は、更に、-O-、-S-、-SO-、及び、-SO-からなる群から選択される基を有するのも好ましい。
In the general formula (PB), L represents a divalent organic group.
Examples of the divalent organic group include -COO-, -CONH-, -CO-, an alkylene group (preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, which may be linear or branched), and a cycloalkylene group (preferably. 3 to 15 carbon atoms), an alkenylene group (preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms), and a divalent linking group in which a plurality of these are combined can be mentioned.
One or more of the methylene groups constituting the cycloalkane ring of the cycloalkylene group may be replaced with a carbonyl carbon and / or a hetero atom (oxygen atom or the like).
These divalent linking groups also preferably have a group selected from the group consisting of -O-, -S-, -SO-, and -SO 2- .
 中でも、Lは、下記一般式(L)で表される基であるのが好ましい。
*A-LA-LB-LC-LD-LE-*B    (L)
Above all, L is preferably a group represented by the following general formula (L).
* A-LA-LB-LC-LD-LE- * B (L)
 一般式(L)中、*Aは、一般式(PB)におけるAとの結合位置を表す。
 一般式(L)中、*Bは、一般式(PB)におけるBとの結合位置を表す。
In the general formula (L), * A represents the connection position with A in the general formula (PB).
In the general formula (L), * B represents the connection position with B in the general formula (PB).
 一般式(L)中、LAは、-(C(RLA1)(RLA2))XA-を表す。
 上記XAは、1以上の整数を表し、1~10が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。
 RLA1及びRLA2は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換基を表す。
 RLA1及びRLA2の置換基は、それぞれ独立に、フッ素原子又はフルオロアルキル基が好ましく、フッ素原子又はパーフルオロアルキル基がより好ましく、フッ素原子又はパーフルオロメチル基が更に好ましい。
 XAが2以上の場合、XA個存在するRLA1は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 XAが2以上の場合、XA個存在するRLA2は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 -(C(RLA1)(RLA2))-は、-CH-、-CHF-、-CH(CF)-、又は、-CF-が好ましい。
 中でも、一般式(PB)中のAと直接結合する-(C(RLA1)(RLA2))-は、-CH-、-CHF-、-CH(CF)-、又は、-CF-が好ましい。
 一般式(PB)中のAと直接結合する-(C(RLA1)(RLA2))-以外の-(C(RLA1)(RLA2))-は、それぞれ独立に、-CH-、-CHF-、又は、-CF-が好ましい。
In the general formula (L), LA represents − (C (R LA1 ) (R LA2 )) XA −.
The XA represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably 1 to 10, and more preferably 1 to 3.
R LA1 and R LA2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
The substituents of R LA1 and R LA2 are independently preferably a fluorine atom or a fluoroalkyl group, more preferably a fluorine atom or a perfluoroalkyl group, and further preferably a fluorine atom or a perfluoromethyl group.
When the number of XA is 2 or more, the R LA1 having XA may be the same or different.
When the number of XA is 2 or more, the R LA2 having XA may be the same or different.
-(C (R LA1 ) (R LA2 ))-is preferably -CH 2- , -CHF-, -CH (CF 3 )-, or -CF 2- .
Among them,-(C (R LA1 ) (R LA2 )) - which directly binds to A-in the general formula (PB) is -CH 2- , -CHF-, -CH (CF 3 )-, or-. CF 2 -is preferable.
Formula (PB) in A - and a direct bond to - (C (R LA1) ( R LA2)) - other than the - (C (R LA1) ( R LA2)) - are each independently, -CH 2 -, -CHF-, or -CF 2- is preferable.
 一般式(L)中、LBは、単結合、エステル基(-COO-)、又は、スルホニル基(-SO-)を表す。 In the general formula (L), LB represents a single bond, an ester group (-COO-), or a sulfonyl group (-SO 2- ).
 一般式(L)中、LCは、単結合、アルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、又は、これらを組み合わせてなる基(「-アルキレン基-シクロアルキレン基-」等)を表す。
 上記アルキレン基は、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。
 上記アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~5が好ましく、1~2がより好ましく、1が更に好ましい。
 上記シクロアルキレン基の炭素数は、3~15が好ましく、5~10がより好ましい。
 上記シクロアルキレン基は単環でも多環でもよい。
 上記シクロアルキレン基としては、例えば、ノルボルナンジイル基、及びアダマンタンジイル基が挙げられる。
 上記シクロアルキレン基が有してもよい置換基は、アルキル基(直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。好ましくは炭素数1~5)が好ましい。
 上記シクロアルキレン基のシクロアルカン環を構成するメチレン基の1個以上が、カルボニル炭素及び/又はヘテロ原子(酸素原子等)で置き換わっていてもよい。
 LCが、「-アルキレン基-シクロアルキレン基-」の場合、アルキレン基部分は、LB側に存在するのが好ましい。
 LBが単結合の場合、LCは、単結合又はシクロアルキレン基が好ましい。
In the general formula (L), LC represents a single bond, an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, or a group formed by combining these ("-alkylene group-cycloalkylene group-" or the like).
The alkylene group may be linear or branched.
The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 5 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 2 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 1.
The cycloalkylene group preferably has 3 to 15 carbon atoms, and more preferably 5 to 10 carbon atoms.
The cycloalkylene group may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
Examples of the cycloalkylene group include a norbornanediyl group and an adamantandiyl group.
The substituent that the cycloalkylene group may have is preferably an alkyl group (either linear or branched chain, preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms).
One or more of the methylene groups constituting the cycloalkane ring of the cycloalkylene group may be replaced with a carbonyl carbon and / or a hetero atom (oxygen atom or the like).
When the LC is "-alkylene group-cycloalkylene group-", the alkylene group portion is preferably present on the LB side.
When the LB is a single bond, the LC is preferably a single bond or a cycloalkylene group.
 一般式(L)中、LDは、単結合、エーテル基(-O-)、カルボニル基(-CO-)、又はエステル基(-COO-)を表す。 In the general formula (L), LD represents a single bond, an ether group (-O-), a carbonyl group (-CO-), or an ester group (-COO-).
 一般式(L)中、LEは、単結合又は-(C(RLE1)(RLE2))XE-を表す。
 上記-(C(RLE1)(RLE2))XE-におけるXEは、1以上の整数を表し、1~10が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。
 RLE1及びRLE2は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換基を表す。
 XEが2以上の場合、XE個存在するRLE1は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 XEが2以上の場合、XE個存在するRLE2は、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 中でも、-(C(RLE1)(RLE2))-は、-CH-が好ましい。
 一般式(L)中、LB、LC、及びLDが単結合の場合、LEも単結合であるのが好ましい。
In the general formula (L), LE is a single bond or - (C (R LE1) ( R LE2)) XE - represents a.
XE in the above-(C (R LE1 ) (R LE2 )) XE- represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably 1 to 10, and more preferably 1 to 3.
R LE1 and R LE2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
When the number of XEs is 2 or more, the R LE1s having XEs may be the same or different.
When the number of XEs is 2 or more, the R LE2s having XEs may be the same or different.
Among them, -(C (R LE1 ) (R LE2 ))-is preferably -CH 2- .
In the general formula (L), when LB, LC, and LD are single bonds, it is preferable that LE is also a single bond.
 一般式(PB)中、Aは、酸アニオン基を表す。
 酸アニオン基は、アニオン原子を有する基である。
 A-は、具体的には、一般式(A-1)~(A-2)のいずれかで表される基であるのが好ましい。
In the general formula (PB), A represents an acid anion group.
An acid anion group is a group having an anion atom.
Specifically, A- is preferably a group represented by any of the general formulas (A-1) to (A-2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
 一般式(A-1)~(A-2)中、*は、結合位置を表す。
 一般式(A-2)中、Rは、有機基を表す。
 Rは、アルキル基が好ましい。
 上記アルキル基は、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。
 上記アルキル基の炭素数は1~10が好ましく、1~5がより好ましい。
 上記アルキル基が有してもよい置換基は、フッ素原子が好ましい。
 置換基としてフッ素原子を有する上記アルキル基は、パーフルオロアルキル基となっていてもよいし、ならなくてもよい。
In the general formulas (A-1) to (A-2), * represents a bonding position.
In the general formula (A-2), RA represents an organic group.
The RA is preferably an alkyl group.
The alkyl group may be linear or branched.
The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
The substituent that the alkyl group may have is preferably a fluorine atom.
The alkyl group having a fluorine atom as a substituent may or may not be a perfluoroalkyl group.
 一般式(PB)中、Bは、一般式(B-1)~(B-4)のいずれかで表される基を表す。
 Bは、一般式(B-1)~(B-3)のいずれかで表される基が好ましく、一般式(B-1)~(B-2)のいずれかで表される基がより好ましい。
In the general formula (PB), B represents a group represented by any of the general formulas (B-1) to (B-4).
B is preferably a group represented by any of the general formulas (B-1) to (B-3), and a group represented by any of the general formulas (B-1) to (B-2) is preferable. More preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
 一般式(B-1)~(B-4)中、*は、結合位置を表す。
 一般式(B-1)~(B-4)中、Rは、有機基を表す。
 Rは、シクロアルキル基又はアルキル基が好ましい。
 Rがシクロアルキル基である場合、上記シクロアルキル基の炭素数は、3~15が好ましく、5~10がより好ましい。
 上記シクロアルキル基は単環でも多環でもよい。
 上記シクロアルキル基としては、例えば、ノルボルニル基、及び、アダマンチル基が挙げられる。
 上記シクロアルキル基が有してもよい置換基は、アルキル基(直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。好ましくは炭素数1~5)が好ましい。
 上記シクロアルキル基の環員原子である炭素原子のうちの1個以上が、カルボニル炭素原子で置き換わっていてもよい。
 Rがアルキル基である場合、上記アルキル基は、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよい。
 上記アルキル基の炭素数は1~10が好ましく、1~5がより好ましい。
 上記アルキル基が有してもよい置換基は、シクロアルキル基、フッ素原子、又は、シアノ基が好ましい。
 上記置換基としてのシクロアルキル基の例としては、Rがシクロアルキル基である場合において説明したシクロアルキル基が同様に挙げられる。
 上記アルキル基が、上記置換基としてのフッ素原子を有する場合、上記アルキル基は、パーフルオロアルキル基となっていてもよいし、ならなくてもよい。上記アルキル基が、上記置換基としてのフッ素原子を有する場合、上記アルキル基の一部又は全部がパーフルオロメチル基であるのも好ましい。
In the general formulas (B-1) to (B-4), * represents a bonding position.
In the general formula (B-1) ~ (B -4), R B represents an organic group.
R B is a cycloalkyl group or an alkyl group.
If R B is a cycloalkyl group, the carbon number of the cycloalkyl group is preferably 3 to 15, and more preferably 5-10.
The cycloalkyl group may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
Examples of the cycloalkyl group include a norbornyl group and an adamantyl group.
The substituent that the cycloalkyl group may have is preferably an alkyl group (which may be linear or branched, preferably having 1 to 5 carbon atoms).
One or more of the carbon atoms which are ring member atoms of the cycloalkyl group may be replaced with carbonyl carbon atoms.
If R B is an alkyl group, the alkyl group may be either linear or branched.
The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
The substituent that the alkyl group may have is preferably a cycloalkyl group, a fluorine atom, or a cyano group.
Examples of the cycloalkyl group as the substituent, R B is a cycloalkyl group as described in the case a cycloalkyl group as well.
When the alkyl group has a fluorine atom as the substituent, the alkyl group may or may not be a perfluoroalkyl group. When the alkyl group has a fluorine atom as the substituent, it is also preferable that a part or all of the alkyl group is a perfluoromethyl group.
 一般式(PB)で表される化合物のM 及びM がそれぞれ水素原子で置換されたHA-L-BHで表される化合物において、HAで表される基のpKaは、BHで表される基のpKaよりも低い。
 より具体的には、HA-L-BHで表される化合物について酸解離定数を求めた場合において、「HA-L-BH」が「A-L-BH」となる際のpKaを「HAで表される基のpKa」とし、更に、「A-L-BH」が「A-L-B」となる際のpKaを「BHで表される基のpKa」とする。
 「HAで表される基のpKa」及び「BHで表される基のpKa」は、それぞれ、「ソフトウェアパッケージ1」又は「Gaussian16」を用いて求める。
 中でも、HAで表される基のpKaは、-12.00~1.00が好ましく、-7.00~0.50がより好ましく、-5.00~0.00が更に好ましい。
 HBで表される基のpKaは、-4.00~14.00が好ましく、-2.00~12.00がより好ましく、-1.00~5.00が更に好ましい。
 HBで表される基のpKaとHAで表される基のpKaとの差(「HBで表される基のpKa」-「HAで表される基のpKa」)は、0.10~20.00が好ましく、0.50~17.00がより好ましく、2.00~15.00が更に好ましい。
In the compound represented by HA-L-BH in which M 1 + and M 2 + of the compound represented by the general formula (PB) are respectively substituted with hydrogen atoms, the pKa of the group represented by HA is BH. It is lower than the pKa of the represented group.
More specifically, HA-L-BH when obtained an acid dissociation constant for the compound represented by the "HA-L-BH" is - a pKa at which the "A -L-BH""HA and in the pKa of a group represented by "further" a - a pKa of the group represented by "BH a pKa at which the '" - -L-BH "is" a - -L-B.
"PKa of the group represented by HA" and "pKa of the group represented by BH" are obtained by using "Software Package 1" or "Gaussian 16", respectively.
Among them, the pKa of the group represented by HA is preferably -12.00 to 1.00, more preferably -7.00 to 0.50, and even more preferably -5.00 to 0.00.
The pKa of the group represented by HB is preferably -4.00 to 14.00, more preferably -2.00 to 12.00, and even more preferably -1.00 to 5.00.
The difference between the pKa of the group represented by HB and the pKa of the group represented by HA (“pKa of the group represented by HB”-“pKa of the group represented by HA”) is 0.10 to 20. It is preferably .00, more preferably 0.50 to 17.00, and even more preferably 2.00 to 15.00.
(その他の光酸発生剤)
 レジスト組成物は、上述した以外のその他の光酸発生剤を使用してもよい。
 その他の光酸発生剤としては、例えば、「M Z(Mはカチオンを表しZはアニオンを表す)」で表される化合物(オニウム塩)が挙げられる。
(Other photoacid generators)
As the resist composition, other photoacid generators other than those described above may be used.
Other photoacid generators, for example, "M + Z - (M + represents a cation and Z - represents an anion)" include compounds represented by (onium salt).
 「M Z」で表される化合物において、Mは、カチオンを表し、一般式(PA-1)におけるカチオンと同様のカチオンが挙げられる。
 「M Z」で表される化合物において、Zは、アニオンを表し、求核反応を起こす能力が著しく低いアニオンが好ましい。
 上記アニオンとしては、例えば、スルホン酸アニオン(フルオロアルキルスルホン酸アニオン等の脂肪族スルホン酸アニオン、芳香族スルホン酸アニオン、及び、カンファースルホン酸アニオン等)、カルボン酸アニオン(脂肪族カルボン酸アニオン、芳香族カルボン酸アニオン、及び、アラルキルカルボン酸アニオン等)、及び、トリス(アルキルスルホニル)メチドアニオンが挙げられる。
"M + Z -" in a compound represented by, M + represents a cation, include the same cations as the cation in formula (PA-1).
In the compounds represented by, Z - "M + Z" - represents an anion, the ability of causing a nucleophilic reaction is extremely low anion preferred.
Examples of the anion include sulfonic acid anion (aliphatic sulfonic acid anion such as fluoroalkyl sulfonic acid anion, aromatic sulfonic acid anion, camphor sulfonic acid anion, etc.) and carboxylic acid anion (aliphatic carboxylic acid anion, aromatic). Group carboxylic acid anions, aralkyl carboxylic acid anions, etc.), and tris (alkylsulfonyl) methide anions.
 脂肪族スルホン酸アニオン及び脂肪族カルボン酸アニオンにおける脂肪族部位は、アルキル基であってもシクロアルキル基であってもよく、炭素数1~30の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基、及び、炭素数3~30のシクロアルキル基が好ましい。 The aliphatic moiety in the aliphatic sulfonic acid anion and the aliphatic carboxylic acid anion may be an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group, and may be a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. , A cycloalkyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms is preferable.
 芳香族スルホン酸アニオン及び芳香族カルボン酸アニオンにおける芳香環基は、炭素数6~14のアリール基が好ましく、例えば、フェニル基、トリル基、及び、ナフチル基が挙げられる。 The aromatic ring group in the aromatic sulfonic acid anion and the aromatic carboxylic acid anion is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a phenyl group, a tolyl group, and a naphthyl group.
 上記で挙げたアルキル基、シクロアルキル基、及び、アリール基が有し得る置換基としては、例えば、ニトロ基、フッ素原子等のハロゲン原子、カルボン酸基、水酸基、アミノ基、シアノ基、アルコキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~15)、シクロアルキル基(好ましくは炭素数3~15)、アリール基(好ましくは炭素数6~14)、アルコキシカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~7)、アシル基(好ましくは炭素数2~12)、アルコキシカルボニルオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数2~7)、アルキルチオ基(好ましくは炭素数1~15)、アルキルスルホニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~15)、アルキルイミノスルホニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~15)、アリールオキシスルホニル基(好ましくは炭素数6~20)、アルキルアリールオキシスルホニル基(好ましくは炭素数7~20)、シクロアルキルアリールオキシスルホニル基(好ましくは炭素数10~20)、アルキルオキシアルキルオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数5~20)、及び、シクロアルキルアルキルオキシアルキルオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数8~20)が挙げられる。 Examples of the substituents that the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, and aryl group mentioned above can have include halogen atoms such as nitro group and fluorine atom, carboxylic acid group, hydroxyl group, amino group, cyano group, and alkoxy group. (Preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms), cycloalkyl group (preferably 3 to 15 carbon atoms), aryl group (preferably 6 to 14 carbon atoms), alkoxycarbonyl group (preferably 2 to 7 carbon atoms), acyl group (Preferably 2 to 12 carbon atoms), alkoxycarbonyloxy group (preferably 2 to 7 carbon atoms), alkylthio group (preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms), alkylsulfonyl group (preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms), alkyl Iminosulfonyl group (preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms), aryloxysulfonyl group (preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms), alkylaryloxysulfonyl group (preferably 7 to 20 carbon atoms), cycloalkylaryloxysulfonyl group (preferably 7 to 20 carbon atoms) 10 to 20 carbon atoms), an alkyloxyalkyloxy group (preferably 5 to 20 carbon atoms), and a cycloalkylalkyloxyalkyloxy group (preferably 8 to 20 carbon atoms).
 アラルキルカルボン酸アニオンにおけるアラルキル基は、炭素数7~12のアラルキル基が好ましく、例えば、ベンジル基、フェネチル基、ナフチルメチル基、ナフチルエチル基、及び、ナフチルブチル基が挙げられる。 The aralkyl group in the aralkyl carboxylic acid anion is preferably an aralkyl group having 7 to 12 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a benzyl group, a phenethyl group, a naphthylmethyl group, a naphthylethyl group, and a naphthylbutyl group.
 トリス(アルキルスルホニル)メチドアニオンにおけるアルキル基は、炭素数1~5のアルキル基が好ましい。これらのアルキル基の置換基としては、例えば、ハロゲン原子、ハロゲン原子で置換されたアルキル基、アルコキシ基、アルキルチオ基、アルキルオキシスルホニル基、アリールオキシスルホニル基、及び、シクロアルキルアリールオキシスルホニル基が挙げられ、フッ素原子又はフッ素原子で置換されたアルキル基が好ましい。 The alkyl group in the tris (alkylsulfonyl) methideanion is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. Examples of the substituent of these alkyl groups include a halogen atom, an alkyl group substituted with a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, an alkylthio group, an alkyloxysulfonyl group, an aryloxysulfonyl group, and a cycloalkylaryloxysulfonyl group. The alkyl group is preferably a fluorine atom or an alkyl group substituted with a fluorine atom.
 その他の非求核性アニオンとしては、例えば、フッ素化燐(例えば、PF )、フッ素化ホウ素(例えば、BF )、及び、フッ素化アンチモン(例えば、SbF )が挙げられる。 As other non-nucleophilic anions, e.g., fluorinated phosphorus (e.g., PF 6 -), fluorinated boron (e.g., BF 4 -), and fluorinated antimony (e.g., SbF 6 -) and the like.
 非求核性アニオンは、スルホン酸の少なくともα位がフッ素原子で置換された脂肪族スルホン酸アニオン、フッ素原子若しくはフッ素原子を有する基で置換された芳香族スルホン酸アニオン、又は、アルキル基がフッ素原子で置換されたトリス(アルキルスルホニル)メチドアニオンが好ましい。中でも、パーフロロ脂肪族スルホン酸アニオン(好ましくは炭素数4~8)、又は、フッ素原子を有するベンゼンスルホン酸アニオンがより好ましく、ノナフロロブタンスルホン酸アニオン、パーフロロオクタンスルホン酸アニオン、ペンタフロロベンゼンスルホン酸アニオン、又は、3,5-ビス(トリフロロメチル)ベンゼンスルホン酸アニオンが更に好ましい。 The non-nucleophilic anion is an aliphatic sulfonic acid anion in which at least the α position of the sulfonic acid is substituted with a fluorine atom, an aromatic sulfonic acid anion in which a fluorine atom or a group having a fluorine atom is substituted, or an alkyl group in which fluorine is used. Atomically substituted tris (alkylsulfonyl) methideanions are preferred. Among them, perfluoroaliphatic sulfonic acid anion (preferably 4 to 8 carbon atoms) or benzenesulfonic acid anion having a fluorine atom is more preferable, and nonafluorobutanesulfonic acid anion, perfluorooctanesulfonic acid anion, and pentafluorobenzenesulfone are preferable. An acid anion or a 3,5-bis (trifluoromethyl) benzenesulfonic acid anion is more preferred.
 酸強度の点からは、発生酸のpKaが-1以下であるのが、感度向上のために好ましい。 From the viewpoint of acid strength, it is preferable that the pKa of the generated acid is -1 or less in order to improve the sensitivity.
 また、非求核性アニオンは、以下の一般式(AN1)で表されるアニオンも好ましい。 Further, as the non-nucleophilic anion, an anion represented by the following general formula (AN1) is also preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
 式中、
 Xfは、それぞれ独立に、フッ素原子、又は、少なくとも1つのフッ素原子で置換されたアルキル基を表す。
 R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、フッ素原子、又は、アルキル基を表し、複数存在する場合のR及びRは、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 Lは、2価の連結基を表し、複数存在する場合のLは同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 Aは、環状の有機基を表す。
 xは1~20の整数を表し、yは0~10の整数を表し、zは0~10の整数を表す。
During the ceremony
Xf independently represents a fluorine atom or an alkyl group substituted with at least one fluorine atom.
R 1 and R 2 independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or an alkyl group, and when a plurality of them are present, R 1 and R 2 may be the same or different, respectively.
L represents a divalent linking group, and when there are a plurality of L, L may be the same or different.
A represents a cyclic organic group.
x represents an integer of 1 to 20, y represents an integer of 0 to 10, and z represents an integer of 0 to 10.
 一般式(AN1)について、更に詳細に説明する。
 Xfのフッ素原子で置換されたアルキル基におけるアルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~4がより好ましい。また、Xfのフッ素原子で置換されたアルキル基は、パーフルオロアルキル基が好ましい。
 Xfは、フッ素原子又は炭素数1~4のパーフルオロアルキル基が好ましい。Xfは、例えば、フッ素原子、CF、C、C、C、CHCF、CHCHCF、CH、CHCH、CH、CHCH、CH、及び、CHCH等が挙げられ、中でも、フッ素原子、又は、CFが好ましい。特に、双方のXfがフッ素原子であるのが好ましい。
The general formula (AN1) will be described in more detail.
The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group in the alkyl group substituted with the fluorine atom of Xf is preferably 1 to 10, and more preferably 1 to 4. The alkyl group substituted with the fluorine atom of Xf is preferably a perfluoroalkyl group.
Xf is preferably a fluorine atom or a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. Xf is, for example, fluorine atom, CF 3 , C 2 F 5 , C 3 F 7 , C 4 F 9 , CH 2 CF 3 , CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , CH 2 C 2 F 5 , CH 2 CH 2 C. 2 F 5 , CH 2 C 3 F 7 , CH 2 CH 2 C 3 F 7 , CH 2 C 4 F 9 , and CH 2 CH 2 C 4 F 9 , among others, fluorine atom or CF. 3 is preferable. In particular, it is preferable that both Xfs are fluorine atoms.
 R及びRのアルキル基は、置換基(好ましくはフッ素原子)を有していてもよく、置換基中の炭素数は1~4が好ましい。置換基は、炭素数1~4のパーフルオロアルキル基が好ましい。R及びRの置換基を有するアルキル基は、例えば、CF、C、C、C、C11、C13、C15、C17、CHCF、CHCHCF、CH、CHCH、CH、CHCH、CH、及び、CHCH等が挙げられ、中でも、CFが好ましい。
 R及びRは、フッ素原子又はCFが好ましい。
The alkyl groups of R 1 and R 2 may have a substituent (preferably a fluorine atom), and the number of carbon atoms in the substituent is preferably 1 to 4. The substituent is preferably a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. Alkyl groups having substituents for R 1 and R 2 include, for example, CF 3 , C 2 F 5 , C 3 F 7 , C 4 F 9 , C 5 F 11 , C 6 F 13 , C 7 F 15 , C. 8 F 17 , CH 2 CF 3 , CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , CH 2 C 2 F 5 , CH 2 CH 2 C 2 F 5 , CH 2 C 3 F 7 , CH 2 CH 2 C 3 F 7 , CH 2 C 4 F 9 and CH 2 CH 2 C 4 F 9 and the like can be mentioned, and among them, CF 3 is preferable.
R 1 and R 2 are preferably a fluorine atom or CF 3 .
 xは1~10の整数が好ましく、1~5がより好ましい。
 yは0~4の整数が好ましく、0がより好ましい。
 zは0~5の整数が好ましく、0~3の整数がより好ましい。
 Lの2価の連結基としては、例えば、-COO-、-CO-、-O-、-S-、-SO-、-SO-、アルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、アルケニレン基、及び、これらの複数が連結した連結基等が挙げられ、総炭素数12以下の連結基が好ましい。中でも、-COO-、-CO-、又は、-O-が好ましく、-COO-がより好ましい。
x is preferably an integer of 1 to 10, and more preferably 1 to 5.
y is preferably an integer of 0 to 4, more preferably 0.
z is preferably an integer of 0 to 5, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 3.
Examples of the divalent linking group of L include -COO-, -CO-, -O-, -S-, -SO-, -SO 2- , alkylene group, cycloalkylene group, alkenylene group, and these. Examples thereof include a linking group in which a plurality of the groups are linked, and a linking group having a total carbon number of 12 or less is preferable. Among them, -COO-, -CO-, or -O- is preferable, and -COO- is more preferable.
 Aの環状の有機基は、環状構造を有するものであれば特に限定されず、脂環基、芳香環基、及び、複素環基(芳香族性を有するものだけでなく、芳香族性を有さないものも含む)等が挙げられる。
 脂環基は、単環でも多環でもよく、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基、及び、シクロオクチル基等の単環のシクロアルキル基が好ましく、その他にも、ノルボルニル基、トリシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、及び、アダマンチル基等の多環のシクロアルキル基が好ましい。中でも、ノルボルニル基、トリシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、及び、アダマンチル基等の炭素数7以上のかさ高い構造を有する脂環基が、露光後加熱工程での膜中拡散性を抑制でき、MEEF(Mask Error Enhancement Factor)向上の点から好ましい。
 芳香環基としては、例えば、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環、フェナンスレン環、及び、アントラセン環等が挙げられる。
 複素環基としては、例えば、フラン環、チオフェン環、ベンゾフラン環、ベンゾチオフェン環、ジベンゾフラン環、ジベンゾチオフェン環、及び、ピリジン環等由来の基が挙げられる。中でも、フラン環、チオフェン環、又は、ピリジン環由来の基が好ましい。
The cyclic organic group of A is not particularly limited as long as it has a cyclic structure, and has an alicyclic group, an aromatic ring group, and a heterocyclic group (not only those having aromaticity but also aromaticity). (Including those that do not), etc.
The alicyclic group may be monocyclic or polycyclic, and a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, and a cyclooctyl group is preferable, and in addition, a norbornyl group, a tricyclodecanyl group, and a tetracyclo Polycyclic cycloalkyl groups such as a decanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, and an adamantyl group are preferable. Among them, alicyclic groups having a bulky structure having 7 or more carbon atoms, such as a norbornyl group, a tricyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, and an adamantyl group, are used in the post-exposure heating step. It is preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing the diffusivity in the membrane and improving the MEEF (Mask Error Enhancement Factor).
Examples of the aromatic ring group include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, a phenanthrene ring, an anthracene ring and the like.
Examples of the heterocyclic group include groups derived from a furan ring, a thiophene ring, a benzofuran ring, a benzothiophene ring, a dibenzofuran ring, a dibenzothiophene ring, a pyridine ring and the like. Of these, a group derived from a furan ring, a thiophene ring, or a pyridine ring is preferable.
 また、環状の有機基としては、ラクトン構造も挙げられ、具体例としては、前述の一般式(LC1-1)~(LC1-22)で表されるラクトン構造が挙げられる。 Further, examples of the cyclic organic group include a lactone structure, and specific examples thereof include lactone structures represented by the above-mentioned general formulas (LC1-1) to (LC1-22).
 上記環状の有機基は、置換基を有していてもよい。上記置換基は、アルキル基(直鎖状でも、分岐鎖状でもよく、環状構造を含んでいてもよい。好ましくは炭素数1~12)、シクロアルキル基(単環、及び、多環のいずれであってもよく、多環である場合スピロ環であってもよい。好ましくは炭素数は3~20)、アリール基(好ましくは炭素数6~14)、水酸基、アルコキシ基、エステル基、アミド基、ウレタン基、ウレイド基、チオエーテル基、スルホンアミド基、及び、スルホン酸エステル基等が挙げられる。なお、環状の有機基を構成する炭素(環形成に寄与する炭素)はカルボニル炭素であってもよい。 The cyclic organic group may have a substituent. The substituent may be an alkyl group (linear or branched chain, may contain a cyclic structure, preferably 1 to 12 carbon atoms), a cycloalkyl group (monocyclic or polycyclic). It may be a spiro ring when it is a polycycle. It preferably has 3 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group (preferably 6 to 14 carbon atoms), a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an ester group, and an amide. Examples thereof include a group, a urethane group, a ureido group, a thioether group, a sulfonamide group, and a sulfonic acid ester group. The carbon constituting the cyclic organic group (carbon that contributes to ring formation) may be carbonyl carbon.
 また、光酸発生剤はカチオン部とアニオン部を有し、両者が共有結合で連結した構造のベタイン化合物であってもよい。 Further, the photoacid generator may be a betaine compound having a cation portion and an anion portion and having a structure in which both are covalently linked.
 光酸発生剤としては、特開2014-41328号公報の段落[0368]~[0377]、及び、特開2013-228681号公報の段落[0240]~[0262](対応する米国特許出願公開第2015/004533号明細書の[0339])が援用でき、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
 また、好ましい具体例として以下の化合物が挙げられる。下記化合物において、可能な場合、アニオンとカチオンとは任意に交換できる。
Examples of the photoacid generator include paragraphs [0368] to [0377] of JP2014-413328A and paragraphs [0240] to [0262] of JP2013-228681A (corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. [0339]) of the specification of 2015/004533 can be incorporated, and these contents are incorporated in the specification of the present application.
Moreover, the following compound is mentioned as a preferable specific example. In the following compounds, anions and cations can be optionally exchanged, if possible.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
 レジスト組成物中の光酸発生剤の含有量は特に制限されないが、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、組成物の全固形分に対して、5質量%以上が好ましく、9質量%以上がより好ましく、15質量%以上が更に好ましい。また、上記含有量は、40質量%以下が好ましく、35質量%以下がより好ましく、30質量%以下が更に好ましい。
 光酸発生剤は、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
The content of the photoacid generator in the resist composition is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5% by mass or more, preferably 9% by mass or more, based on the total solid content of the composition, in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. More preferably, 15% by mass or more is further preferable. The content is preferably 40% by mass or less, more preferably 35% by mass or less, and further preferably 30% by mass or less.
The photoacid generator may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
<(C)溶剤>
 レジスト組成物は、溶剤を含んでいてもよい。
 溶剤は、(M1)プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルカルボキシレート、並びに、(M2)プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル、乳酸エステル、酢酸エステル、アルコキシプロピオン酸エステル、鎖状ケトン、環状ケトン、ラクトン、及び、アルキレンカーボネートからなる群より選択される少なくとも1つの少なくとも一方を含んでいるのが好ましい。なお、この溶剤は、成分(M1)及び(M2)以外の成分を更に含んでいてもよい。
<(C) Solvent>
The resist composition may contain a solvent.
The solvent is from (M1) propylene glycol monoalkyl ether carboxylate and (M2) propylene glycol monoalkyl ether, lactic acid ester, acetate ester, alkoxypropionic acid ester, chain ketone, cyclic ketone, lactone, and alkylene carbonate. It is preferable to include at least one selected from the group. The solvent may further contain components other than the components (M1) and (M2).
 本発明者らは、このような溶剤と上述した樹脂とを組み合わせて用いると、組成物の塗布性が向上すると共に、現像欠陥数の少ないパターンが形成可能となることを見出している。その理由は必ずしも明らかではないが、これら溶剤は、上述した樹脂の溶解性、沸点及び粘度のバランスが良いため、組成物膜の膜厚のムラ及びスピンコート中の析出物の発生等を抑制できることに起因していると本発明者らは考えている。 The present inventors have found that when such a solvent is used in combination with the above-mentioned resin, the coatability of the composition is improved and a pattern having a small number of development defects can be formed. The reason is not always clear, but since these solvents have a good balance of solubility, boiling point and viscosity of the above-mentioned resin, uneven film thickness of the composition film and generation of precipitates in spin coating can be suppressed. The present inventors believe that this is due to.
 成分(M1)は、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA:propylene glycol monomethylether acetate)、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルプロピオネート、及び、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテートからなる群より選択される少なくとも1つが好ましく、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)がより好ましい。 The component (M1) is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA: propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate), propylene glycol monomethyl ether propionate, and propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, preferably propylene glycol. Monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) is more preferred.
 成分(M2)は、以下の溶剤が好ましい。
 プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルは、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル(PGME)、及び、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテル(PGEE)が好ましい。
 乳酸エステルは、乳酸エチル、乳酸ブチル、又は、乳酸プロピルが好ましい。
 酢酸エステルは、酢酸メチル、酢酸エチル、酢酸ブチル、酢酸イソブチル、酢酸プロピル、酢酸イソアミル、蟻酸メチル、蟻酸エチル、蟻酸ブチル、蟻酸プロピル、又は、酢酸3-メトキシブチルが好ましい。
 また、酪酸ブチルも好ましい。
 アルコキシプロピオン酸エステルは、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル(MMP)、又は、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル(EEP)が好ましい。
 鎖状ケトンは、1-オクタノン、2-オクタノン、1-ノナノン、2-ノナノン、アセトン、2-ヘプタノン、4-ヘプタノン、1-ヘキサノン、2-ヘキサノン、ジイソブチルケトン、フェニルアセトン、メチルエチルケトン、メチルイソブチルケトン、アセチルアセトン、アセトニルアセトン、イオノン、ジアセトニルアルコール、アセチルカービノール、アセトフェノン、メチルナフチルケトン、又は、メチルアミルケトンが好ましい。
 環状ケトンは、メチルシクロヘキサノン、イソホロン、シクロペンタノン、又は、シクロヘキサノンが好ましい。
 ラクトンは、γ-ブチロラクトンが好ましい。
 アルキレンカーボネートは、プロピレンカーボネートが好ましい。
The following solvent is preferable as the component (M2).
As the propylene glycol monoalkyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether (PGME) and propylene glycol monoethyl ether (PGEE) are preferable.
The lactate ester is preferably ethyl lactate, butyl lactate, or propyl lactate.
The acetic acid ester is preferably methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, propyl acetate, isoamyl acetate, methyl formate, ethyl acetate, butyl formate, propyl formate, or 3-methoxybutyl acetate.
Butyl butyrate is also preferred.
The alkoxypropionate ester is preferably methyl 3-methoxypropionate (MMP) or ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate (EEP).
Chain ketones are 1-octanone, 2-octanone, 1-nonanone, 2-nonanone, acetone, 2-heptanone, 4-heptanone, 1-hexanone, 2-hexanone, diisobutyl ketone, phenylacetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone. , Acetoneacetone, acetonylacetone, ionone, diacetonyl alcohol, acetylcarbinol, acetophenone, methylnaphthyl ketone, or methyl amyl ketone is preferred.
The cyclic ketone is preferably methylcyclohexanone, isophorone, cyclopentanone, or cyclohexanone.
The lactone is preferably γ-butyrolactone.
The alkylene carbonate is preferably propylene carbonate.
 成分(M2)は、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル(PGME)、乳酸エチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、メチルアミルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、酢酸ブチル、酢酸ペンチル、γ-ブチロラクトン、又は、プロピレンカーボネートがより好ましい。 The component (M2) is more preferably propylene glycol monomethyl ether (PGME), ethyl lactate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, methylamyl ketone, cyclohexanone, butyl acetate, pentyl acetate, γ-butyrolactone, or propylene carbonate.
 上記成分の他、炭素数が7以上(7~14が好ましく、7~12がより好ましく、7~10が更に好ましい)、かつ、ヘテロ原子数が2以下のエステル系溶剤を用いるのが好ましい。 In addition to the above components, it is preferable to use an ester solvent having 7 or more carbon atoms (preferably 7 to 14, more preferably 7 to 12 and even more preferably 7 to 10) and having a heteroatom number of 2 or less.
 炭素数が7以上かつヘテロ原子数が2以下のエステル系溶剤としては、例えば、酢酸アミル、酢酸2-メチルブチル、酢酸1-メチルブチル、酢酸ヘキシル、プロピオン酸ペンチル、プロピオン酸ヘキシル、プロピオン酸ブチル、イソ酪酸イソブチル、プロピオン酸ヘプチル、及び、ブタン酸ブチル等が挙げられ、酢酸イソアミルが好ましい。 Examples of the ester solvent having 7 or more carbon atoms and 2 or less heteroatomic atoms include amyl acetate, 2-methylbutyl acetate, 1-methylbutyl acetate, hexyl acetate, pentyl propionate, hexyl propionate, butyl propionate, and iso. Examples thereof include isobutyl butyrate, heptyl propionate, butyl butanoate and the like, and isoamyl acetate is preferable.
 成分(M2)は、引火点(以下、fpともいう)が37℃以上である溶剤が好ましい。
このような成分(M2)は、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル(fp:47℃)、乳酸エチル(fp:53℃)、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル(fp:49℃)、メチルアミルケトン(fp:42℃)、シクロヘキサノン(fp:44℃)、酢酸ペンチル(fp:45℃)、2-ヒドロキシイソ酪酸メチル(fp:45℃)、γ-ブチロラクトン(fp:101℃)、又は、プロピレンカーボネート(fp:132℃)が好ましい。これらのうち、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、乳酸エチル、酢酸ペンチル、又は、シクロヘキサノンがより好ましく、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、又は、乳酸エチルが更に好ましい。
 なお、ここで「引火点」とは、東京化成工業株式会社又はシグマアルドリッチ社の試薬カタログに記載されている値を意味している。
The component (M2) is preferably a solvent having a flash point (hereinafter, also referred to as fp) of 37 ° C. or higher.
Such components (M2) include propylene glycol monomethyl ether (fp: 47 ° C.), ethyl lactate (fp: 53 ° C.), ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate (fp: 49 ° C.), and methylamyl ketone (fp: 42 ° C.). ), Cyclohexanone (fp: 44 ° C), pentyl acetate (fp: 45 ° C), methyl 2-hydroxyisobutyrate (fp: 45 ° C), γ-butyrolactone (fp: 101 ° C), or propylene carbonate (fp: 132 ° C). ℃) is preferable. Of these, propylene glycol monoethyl ether, ethyl lactate, pentyl acetate, or cyclohexanone is more preferable, and propylene glycol monoethyl ether or ethyl lactate is even more preferable.
Here, the "flash point" means a value described in the reagent catalog of Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. or Sigma-Aldrich Co., Ltd.
 溶剤は、成分(M1)を含んでいるのが好ましい。溶剤は、実質的に成分(M1)のみからなるか、又は、成分(M1)と他の成分との混合溶剤であるのがより好ましい。後者の場合、溶剤は、成分(M1)と成分(M2)との双方を含んでいるのが更に好ましい。 The solvent preferably contains the component (M1). It is more preferable that the solvent is substantially composed of only the component (M1), or is a mixed solvent of the component (M1) and other components. In the latter case, the solvent more preferably contains both the component (M1) and the component (M2).
 成分(M1)と成分(M2)との質量比(M1/M2)は、「100/0」~「0/10」が好ましく、「100/0」~「15/85」がより好ましく、「100/0」~「40/60」が更に好ましく、「100/0」~「60/40」が特に好ましい。つまり、溶剤は、成分(M1)と成分(M2)との双方を含む場合、成分(M2)に対する成分(M1)の質量比は、15/85以上が好ましく、40/60以上がより好ましく、60/40以上が更に好ましい。このような構成を採用すると、現像欠陥数を更に減少させられる。 The mass ratio (M1 / M2) of the component (M1) to the component (M2) is preferably "100/0" to "0/10", more preferably "100/0" to "15/85", and " "100/0" to "40/60" are more preferable, and "100/0" to "60/40" are particularly preferable. That is, when the solvent contains both the component (M1) and the component (M2), the mass ratio of the component (M1) to the component (M2) is preferably 15/85 or more, more preferably 40/60 or more. 60/40 or more is more preferable. By adopting such a configuration, the number of development defects can be further reduced.
 なお、溶剤が成分(M1)と成分(M2)との双方を含んでいる場合、成分(M2)に対する成分(M1)の質量比は、例えば、99/1以下とする。 When the solvent contains both the component (M1) and the component (M2), the mass ratio of the component (M1) to the component (M2) is, for example, 99/1 or less.
 上述した通り、溶剤は、成分(M1)及び(M2)以外の成分を更に含んでいてもよい。この場合、成分(M1)及び(M2)以外の成分の含有量は、溶剤の全量に対して、5~30質量%が好ましい。 As described above, the solvent may further contain components other than the components (M1) and (M2). In this case, the content of the components other than the components (M1) and (M2) is preferably 5 to 30% by mass with respect to the total amount of the solvent.
 レジスト組成物中の溶剤の含有量は、固形分濃度が0.5~30質量%となるように定めるのが好ましく、1~20質量%となるように定めるのがより好ましい。こうすると、レジスト組成物の塗布性を更に向上させられる。
 なお、固形分とは、溶剤以外の全ての成分を意味する。
The content of the solvent in the resist composition is preferably set so that the solid content concentration is 0.5 to 30% by mass, and more preferably 1 to 20% by mass. By doing so, the coatability of the resist composition can be further improved.
The solid content means all components other than the solvent.
<(D)酸拡散制御剤>
 レジスト組成物は、酸拡散制御剤を更に含んでいてもよい。酸拡散制御剤は、光酸発生剤から生じた酸をトラップするクエンチャーとして作用し、レジスト膜中における酸の拡散現象を制御する役割を果たす。
 酸拡散制御剤は、例えば、塩基性化合物であってもよい。
 塩基性化合物は、下記一般式(A)~一般式(E)で示される構造を有する化合物が好ましい。
<(D) Acid diffusion control agent>
The resist composition may further contain an acid diffusion control agent. The acid diffusion control agent acts as a quencher for trapping the acid generated from the photoacid generator, and plays a role of controlling the acid diffusion phenomenon in the resist film.
The acid diffusion control agent may be, for example, a basic compound.
The basic compound is preferably a compound having a structure represented by the following general formulas (A) to (E).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
 一般式(A)及び一般式(E)中、R200、R201及びR202は、同一でも異なってもよく、水素原子、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~20)、シクロアルキル基(好ましくは炭素数3~20)又は、アリール基(好ましくは炭素数6~20)を表し、ここで、R201とR202は、互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。 In the general formula (A) and the general formula (E), R 200 , R 201 and R 202 may be the same or different, and may be the same or different, and may be a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms), or a cycloalkyl group (preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms). Represents an aryl group (preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms), and R 201 and R 202 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
 上記アルキル基について、置換基を有するアルキル基は、炭素数1~20のアミノアルキル基、炭素数1~20のヒドロキシアルキル基、又は、炭素数1~20のシアノアルキル基が好ましい。
 R203、R204、R205及びR206は、同一でも異なってもよく、炭素数1~20のアルキル基を表す。
 これら一般式(A)及び一般式(E)中のアルキル基は、無置換であるのがより好ましい。
Regarding the above alkyl group, the alkyl group having a substituent is preferably an aminoalkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a hydroxyalkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or a cyanoalkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
R 203 , R 204 , R 205 and R 206 may be the same or different and represent an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
It is more preferable that the alkyl groups in the general formula (A) and the general formula (E) are unsubstituted.
 塩基性化合物として、グアニジン、アミノピロリジン、ピラゾール、ピラゾリン、ピペラジン、アミノモルホリン、アミノアルキルモルフォリン(アルキル基部分は直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよく、一部がエーテル基及び/又はエステル基で置き換えられていてもよい。アルキル基部分の水素原子以外の全原子の合計数の合計は1~17が好ましい)、又は、ピペリジン等が好まし。中でも、イミダゾール構造、ジアザビシクロ構造、オニウムヒドロキシド構造、オニウムカルボキシレート構造、トリアルキルアミン構造、アニリン構造、又は、ピリジン構造を有する化合物、水酸基及び/又はエーテル結合を有するアルキルアミン誘導体、又は、水酸基及び/又はエーテル結合を有するアニリン誘導体等がより好ましい。 As basic compounds, guanidine, aminopyrrolidin, pyrazole, pyrazoline, piperazine, aminomorpholine, aminoalkylmorpholin (alkyl group portion may be linear or branched chain, partly replaced with ether group and / or ester group. The total number of all amino acids other than the hydrogen atom of the alkyl group portion is preferably 1 to 17), or piperidine or the like is preferred. Among them, a compound having an imidazole structure, a diazabicyclo structure, an onium hydroxide structure, an onium carboxylate structure, a trialkylamine structure, an aniline structure, or a pyridine structure, an alkylamine derivative having a hydroxyl group and / or an ether bond, or a hydroxyl group and / Or an aniline derivative having an ether bond or the like is more preferable.
 イミダゾール構造を有する化合物としては、例えば、イミダゾール、2、4、5-トリフェニルイミダゾール、及び、ベンズイミダゾール等が挙げられる。ジアザビシクロ構造を有する化合物としては、例えば、1、4-ジアザビシクロ[2,2,2]オクタン、1、5-ジアザビシクロ[4,3,0]ノナ-5-エン、及び、1、8-ジアザビシクロ[5,4,0]ウンデカ-7-エン等が挙げられる。オニウムヒドロキシド構造を有する化合物としては、例えば、トリアリールスルホニウムヒドロキシド、フェナシルスルホニウムヒドロキシド、及び、2-オキソアルキル基を有するスルホニウムヒドロキシド等が挙げられる。具体的にはトリフェニルスルホニウムヒドロキシド、トリス(t-ブチルフェニル)スルホニウムヒドロキシド、ビス(t-ブチルフェニル)ヨードニウムヒドロキシド、フェナシルチオフェニウムヒドロキシド、及び、2-オキソプロピルチオフェニウムヒドロキシド等が挙げられる。オニウムカルボキシレート構造を有する化合物としては、オニウムヒドロキシド構造を有する化合物のアニオン部がカルボキシレートになったものであり、例えば、アセテート、アダマンタン-1-カルボキシレート、及び、パーフロロアルキルカルボキシレート等が挙げられる。トリアルキルアミン構造を有する化合物としては、例えば、トリ(n-ブチル)アミン、及び、トリ(n-オクチル)アミン等が挙げられる。アニリン化合物としては、例えば、2,6-ジイソプロピルアニリン、N,N-ジメチルアニリン、N,N-ジブチルアニリン、及び、N,N-ジヘキシルアニリン等が挙げられる。水酸基及び/又はエーテル結合を有するアルキルアミン誘導体としては、例えば、エタノールアミン、ジエタノールアミン、トリエタノールアミン、トリス(メトキシエトキシエチル)アミン、及び、(HO-C-O-C2H4)N(-C-O-CH)等が挙げられる。水酸基及び/又はエーテル結合を有するアニリン誘導体としては、例えば、N,N-ビス(ヒドロキシエチル)アニリン等が挙げられる。 Examples of the compound having an imidazole structure include imidazole, 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole, and benzimidazole. Compounds having a diazabicyclo structure include, for example, 1,4-diazabicyclo [2,2,2] octane, 1,5-diazabicyclo [4,3,0] nona-5-ene, and 1,8-diazabicyclo [ 5,4,0] Undeca-7-en and the like. Examples of the compound having an onium hydroxide structure include triarylsulfonium hydroxide, phenacylsulfonium hydroxide, and sulfonium hydroxide having a 2-oxoalkyl group. Specifically, triphenylsulfonium hydroxide, tris (t-butylphenyl) sulfonium hydroxide, bis (t-butylphenyl) iodonium hydroxide, phenacylthiophenium hydroxydo, and 2-oxopropylthiophenium hydroxydo. Do etc. can be mentioned. Examples of the compound having an onium carboxylate structure include those in which the anion portion of the compound having an onium hydroxide structure is carboxylated, and examples thereof include acetate, adamantane-1-carboxylate, and perfluoroalkyl carboxylate. Can be mentioned. Examples of the compound having a trialkylamine structure include tri (n-butyl) amine and tri (n-octyl) amine. Examples of the aniline compound include 2,6-diisopropylaniline, N, N-dimethylaniline, N, N-dibutylaniline, N, N-dihexylaniline and the like. Examples of the alkylamine derivative having a hydroxyl group and / or an ether bond, for example, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, tris (methoxyethoxyethyl) amine, and, (HO-C 2 H 4 -O-C2H4) 2 N ( -C 3 H 6 -O-CH 3 ) and the like. Examples of the aniline derivative having a hydroxyl group and / or an ether bond include N, N-bis (hydroxyethyl) aniline and the like.
 塩基性化合物として、フェノキシ基を有するアミン化合物、及び、フェノキシ基を有するアンモニウム塩化合物が好ましく挙げられる。 Preferred examples of the basic compound include an amine compound having a phenoxy group and an ammonium salt compound having a phenoxy group.
 アミン化合物としては、例えば、1級、2級、及び、3級のアミン化合物を使用でき、少なくとも1つのアルキル基が窒素原子に結合しているアミン化合物が好ましい。アミン化合物は、3級アミン化合物であるのがより好ましい。アミン化合物は、少なくとも1つのアルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~20)が窒素原子に結合していれば、アルキル基の他に、シクロアルキル基(好ましくは炭素数3~20)又はアリール基(好ましくは炭素数6~12)が窒素原子に結合していてもよい。
 また、アミン化合物は、オキシアルキレン基を有するのが好ましい。オキシアルキレン基の数は、分子内に1以上が好ましく、3~9がより好ましく、4~6が更に好ましい。オキシアルキレン基の中でもオキシエチレン基(-CHCHO-)、又は、オキシプロピレン基(-CH(CH)CHO-若しくはCHCHCHO-)が好ましく、オキシエチレン基がより好ましい。
As the amine compound, for example, primary, secondary and tertiary amine compounds can be used, and an amine compound in which at least one alkyl group is bonded to a nitrogen atom is preferable. The amine compound is more preferably a tertiary amine compound. The amine compound has a cycloalkyl group (preferably 3 to 20 carbon atoms) or an aryl group (preferably 3 to 20 carbon atoms) in addition to the alkyl group as long as at least one alkyl group (preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms) is bonded to the nitrogen atom. Preferably, 6 to 12) carbon atoms may be bonded to the nitrogen atom.
Further, the amine compound preferably has an oxyalkylene group. The number of oxyalkylene groups is preferably 1 or more in the molecule, more preferably 3 to 9, and even more preferably 4 to 6. Among the oxyalkylene groups, an oxyethylene group (-CH 2 CH 2 O-) or an oxypropylene group (-CH (CH 3 ) CH 2 O- or CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 O-) is preferable, and an oxyethylene group. Is more preferable.
 アンモニウム塩化合物としては、例えば、1級、2級、3級、及び、4級のアンモニウム塩化合物が挙げられ、少なくとも1つのアルキル基が窒素原子に結合しているアンモニウム塩化合物が好ましい。アンモニウム塩化合物は、少なくとも1つのアルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~20)が窒素原子に結合していれば、アルキル基の他に、シクロアルキル基(好ましくは炭素数3~20)又はアリール基(好ましくは炭素数6~12)が窒素原子に結合していてもよい。
 アンモニウム塩化合物は、オキシアルキレン基を有するのが好ましい。オキシアルキレン基の数は、分子内に1以上が好ましく、3~9がより好ましく、4~6が更に好ましい。オキシアルキレン基の中でもオキシエチレン基(-CHCHO-)、又は、オキシプロピレン基(-CH(CH)CHO-、又は、-CHCHCHO-)が好ましく、オキシエチレン基がより好ましい。
 アンモニウム塩化合物のアニオンとしては、例えば、ハロゲン原子、スルホネート、ボレート、及び、フォスフェート等が挙げられ、中でも、ハロゲン原子、又は、スルホネートが好ましい。ハロゲン原子は、塩素原子、臭素原子、又は、ヨウ素原子が好ましい。スルホネートは、炭素数1~20の有機スルホネートが好ましい。有機スルホネートとしては、例えば、炭素数1~20のアルキルスルホネート、及び、アリールスルホネートが挙げられる。アルキルスルホネートのアルキル基は置換基を有していてもよく、置換基としては、例えば、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、アルコキシ基、アシル基、及び、芳香環基等が挙げられる。アルキルスルホネートとしては、例えば、メタンスルホネート、エタンスルホネート、ブタンスルホネート、ヘキサンスルホネート、オクタンスルホネート、ベンジルスルホネート、トリフルオロメタンスルホネート、ペンタフルオロエタンスルホネート、及び、ノナフルオロブタンスルホネート等が挙げられる。アリールスルホネートのアリール基としてはベンゼン環基、ナフタレン環基、及び、アントラセン環基が挙げられる。ベンゼン環基、ナフタレン環基、及び、アントラセン環基が有し得る置換基は、炭素数1~6の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基、又は、炭素数3~6のシクロアルキル基が好ましい。直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基、及び、シクロアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、イソプロピル基、n-ブチル基、i-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、n-ヘキシル基、及び、シクロヘキシル基等が挙げられる。他の置換基としては、例えば、炭素数1~6のアルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アシル基、及び、アシルオキシ基等が挙げられる。
Examples of the ammonium salt compound include primary, secondary, tertiary and quaternary ammonium salt compounds, and an ammonium salt compound in which at least one alkyl group is bonded to a nitrogen atom is preferable. The ammonium salt compound has a cycloalkyl group (preferably 3 to 20 carbon atoms) or an aryl group in addition to the alkyl group as long as at least one alkyl group (preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms) is bonded to the nitrogen atom. (Preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms) may be bonded to the nitrogen atom.
The ammonium salt compound preferably has an oxyalkylene group. The number of oxyalkylene groups is preferably 1 or more in the molecule, more preferably 3 to 9, and even more preferably 4 to 6. Among the oxyalkylene groups, an oxyethylene group (-CH 2 CH 2 O-) or an oxypropylene group (-CH (CH 3 ) CH 2 O- or -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 O-) is preferable. Oxyethylene groups are more preferred.
Examples of the anion of the ammonium salt compound include a halogen atom, a sulfonate, a borate, and a phosphate, and among them, a halogen atom or a sulfonate is preferable. The halogen atom is preferably a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, or an iodine atom. The sulfonate is preferably an organic sulfonate having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. Examples of the organic sulfonate include an alkyl sulfonate having 1 to 20 carbon atoms and an aryl sulfonate. The alkyl group of the alkyl sulfonate may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an alkoxy group, an acyl group, an aromatic ring group and the like. Examples of the alkyl sulphonate include methane sulphonate, ethane sulphonate, butane sulphonate, hexane sulphonate, octane sulphonate, benzyl sulphonate, trifluoromethane sulphonate, pentafluoroethane sulphonate, nonafluorobutane sulphonate and the like. Examples of the aryl group of the aryl sulfonate include a benzene ring group, a naphthalene ring group, and an anthracene ring group. The substituents that the benzene ring group, the naphthalene ring group, and the anthracene ring group can have are a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms or a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms. preferable. Examples of the linear or branched alkyl group and cycloalkyl group include methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl group, i-butyl group and t-butyl group. Examples thereof include an n-hexyl group and a cyclohexyl group. Examples of other substituents include an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group and the like.
 フェノキシ基を有するアミン化合物、及び、フェノキシ基を有するアンモニウム塩化合物とは、アミン化合物又はアンモニウム塩化合物のアルキル基の窒素原子と反対側の末端にフェノキシ基を有するものである。
 フェノキシ基の置換基としては、例えば、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、ニトロ基、カルボン酸基、カルボン酸エステル基、スルホン酸エステル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、アシルオキシ基、及び、アリールオキシ基等が挙げられる。置換基の置換位は、2~6位のいずれであってもよい。置換基の数は、1~5のいずれであってもよい。
The amine compound having a phenoxy group and the ammonium salt compound having a phenoxy group are those having a phenoxy group at the terminal opposite to the nitrogen atom of the alkyl group of the amine compound or the ammonium salt compound.
Examples of the substituent of the phenoxy group include an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, a carboxylic acid group, a carboxylic acid ester group, a sulfonic acid ester group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an acyloxy group, and Examples thereof include an aryloxy group. The substituent of the substituent may be any of 2 to 6 positions. The number of substituents may be any of 1 to 5.
 フェノキシ基と窒素原子との間に、少なくとも1つのオキシアルキレン基を有するのが好ましい。オキシアルキレン基の数は、分子内に1以上が好ましく、3~9がより好ましく、4~6が更に好ましい。オキシアルキレン基の中でもオキシエチレン基(-CHCHO-)、又は、オキシプロピレン基(-CH(CH)CHO-又は-CHCHCHO-)が好ましく、オキシエチレン基がより好ましい。 It is preferable to have at least one oxyalkylene group between the phenoxy group and the nitrogen atom. The number of oxyalkylene groups is preferably 1 or more in the molecule, more preferably 3 to 9, and even more preferably 4 to 6. Among the oxyalkylene groups, an oxyethylene group (-CH 2 CH 2 O-) or an oxypropylene group (-CH (CH 3 ) CH 2 O- or -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 O-) is preferable, and oxyethylene. Groups are more preferred.
 フェノキシ基を有するアミン化合物は、フェノキシ基を有する1又は2級アミン及びハロアルキルエーテルを加熱して反応させた後、反応系に強塩基(例えば、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、及び、テトラアルキルアンモニウム等)の水溶液を添加し、更に、有機溶剤(例えば、酢酸エチル及びクロロホルム等)で反応生成物を抽出して得られる。又は、1又は2級アミンと末端にフェノキシ基を有するハロアルキルエーテルを加熱して反応させた後、反応系に強塩基の水溶液を添加し、更に、有機溶剤で反応生成物を抽出して得られる。 For the amine compound having a phenoxy group, a primary or secondary amine having a phenoxy group and a haloalkyl ether are heated and reacted, and then a strong base (for example, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, and tetraalkylammonium hydroxide) is added to the reaction system. Etc.) is added, and the reaction product is further extracted with an organic solvent (for example, ethyl acetate, chloroform, etc.). Alternatively, it is obtained by heating and reacting a primary or secondary amine with a haloalkyl ether having a phenoxy group at the terminal, adding an aqueous solution of a strong base to the reaction system, and further extracting the reaction product with an organic solvent. ..
(プロトンアクセプター性官能基を有し、かつ、活性光線又は放射線の照射により分解してプロトンアクセプター性が低下、消失、又はプロトンアクセプター性から酸性に変化した化合物を発生する化合物(PA))
 レジスト組成物は、酸拡散制御剤として、プロトンアクセプター性官能基を有し、かつ、活性光線又は放射線の照射により分解してプロトンアクセプター性が低下若しくは消失、又はプロトンアクセプター性から酸性に変化した化合物を発生する化合物(以下、化合物(PA)ともいう)を含んでいてもよい。
(A compound (PA) that has a proton-accepting functional group and decomposes by irradiation with active light or radiation to reduce or eliminate the proton-accepting property, or to generate a compound that has changed from proton-accepting property to acidic. )
The resist composition has a proton-accepting functional group as an acid diffusion control agent, and is decomposed by irradiation with active light or radiation to reduce or eliminate the proton-accepting property, or to change from the proton-accepting property to acidic. It may contain a compound that produces a modified compound (hereinafter, also referred to as compound (PA)).
 プロトンアクセプター性官能基とは、プロトンと静電的に相互作用し得る基、又は、電子を有する官能基であって、例えば、環状ポリエーテル等のマクロサイクリック構造を有する官能基、又は、π共役に寄与しない非共有電子対をもった窒素原子を有する官能基を意味する。π共役に寄与しない非共有電子対を有する窒素原子とは、例えば、下記一般式に示す部分構造を有する窒素原子である。 The proton-accepting functional group is a group capable of electrostatically interacting with a proton or a functional group having an electron, for example, a functional group having a macrocyclic structure such as a cyclic polyether, or a functional group having a macrocyclic structure. It means a functional group having a nitrogen atom with an unshared electron pair that does not contribute to π-conjugation. The nitrogen atom having an unshared electron pair that does not contribute to π conjugation is, for example, a nitrogen atom having a partial structure shown in the following general formula.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
 プロトンアクセプター性官能基の好ましい部分構造として、例えば、クラウンエーテル構造、アザクラウンエーテル構造、1~3級アミン構造、ピリジン構造、イミダゾール構造、及び、ピラジン構造等が挙げられる。 Preferred partial structures of the proton acceptor functional group include, for example, a crown ether structure, an aza crown ether structure, a primary to tertiary amine structure, a pyridine structure, an imidazole structure, a pyrazine structure and the like.
 化合物(PA)は、活性光線又は放射線の照射により分解してプロトンアクセプター性が低下若しくは消失、又は、プロトンアクセプター性から酸性に変化した化合物を発生する。ここで、プロトンアクセプター性の低下若しくは消失、又は、プロトンアクセプター性から酸性への変化とは、プロトンアクセプター性官能基にプロトンが付加することに起因するプロトンアクセプター性の変化である。具体的には、プロトンアクセプター性官能基を有する化合物(PA)とプロトンからプロトン付加体が生成する時、その化学平衡に於ける平衡定数が減少することを意味する。 Compound (PA) is decomposed by irradiation with active light or radiation to generate a compound whose proton acceptor property is reduced or eliminated, or whose proton acceptor property is changed to acidic. Here, the decrease or disappearance of the proton acceptor property or the change from the proton acceptor property to the acidity is a change in the proton acceptor property due to the addition of a proton to the proton acceptor property functional group. Specifically, it means that when a proton adduct is formed from a compound (PA) having a proton acceptor functional group and a proton, the equilibrium constant in its chemical equilibrium decreases.
 化合物(PA)としては、例えば、特開2014-41328号公報の段落[0421]~[0428]、特開2014-134686号公報の段落[0108]~[0116]に記載されたものを援用でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 As the compound (PA), for example, those described in paragraphs [0421] to [0428] of JP-A-2014-413328 and paragraphs [0108]-[0116] of JP-A-2014-134686 can be incorporated. , These contents are incorporated herein by reference.
 窒素原子を有し、酸の作用により脱離する基を有する低分子化合物も酸拡散制御剤として使用できる。上記低分子化合物は、酸の作用により脱離する基を窒素原子上に有するアミン誘導体が好ましい。
 酸の作用により脱離する基は、アセタール基、カルボネート基、カルバメート基、3級エステル基、3級水酸基、又は、ヘミアミナールエーテル基が好ましく、カルバメート基、又は、ヘミアミナールエーテル基がより好ましい。
 低分子化合物の分子量は、100~1000が好ましく、100~700がより好ましく、100~500が更に好ましい。
 低分子化合物は、窒素原子上に保護基を有するカルバメート基を有してもよい。
A low molecular weight compound having a nitrogen atom and a group desorbed by the action of an acid can also be used as an acid diffusion control agent. The low molecular weight compound is preferably an amine derivative having a group eliminated by the action of an acid on a nitrogen atom.
The group eliminated by the action of the acid is preferably an acetal group, a carbonate group, a carbamate group, a tertiary ester group, a tertiary hydroxyl group, or a hemiaminol ether group, and a carbamate group or a hemiaminol ether group is more preferable. preferable.
The molecular weight of the low molecular weight compound is preferably 100 to 1000, more preferably 100 to 700, and even more preferably 100 to 500.
The low molecular weight compound may have a carbamate group having a protecting group on the nitrogen atom.
 下記に、酸拡散制御剤の具体例を示すが、本発明はこれに限定されるものではない。 Specific examples of the acid diffusion control agent are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
 レジスト組成物が酸拡散制御剤を含む場合、酸拡散制御剤の含有量は、レジスト組成物の全固形分に対して、0.001~15質量%が好ましく、0.01~8質量%がより好ましい。
 酸拡散制御剤は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を使用してもよい。
 また、レジスト組成物が光酸発生剤として一般式(PB)で表される化合物を含む場合、一般式(PB)で表される化合物に酸拡散制御剤に相当する機能を有する構造が含まれるため、レジスト組成物が酸拡散制御剤を実質的に含まないのも好ましい。ここで酸拡散制御剤を実質的に含まないとは、酸拡散制御剤の含有量が、一般式(PB)で表される化合物の含有量に対して5質量%以下であることを意図する。
When the resist composition contains an acid diffusion control agent, the content of the acid diffusion control agent is preferably 0.001 to 15% by mass, preferably 0.01 to 8% by mass, based on the total solid content of the resist composition. More preferred.
The acid diffusion control agent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
When the resist composition contains a compound represented by the general formula (PB) as a photoacid generator, the compound represented by the general formula (PB) includes a structure having a function corresponding to an acid diffusion control agent. Therefore, it is also preferable that the resist composition does not substantially contain the acid diffusion control agent. Here, the fact that the acid diffusion control agent is not substantially contained means that the content of the acid diffusion control agent is 5% by mass or less with respect to the content of the compound represented by the general formula (PB). ..
 光酸発生剤と酸拡散制御剤とのレジスト組成物中の使用割合は、光酸発生剤/酸拡散制御剤(モル比)=2.5~300であるのが好ましい。感度及び解像度の点からモル比は2.5以上が好ましく、露光後加熱処理までの経時でのレジストパターンの太りによる解像度の低下抑制の点からモル比は300以下が好ましい。光酸発生剤/酸拡散制御剤(モル比)は、5.0~200がより好ましく、7.0~150が更に好ましい。 The ratio of the photoacid generator and the acid diffusion control agent used in the resist composition is preferably photoacid generator / acid diffusion control agent (molar ratio) = 2.5 to 300. The molar ratio is preferably 2.5 or more from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, and the molar ratio is preferably 300 or less from the viewpoint of suppressing a decrease in resolution due to the thickening of the resist pattern over time from exposure to heat treatment. The photoacid generator / acid diffusion control agent (molar ratio) is more preferably 5.0 to 200, and even more preferably 7.0 to 150.
 酸拡散制御剤としては、例えば、特開2013-11833号公報の段落[0140]~[0144]に記載の化合物(アミン化合物、アミド基含有化合物、ウレア化合物、及び、含窒素複素環化合物等)も挙げられる。 Examples of the acid diffusion control agent include the compounds described in paragraphs [0140] to [0144] of JP2013-11833A (amine compounds, amide group-containing compounds, urea compounds, nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compounds, etc.). Can also be mentioned.
<(E)疎水性樹脂>
 レジスト組成物は、上記樹脂(A)とは別に、樹脂(A)とは異なる疎水性樹脂を含んでいてもよい。
 疎水性樹脂はレジスト膜の表面に偏在するように設計されるのが好ましいが、界面活性剤とは異なり、必ずしも分子内に親水基を有する必要はなく、極性物質及び非極性物質の均一な混合に寄与しなくてもよい。
 疎水性樹脂の添加による効果として、水に対するレジスト膜表面の静的及び動的な接触角の制御、並びに、アウトガスの抑制等が挙げられる。
<(E) Hydrophobic resin>
In addition to the resin (A), the resist composition may contain a hydrophobic resin different from the resin (A).
Hydrophobic resins are preferably designed to be unevenly distributed on the surface of the resist membrane, but unlike surfactants, they do not necessarily have to have hydrophilic groups in the molecule and are a uniform mixture of polar and non-polar substances. It does not have to contribute to.
The effects of adding the hydrophobic resin include controlling the static and dynamic contact angles of the resist film surface with respect to water, and suppressing outgas.
 疎水性樹脂は、膜表層への偏在化の点から、“フッ素原子”、“珪素原子”、及び、“樹脂の側鎖部分に含まれたCH部分構造”のいずれか1種以上を有するのが好ましく、2種以上を有するのがより好ましい。また、上記疎水性樹脂は、炭素数5以上の炭化水素基を有するのが好ましい。これらの基は樹脂の主鎖中に有していても、側鎖に置換していてもよい。 Hydrophobic resin from the viewpoint of uneven distribution in the film surface layer, "fluorine atom", "silicon atom", and has any one or more "CH 3 partial structure contained in the side chain portion of the resin" It is preferable to have two or more kinds. Further, the hydrophobic resin preferably has a hydrocarbon group having 5 or more carbon atoms. These groups may be contained in the main chain of the resin or may be substituted in the side chain.
 疎水性樹脂が、フッ素原子及び/又は珪素原子を含む場合、疎水性樹脂における上記フッ素原子及び/又は珪素原子は、樹脂の主鎖中に含まれていてもよく、側鎖中に含まれていてもよい。 When the hydrophobic resin contains fluorine atoms and / or silicon atoms, the fluorine atoms and / or silicon atoms in the hydrophobic resin may be contained in the main chain of the resin and may be contained in the side chains. You may.
 疎水性樹脂がフッ素原子を含んでいる場合、フッ素原子を有する部分構造は、フッ素原子を有するアルキル基、フッ素原子を有するシクロアルキル基、又は、フッ素原子を有するアリール基が好ましい。
 フッ素原子を有するアルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~10、より好ましくは炭素数1~4)は、少なくとも1つの水素原子がフッ素原子で置換された直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基であり、更にフッ素原子以外の置換基を有していてもよい。
 フッ素原子を有するシクロアルキル基は、少なくとも1つの水素原子がフッ素原子で置換された単環又は多環のシクロアルキル基であり、更にフッ素原子以外の置換基を有していてもよい。
 フッ素原子を有するアリール基としては、例えば、フェニル基、及び、ナフチル基等のアリール基の少なくとも1つの水素原子がフッ素原子で置換されたものが挙げられ、更にフッ素原子以外の置換基を有していてもよい。
 フッ素原子又は珪素原子を有する繰り返し単位としては、例えば、US2012/0251948A1の段落[0519]に例示された繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
When the hydrophobic resin contains a fluorine atom, the partial structure having a fluorine atom is preferably an alkyl group having a fluorine atom, a cycloalkyl group having a fluorine atom, or an aryl group having a fluorine atom.
The alkyl group having a fluorine atom (preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms) is a linear or branched alkyl group in which at least one hydrogen atom is substituted with a fluorine atom. Further, it may have a substituent other than a fluorine atom.
The cycloalkyl group having a fluorine atom is a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkyl group in which at least one hydrogen atom is substituted with a fluorine atom, and may further have a substituent other than the fluorine atom.
Examples of the aryl group having a fluorine atom include those in which at least one hydrogen atom of an aryl group such as a phenyl group and a naphthyl group is substituted with a fluorine atom, and further have a substituent other than the fluorine atom. May be.
Examples of the repeating unit having a fluorine atom or a silicon atom include the repeating unit exemplified in paragraph [0519] of US2012 / 0251948A1.
 また、上記したように、疎水性樹脂は、側鎖部分にCH部分構造を含むのも好ましい。
 ここで、疎水性樹脂中の側鎖部分が有するCH部分構造は、エチル基、及び、プロピル基等が有するCH部分構造を含むものである。
 一方、疎水性樹脂の主鎖に直接結合しているメチル基(例えば、メタクリル酸構造を有する繰り返し単位のα-メチル基)は、主鎖の影響により疎水性樹脂の表面偏在化への寄与が小さいため、本発明におけるCH部分構造には含めない。
Further, as described above, the hydrophobic resin may preferably contain a CH 3 partial structure side chain moiety.
Here, CH 3 partial structure contained in the side chain portion in the hydrophobic resin, an ethyl group, and is intended to include CH 3 partial structure a propyl group has.
On the other hand, the methyl group directly bonded to the main chain of the hydrophobic resin (for example, the α-methyl group of the repeating unit having a methacrylic acid structure) contributes to the uneven distribution of the surface of the hydrophobic resin due to the influence of the main chain. small Therefore, not included in the CH 3 partial structures in the present invention.
 疎水性樹脂に関しては、特開2014-010245号公報の段落[0348]~[0415]の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 Regarding the hydrophobic resin, the description in paragraphs [0348] to [0415] of JP2014-010245A can be referred to, and these contents are incorporated in the present specification.
 なお、疎水性樹脂はこの他にも特開2011-248019号公報、特開2010-175859号公報、特開2012-032544号公報記載の樹脂も好ましく使用できる。 As the hydrophobic resin, the resins described in JP2011-24801A, JP2010-175859, and JP2012-032544 can also be preferably used.
 レジスト組成物が疎水性樹脂を含む場合、疎水性樹脂の含有量は、レジスト組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01~20質量%が好ましく、0.1~15質量%がより好ましい。 When the resist composition contains a hydrophobic resin, the content of the hydrophobic resin is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 15% by mass, based on the total solid content of the resist composition. ..
<(F)界面活性剤>
 レジスト組成物は、界面活性剤を含んでいてもよい。界面活性剤を含むと、密着性により優れ、現像欠陥のより少ないパターンを形成できる。
 界面活性剤は、フッ素系及び/又はシリコン系界面活性剤が好ましい。
 フッ素系及び/又はシリコン系界面活性剤としては、例えば、米国特許出願公開第2008/0248425号明細書の段落[0276]に記載の界面活性剤が挙げられる。また、エフトップEF301、又は、EF303(新秋田化成(株)製);フロラードFC430、431、及び、4430(住友スリーエム(株)製);メガファックF171、F173、F176、F189、F113、F110、F177、F120、及び、R08(DIC(株)製);サーフロンS-382、SC101、102、103、104、105又は106(旭硝子(株)製);トロイゾルS-366(トロイケミカル(株)製);GF-300又はGF-150(東亜合成化学(株)製)、サーフロンS-393(セイミケミカル(株)製);エフトップEF121、EF122A、EF122B、RF122C、EF125M、EF135M、EF351、EF352、EF801、EF802又はEF601((株)ジェムコ製);PF636、PF656、PF6320、及び、PF6520(OMNOVA社製);KH-20(旭化成(株)製);FTX-204G、208G、218G、230G、204D、208D、212D、218D、及び、222D((株)ネオス製)を用いてもよい。なお、ポリシロキサンポリマーKP-341(信越化学工業(株)製)も、シリコン系界面活性剤として使用できる。
<(F) Surfactant>
The resist composition may contain a surfactant. When a surfactant is included, a pattern having better adhesion and fewer development defects can be formed.
The surfactant is preferably a fluorine-based and / or silicon-based surfactant.
Fluorine-based and / or silicon-based surfactants include, for example, the surfactants described in paragraph [0276] of US Patent Application Publication No. 2008/0248425. In addition, Ftop EF301 or EF303 (manufactured by Shin-Akita Kasei Co., Ltd.); Florard FC430, 431, and 4430 (manufactured by Sumitomo 3M Co., Ltd.); Megafuck F171, F173, F176, F189, F113, F110, F177, F120, and R08 (manufactured by DIC Co., Ltd.); Surflon S-382, SC101, 102, 103, 104, 105 or 106 (manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.); Troysol S-366 (manufactured by Troy Chemical Co., Ltd.) ); GF-300 or GF-150 (manufactured by Toa Synthetic Chemical Co., Ltd.), Surflon S-393 (manufactured by Seimi Chemical Co., Ltd.); Ftop EF121, EF122A, EF122B, RF122C, EF125M, EF135M, EF351, EF352, EF801, EF802 or EF601 (manufactured by Gemco Co., Ltd.); PF636, PF656, PF6320, and PF6520 (manufactured by OMNOVA); KH-20 (manufactured by Asahi Kasei Co., Ltd.); FTX-204G, 208G, 218G, 230G, 204D , 208D, 212D, 218D, and 222D (manufactured by Neos Co., Ltd.) may be used. The polysiloxane polymer KP-341 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) can also be used as a silicon-based surfactant.
 また、界面活性剤は、上記に示すような公知の界面活性剤の他に、テロメリゼーション法(テロマー法ともいわれる)又はオリゴメリゼーション法(オリゴマー法ともいわれる)により製造されたフルオロ脂肪族化合物を用いて合成してもよい。具体的には、このフルオロ脂肪族化合物から導かれたフルオロ脂肪族基を備えた重合体を、界面活性剤として用いてもよい。このフルオロ脂肪族化合物は、例えば、特開2002-90991号公報に記載された方法によって合成できる。
 また、米国特許出願公開第2008/0248425号明細書の段落[0280]に記載されているフッ素系及び/又はシリコン系以外の界面活性剤を使用してもよい。
Further, the surfactant is a fluoroaliphatic compound produced by a telomerization method (also referred to as a telomer method) or an oligomerization method (also referred to as an oligomer method) in addition to the known surfactants as shown above. May be synthesized using. Specifically, a polymer having a fluoroaliphatic group derived from this fluoroaliphatic compound may be used as a surfactant. This fluoroaliphatic compound can be synthesized, for example, by the method described in JP-A-2002-090991.
In addition, surfactants other than the fluorine-based and / or silicon-based surfactants described in paragraph [0280] of U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2008/0248425 may be used.
 これら界面活性剤は、1種を単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。 As these surfactants, one type may be used alone, or two or more types may be used.
 レジスト組成物が界面活性剤を含む場合、界面活性剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.0001~2質量%が好ましく、0.0005~1質量%がより好ましい。 When the resist composition contains a surfactant, the content of the surfactant is preferably 0.0001 to 2% by mass, more preferably 0.0005 to 1% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
<(G)その他の添加剤>
 レジスト組成物は、溶解阻止化合物、染料、可塑剤、光増感剤、光吸収剤、及び/又は、現像液に対する溶解性を促進させる化合物(例えば、分子量1000以下のフェノール化合物、又はカルボン酸基を含んだ脂環族若しくは脂肪族化合物)を更に含んでいてもよい。
<(G) Other additives>
The resist composition comprises a dissolution inhibitory compound, a dye, a plasticizer, a photosensitizer, a light absorber, and / or a compound that promotes solubility in a developing solution (for example, a phenol compound having a molecular weight of 1000 or less, or a carboxylic acid group. (Alicyclic or aliphatic compound) containing the above may be further contained.
 レジスト組成物は、溶解阻止化合物を更に含んでいてもよい。ここで「溶解阻止化合物」とは、酸の作用により分解して有機系現像液中での溶解度が減少する、分子量3000以下の化合物である。 The resist composition may further contain a dissolution inhibitory compound. Here, the "dissolution-inhibiting compound" is a compound having a molecular weight of 3000 or less, which is decomposed by the action of an acid to reduce its solubility in an organic developer.
〔パターン形成方法〕
 上記レジスト組成物を用いたパターン形成方法の手順は特に制限されないが、以下の工程を有するのが好ましい。
工程1:レジスト組成物を用いて、基板上にレジスト膜を形成する工程
工程2:レジスト膜を(好ましくはEUV光で)露光する工程
工程3:現像液を用いて、露光されたレジスト膜を現像し、パターンを形成する工程
 以下、上記それぞれの工程の手順について詳述する。
[Pattern formation method]
The procedure of the pattern forming method using the resist composition is not particularly limited, but it is preferable to have the following steps.
Step 1: Forming a resist film on a substrate using a resist composition Step 2: Exposing the resist film (preferably with UV light) Step 3: Using a developing solution to expose the exposed resist film Steps of developing and forming a pattern The procedure of each of the above steps will be described in detail below.
<工程1:レジスト膜形成工程>
 工程1は、レジスト組成物を用いて、基板上にレジスト膜を形成する工程である。
 レジスト組成物の定義は、上述の通りである。
<Step 1: Resist film forming step>
Step 1 is a step of forming a resist film on the substrate using the resist composition.
The definition of the resist composition is as described above.
 レジスト組成物を用いて基板上にレジスト膜を形成する方法としては、例えば、レジスト組成物を基板上に塗布する方法が挙げられる。
 なお、塗布前にレジスト組成物を必要に応じてフィルター濾過するのが好ましい。フィルターのポアサイズは、0.1μm以下が好ましく、0.05μm以下がより好ましく、0.03μm以下が更に好ましい。また、フィルターは、ポリテトラフロロエチレン製、ポリエチレン製、又は、ナイロン製が好ましい。
Examples of the method of forming a resist film on a substrate using a resist composition include a method of applying a resist composition on a substrate.
It is preferable to filter the resist composition as necessary before coating. The pore size of the filter is preferably 0.1 μm or less, more preferably 0.05 μm or less, still more preferably 0.03 μm or less. The filter is preferably made of polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene, or nylon.
 レジスト組成物は、集積回路素子の製造に使用されるような基板(例:シリコン、二酸化シリコン被覆)上に、スピナー又はコーター等の適当な塗布方法により塗布できる。塗布方法は、スピナーを用いたスピン塗布が好ましい。スピナーを用いたスピン塗布をする際の回転数は、1000~3000rpmが好ましい。
 レジスト組成物の塗布後、基板を乾燥し、レジスト膜を形成してもよい。なお、必要により、レジスト膜の下層に、各種下地膜(無機膜、有機膜、反射防止膜)を形成してもよい。
The resist composition can be applied onto a substrate (eg, silicon, silicon dioxide coating) such as that used in the manufacture of integrated circuit elements by an appropriate coating method such as a spinner or coater. The coating method is preferably spin coating using a spinner. The rotation speed at the time of spin coating using a spinner is preferably 1000 to 3000 rpm.
After applying the resist composition, the substrate may be dried to form a resist film. If necessary, various undercoat films (inorganic film, organic film, antireflection film) may be formed under the resist film.
 乾燥方法としては、例えば、加熱して乾燥する方法が挙げられる。加熱は通常の露光機、及び/又は、現像機に備わっている手段で実施でき、ホットプレート等を用いて実施してもよい。加熱温度は80~150℃が好ましく、80~140℃がより好ましく、80~130℃が更に好ましい。加熱時間は30~1000秒が好ましく、60~800秒がより好ましく、60~600秒が更に好ましい。 Examples of the drying method include a method of heating and drying. The heating can be carried out by a means provided in a normal exposure machine and / or a developing machine, and may be carried out by using a hot plate or the like. The heating temperature is preferably 80 to 150 ° C, more preferably 80 to 140 ° C, and even more preferably 80 to 130 ° C. The heating time is preferably 30 to 1000 seconds, more preferably 60 to 800 seconds, still more preferably 60 to 600 seconds.
 レジスト膜の膜厚は特に制限されないが、より高精度な微細パターンを形成できる点から、10~65nmが好ましく、15~50nmがより好ましい。 The film thickness of the resist film is not particularly limited, but 10 to 65 nm is preferable, and 15 to 50 nm is more preferable, from the viewpoint of forming a fine pattern with higher accuracy.
 なお、レジスト膜の上層にトップコート組成物を用いてトップコートを形成してもよい。
 トップコート組成物は、レジスト膜と混合せず、更にレジスト膜上層に均一に塗布できるのが好ましい。
 また、トップコートの形成前にレジスト膜を乾燥させるのが好ましい。次いで、得られたレジスト膜上に、上記レジスト膜の形成方法と同様の手段によりトップコート組成物を塗布し、更に乾燥して、トップコートを形成できる。
 トップコートの膜厚は、10~200nmが好ましく、20~100nmがより好ましく、40~80nmが更に好ましい。
 トップコートについては、特に限定されず、従来公知のトップコートを、従来公知の方法によって形成でき、例えば、特開2014-059543号公報の段落[0072]~[0082]の記載に基づいてトップコートを形成できる。
 例えば、特開2013-61648号公報に記載されたような塩基性化合物を含むトップコートを、レジスト膜上に形成するのが好ましい。トップコートが含み得る塩基性化合物の具体的な例は、後述するレジスト組成物が含んでいてもよい塩基性化合物が挙げられる。
 また、トップコートは、エーテル結合、チオエーテル結合、水酸基、チオール基、カルボニル結合、及び、エステル結合からなる群より選択される基又は結合を少なくとも一つ含む化合物を含むのが好ましい。
A top coat may be formed on the upper layer of the resist film by using the top coat composition.
It is preferable that the topcoat composition is not mixed with the resist film and can be uniformly applied to the upper layer of the resist film.
Further, it is preferable to dry the resist film before forming the top coat. Next, the topcoat composition can be applied onto the obtained resist film by the same means as in the method for forming the resist film, and further dried to form a topcoat.
The film thickness of the top coat is preferably 10 to 200 nm, more preferably 20 to 100 nm, and even more preferably 40 to 80 nm.
The top coat is not particularly limited, and a conventionally known top coat can be formed by a conventionally known method. For example, a top coat is based on the description in paragraphs [0072] to [0082] of JP-A-2014-059543. Can be formed.
For example, it is preferable to form a top coat containing a basic compound as described in JP-A-2013-61648 on the resist film. Specific examples of the basic compound that can be contained in the top coat include basic compounds that may be contained in the resist composition described later.
Further, the top coat preferably contains a compound containing at least one group or bond selected from the group consisting of an ether bond, a thioether bond, a hydroxyl group, a thiol group, a carbonyl bond, and an ester bond.
<工程2:露光工程>
 工程2は、レジスト膜を(好ましくはEUV光で)露光する工程である。
 露光の方法としては、例えば、形成したレジスト膜に所定のマスクを通してEUV光を照射する方法が挙げられる。
<Process 2: Exposure process>
Step 2 is a step of exposing the resist film (preferably with EUV light).
Examples of the exposure method include a method of irradiating the formed resist film with EUV light through a predetermined mask.
 露光後、現像を行う前にベーク(加熱)を行うのが好ましい。ベークにより露光部の反応が促進され、感度及びパターン形状がより良好となる。
 加熱温度は80~150℃が好ましく、80~140℃がより好ましく、80~130℃が更に好ましい。
 加熱時間は10~1000秒が好ましく、10~180秒がより好ましく、30~120秒が更に好ましい。
 加熱は通常の露光機及び/又は現像機に備わっている手段で実施でき、ホットプレート等を用いて行ってもよい。
 この工程は露光後ベークともいう。
It is preferable to bake (heat) after exposure and before developing. Baking accelerates the reaction of the exposed area, resulting in better sensitivity and pattern shape.
The heating temperature is preferably 80 to 150 ° C, more preferably 80 to 140 ° C, and even more preferably 80 to 130 ° C.
The heating time is preferably 10 to 1000 seconds, more preferably 10 to 180 seconds, still more preferably 30 to 120 seconds.
The heating can be carried out by means provided in a normal exposure machine and / or a developing machine, and may be carried out by using a hot plate or the like.
This process is also called post-exposure baking.
<工程3:現像工程>
 工程3は、現像液を用いて、露光されたレジスト膜を現像し、パターンを形成する工程である。
 現像液は、アルカリ現像液であっても、有機溶剤を含有する現像液(以下、有機系現像液ともいう)であってもよい。
<Process 3: Development process>
Step 3 is a step of developing the exposed resist film using a developing solution to form a pattern.
The developer may be an alkaline developer or a developer containing an organic solvent (hereinafter, also referred to as an organic developer).
 現像方法としては、例えば、現像液が満たされた槽中に基板を一定時間浸漬する方法(ディップ法)、基板表面に現像液を表面張力によって盛り上げて一定時間静置して現像する方法(パドル法)、基板表面に現像液を噴霧する方法(スプレー法)、及び、一定速度で回転している基板上に一定速度で現像液吐出ノズルをスキャンしながら現像液を吐出しつづける方法(ダイナミックディスペンス法)が挙げられる。
 また、現像を行う工程の後に、他の溶剤に置換しながら、現像を停止する工程を実施してもよい。
 現像時間は未露光部の樹脂が十分に溶解する時間であれば特に制限はなく、10~300秒が好ましく、20~120秒がより好ましい。
 現像液の温度は0~50℃が好ましく、15~35℃がより好ましい。
Examples of the developing method include a method of immersing the substrate in a tank filled with a developing solution for a certain period of time (dip method), and a method of raising the developing solution on the surface of the substrate by surface tension and allowing it to stand for a certain period of time for development (paddle). Method), a method of spraying the developer on the surface of the substrate (spray method), and a method of continuing to discharge the developer while scanning the developer discharge nozzle at a constant speed on the substrate rotating at a constant speed (dynamic discharge). Law).
Further, after the step of performing the development, a step of stopping the development may be carried out while substituting with another solvent.
The development time is not particularly limited as long as the resin in the unexposed portion is sufficiently dissolved, and is preferably 10 to 300 seconds, more preferably 20 to 120 seconds.
The temperature of the developing solution is preferably 0 to 50 ° C, more preferably 15 to 35 ° C.
 アルカリ現像液は、アルカリを含むアルカリ水溶液を用いるのが好ましい。アルカリ水溶液の種類は特に制限されないが、例えば、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシドに代表される4級アンモニウム塩、無機アルカリ、1級アミン、2級アミン、3級アミン、アルコールアミン、又は、環状アミン等を含むアルカリ水溶液が挙げられる。中でも、アルカリ現像液は、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド(TMAH)に代表される4級アンモニウム塩の水溶液であるのが好ましい。アルカリ現像液には、アルコール類、界面活性剤等を適当量添加してもよい。アルカリ現像液のアルカリ濃度は、通常、0.1~20質量%である。また、アルカリ現像液のpHは、通常、10.0~15.0である。 It is preferable to use an alkaline aqueous solution containing alkali as the alkaline developer. The type of alkaline aqueous solution is not particularly limited, and for example, a quaternary ammonium salt typified by tetramethylammonium hydroxide, an inorganic alkali, a primary amine, a secondary amine, a tertiary amine, an alcohol amine, a cyclic amine, or the like can be used. Examples include alkaline aqueous solutions containing. Above all, the alkaline developer is preferably an aqueous solution of a quaternary ammonium salt typified by tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH). An appropriate amount of alcohols, surfactants and the like may be added to the alkaline developer. The alkali concentration of the alkaline developer is usually 0.1 to 20% by mass. The pH of the alkaline developer is usually 10.0 to 15.0.
 有機系現像液は、ケトン系溶剤、エステル系溶剤、アルコール系溶剤、アミド系溶剤、エーテル系溶剤、及び炭化水素系溶剤からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種の有機溶剤を含有する現像液であるのが好ましい。 The organic developer is a developer containing at least one organic solvent selected from the group consisting of a ketone solvent, an ester solvent, an alcohol solvent, an amide solvent, an ether solvent, and a hydrocarbon solvent. It is preferable to have it.
 ケトン系溶剤としては、例えば、1-オクタノン、2-オクタノン、1-ノナノン、2-ノナノン、アセトン、2-ヘプタノン(メチルアミルケトン)、4-ヘプタノン、1-ヘキサノン、2-ヘキサノン、ジイソブチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、メチルシクロヘキサノン、フェニルアセトン、メチルエチルケトン、メチルイソブチルケトン、アセチルアセトン、アセトニルアセトン、イオノン、ジアセトニルアルコール、アセチルカービノール、アセトフェノン、メチルナフチルケトン、イソホロン、及び、プロピレンカーボネート等を挙げられる。 Examples of the ketone solvent include 1-octanone, 2-octanone, 1-nonanonone, 2-nonanonone, acetone, 2-heptanone (methylamylketone), 4-heptanone, 1-hexanone, 2-hexanone, and diisobutylketone. Examples thereof include cyclohexanone, methylcyclohexanone, phenylacetone, methylethylketone, methylisobutylketone, acetylacetone, acetonylacetone, ionone, diacetonyl alcohol, acetylcarbinol, acetophenone, methylnaphthylketone, isophorone, and propylene carbonate.
 エステル系溶剤としては、例えば、酢酸メチル、酢酸ブチル、酢酸エチル、酢酸イソプロピル、酢酸ペンチル、酢酸イソペンチル、酢酸アミル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテルアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート、エチルー3-エトキシプロピオネート、3-メトキシブチルアセテート、3-メチル-3-メトキシブチルアセテート、蟻酸メチル、蟻酸エチル、蟻酸ブチル、蟻酸プロピル、乳酸エチル、乳酸ブチル、乳酸プロピル、ブタン酸ブチル、2-ヒドロキシイソ酪酸メチル、酢酸イソアミル、イソ酪酸イソブチル、及び、プロピオン酸ブチル等を挙げられる。 Examples of the ester solvent include methyl acetate, butyl acetate, ethyl acetate, isopropyl acetate, pentyl acetate, isopentyl acetate, amyl acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate, and diethylene glycol monoethyl. Ether acetate, ethyl-3-ethoxypropionate, 3-methoxybutyl acetate, 3-methyl-3-methoxybutyl acetate, methyl formate, ethyl formate, butyl formate, propyl formate, ethyl lactate, butyl lactate, propyl lactate, butanoic acid Examples thereof include butyl, methyl 2-hydroxyisobutyrate, isoamyl acetate, isobutyl isobutyrate, butyl propionate and the like.
 アルコール系溶剤、アミド系溶剤、エーテル系溶剤、及び、炭化水素系溶剤としては、例えば、米国特許出願公開2016/0070167A1号明細書の段落[0715]~[0718]に開示された溶剤を使用できる。 As the alcohol solvent, the amide solvent, the ether solvent, and the hydrocarbon solvent, for example, the solvents disclosed in paragraphs [0715] to [0718] of US Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0070167A1 can be used. ..
 上記の溶剤は、複数混合してもよいし、上記以外の溶剤又は水と混合してもよい。現像液全体としての含水率は、50質量%未満が好ましく、20質量%未満がより好ましく、10質量%未満が更に好ましく、実質的に水分を含有しないのが特に好ましい。
 有機系現像液に対する有機溶剤の含有量は、現像液の全量に対して、50質量%以上100質量%以下が好ましく、80質量%以上100質量%以下がより好ましく、90質量%以上100質量%以下が更に好ましく、95質量%以上100質量%以下が特に好ましい。
A plurality of the above solvents may be mixed, or may be mixed with a solvent other than the above or water. The water content of the developer as a whole is preferably less than 50% by mass, more preferably less than 20% by mass, further preferably less than 10% by mass, and particularly preferably substantially free of water.
The content of the organic solvent in the organic developer is preferably 50% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less, more preferably 80% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less, and 90% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less, based on the total amount of the developing solution. The following is more preferable, and 95% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less is particularly preferable.
<他の工程>
 上記パターン形成方法は、工程3の後に、リンス液を用いて洗浄する工程を含むのが好ましい。
<Other processes>
The pattern forming method preferably includes a step of washing with a rinsing solution after the step 3.
 アルカリ現像液を用いて現像する工程の後のリンス工程に用いるリンス液としては、例えば、純水が挙げられる。なお、純水には、界面活性剤を適当量添加してもよい。
 リンス液には、界面活性剤を適当量添加してもよい。
Examples of the rinsing solution used in the rinsing step after the step of developing with an alkaline developer include pure water. An appropriate amount of surfactant may be added to pure water.
An appropriate amount of surfactant may be added to the rinse solution.
 有機系現像液を用いた現像工程の後のリンス工程に用いるリンス液は、レジストパターンを溶解しないものであれば特に制限はなく、一般的な有機溶剤を含む溶液を使用できる。リンス液は、炭化水素系溶剤、ケトン系溶剤、エステル系溶剤、アルコール系溶剤、アミド系溶剤、及び、エーテル系溶剤からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種の有機溶剤を含有するリンス液を用いるのが好ましい。
 炭化水素系溶剤、ケトン系溶剤、エステル系溶剤、アルコール系溶剤、アミド系溶剤、及びエーテル系溶剤の例としては、有機溶剤を含む現像液において説明したものと同様のものが挙げられる。
The rinse solution used in the rinse step after the development step using the organic developer is not particularly limited as long as it does not dissolve the resist pattern, and a solution containing a general organic solvent can be used. As the rinsing solution, a rinsing solution containing at least one organic solvent selected from the group consisting of a hydrocarbon solvent, a ketone solvent, an ester solvent, an alcohol solvent, an amide solvent, and an ether solvent is used. Is preferable.
Examples of the hydrocarbon solvent, the ketone solvent, the ester solvent, the alcohol solvent, the amide solvent, and the ether solvent include those similar to those described in the developing solution containing an organic solvent.
 リンス工程の方法は特に限定されず、例えば、一定速度で回転している基板上にリンス液を吐出しつづける方法(回転塗布法)、リンス液が満たされた槽中に基板を一定時間浸漬する方法(ディップ法)、及び、基板表面にリンス液を噴霧する方法(スプレー法)等が挙げられる。
 また、本発明のパターン形成方法は、リンス工程の後に加熱工程(Post Bake)を含んでいてもよい。本工程により、ベークによりパターン間及びパターン内部に残留した現像液及びリンス液が除去される。また、本工程により、レジストパターンがなまされ、パターンの表面荒れが改善される効果もある。リンス工程の後の加熱工程は、通常40~250℃(好ましくは90~200℃)で、通常10秒間~3分間(好ましくは30秒間~120秒間)行う。
The method of the rinsing process is not particularly limited, and for example, a method of continuously discharging the rinsing liquid onto the substrate rotating at a constant speed (rotary coating method), or immersing the substrate in a tank filled with the rinsing liquid for a certain period of time. Examples thereof include a method (dip method) and a method of spraying a rinse liquid on the substrate surface (spray method).
In addition, the pattern forming method of the present invention may include a heating step (Post Bake) after the rinsing step. In this step, the developer and rinse liquid remaining between the patterns and inside the patterns are removed by baking. In addition, this step has the effect of smoothing the resist pattern and improving the surface roughness of the pattern. The heating step after the rinsing step is usually performed at 40 to 250 ° C. (preferably 90 to 200 ° C.) for 10 seconds to 3 minutes (preferably 30 seconds to 120 seconds).
 また、形成されたパターンをマスクとして、基板のエッチング処理を実施してもよい。つまり、工程3にて形成されたパターンをマスクとして、基板(または、下層膜及び基板)を加工して、基板にパターンを形成してもよい。
 基板(または、下層膜及び基板)の加工方法は特に限定されないが、工程3で形成されたパターンをマスクとして、基板(または、下層膜及び基板)に対してドライエッチングを行うことにより、基板にパターンを形成する方法が好ましい。
 ドライエッチングは、1段のエッチングであっても、複数段からなるエッチングであってもよい。エッチングが複数段からなるエッチングである場合、各段のエッチングは同一の処理であっても異なる処理であってもよい。
 エッチングは、公知の方法をいずれも使用でき、各種条件等は、基板の種類又は用途等に応じて、適宜、決定される。例えば、国際光工学会紀要(Proc.of SPIE)Vol.6924,692420(2008)、特開2009-267112号公報等に準じて、エッチングを実施できる。また、「半導体プロセス教本 第4版 2007年刊行 発行人:SEMIジャパン」の「第4章 エッチング」に記載の方法に準ずることもできる。
 中でも、ドライエッチングは、酸素プラズマエッチングが好ましい。
Further, the substrate may be etched using the formed pattern as a mask. That is, the pattern formed in step 3 may be used as a mask to process the substrate (or the underlayer film and the substrate) to form the pattern on the substrate.
The processing method of the substrate (or the underlayer film and the substrate) is not particularly limited, but the substrate (or the underlayer film and the substrate) is dry-etched using the pattern formed in step 3 as a mask to obtain the substrate. The method of forming the pattern is preferable.
The dry etching may be one-step etching or multi-step etching. When the etching is an etching consisting of a plurality of stages, the etching of each stage may be the same process or different processes.
Any known method can be used for etching, and various conditions and the like are appropriately determined according to the type and application of the substrate. For example, the Bulletin of the International Society of Optical Engineering (Proc. Of SPIE) Vol. Etching can be performed according to 6924, 692420 (2008), Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-267112, and the like. In addition, the method described in "Chapter 4 Etching" of "Semiconductor Process Textbook 4th Edition 2007 Published Publisher: SEMI Japan" can also be applied.
Of these, oxygen plasma etching is preferable for dry etching.
 レジスト組成物、及び、本発明のパターン形成方法において使用される各種材料(例えば、溶剤、現像液、リンス液、反射防止膜形成用組成物、トップコート形成用組成物等)は、金属等の不純物を含まないのが好ましい。これら材料に含まれる不純物の含有量は、1質量ppm以下が好ましく、10質量ppb以下がより好ましく、100質量ppt以下が更に好ましく、10質量ppt以下が特に好ましく、1質量ppt以下が最も好ましい。ここで、金属不純物としては、例えば、Na、K、Ca、Fe、Cu、Mg、Al、Li、Cr、Ni、Sn、Ag、As、Au、Ba、Cd、Co、Pb、Ti、V、W、及び、Zn等が挙げられる。 The resist composition and various materials used in the pattern forming method of the present invention (for example, solvent, developing solution, rinsing solution, antireflection film forming composition, top coat forming composition, etc.) are made of metal or the like. It is preferable that it does not contain impurities. The content of impurities contained in these materials is preferably 1 mass ppm or less, more preferably 10 mass ppb or less, further preferably 100 mass ppt or less, particularly preferably 10 mass ppt or less, and most preferably 1 mass ppt or less. Here, examples of the metal impurities include Na, K, Ca, Fe, Cu, Mg, Al, Li, Cr, Ni, Sn, Ag, As, Au, Ba, Cd, Co, Pb, Ti, V, etc. W, Zn and the like can be mentioned.
 各種材料から金属等の不純物を除去する方法としては、例えば、フィルターを用いた濾過が挙げられる。フィルター孔径は、ポアサイズ100nm未満が好ましく、10nm以下がより好ましく、5nm以下が更に好ましい。フィルターは、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン製、ポリエチレン製、又は、ナイロン製のフィルターが好ましい。フィルターは、上記フィルター素材とイオン交換メディアとを組み合わせた複合材料で構成されていてもよい。フィルターは、有機溶剤であらかじめ洗浄したフィルターを用いてもよい。フィルター濾過工程では、複数種類のフィルターを直列又は並列に接続して用いてもよい。複数種類のフィルターを使用する場合は、孔径及び/又は材質が異なるフィルターを組み合わせて使用してもよい。また、各種材料を複数回濾過してもよく、複数回濾過する工程が循環濾過工程であってもよい。
 レジスト組成物の製造においては、例えば、樹脂、及び、光酸発生剤等の各成分を溶剤に溶解させた後、素材が異なる複数のフィルターを用いて循環濾過を行うのが好ましい。例えば、孔径50nmのポリエチレン製フィルター、孔径10nmのナイロン製フィルター、孔径3nmのポリエチレン製フィルターを順列に接続し、10回以上循環濾過を行うのが好ましい。フィルター間の圧力差は小さい程好ましく、一般的には0.1MPa以下であり、0.05MPa以下が好ましく、0.01MPa以下がより好ましい。フィルターと充填ノズルの間の圧力差も小さい程好ましく、一般的には0.5MPa以下であり、0.2MPa以下が好ましく、0.1MPa以下がより好ましい。
 レジスト組成物の製造装置の内部は、窒素等の不活性ガスによってガス置換を行うのが好ましい。これにより、酸素等の活性ガスのレジスト組成物中への溶解を抑制できる。
 レジスト組成物はフィルターによって濾過された後、清浄な容器に充填される。容器に充填されたレジスト組成物は、冷蔵保存されるのが好ましい。これにより、経時による性能劣化が抑制される。組成物の容器への充填が完了してから、冷蔵保存を開始するまでの時間は短い程好ましく、一般的には24時間以内であり、16時間以内が好ましく、12時間以内がより好ましく、10時間以内が更に好ましい。保存温度は0~15℃が好ましく、0~10℃がより好ましく、0~5℃が更に好ましい。
Examples of the method for removing impurities such as metals from various materials include filtration using a filter. The pore size of the filter is preferably less than 100 nm, more preferably 10 nm or less, and even more preferably 5 nm or less. The filter is preferably made of polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene, or nylon. The filter may be composed of a composite material in which the above filter material and an ion exchange medium are combined. As the filter, a filter that has been previously washed with an organic solvent may be used. In the filter filtration step, a plurality of types of filters may be connected in series or in parallel. When a plurality of types of filters are used, filters having different pore diameters and / or materials may be used in combination. Further, various materials may be filtered a plurality of times, and the step of filtering the various materials a plurality of times may be a circulation filtration step.
In the production of the resist composition, for example, it is preferable to dissolve each component such as a resin and a photoacid generator in a solvent, and then perform circulation filtration using a plurality of filters made of different materials. For example, it is preferable to connect a polyethylene filter having a pore diameter of 50 nm, a nylon filter having a pore diameter of 10 nm, and a polyethylene filter having a pore diameter of 3 nm in a permutation, and perform circulation filtration 10 times or more. The smaller the pressure difference between the filters, the more preferable it is. Generally, it is 0.1 MPa or less, preferably 0.05 MPa or less, and more preferably 0.01 MPa or less. The smaller the pressure difference between the filter and the filling nozzle, the more preferable, and generally 0.5 MPa or less, 0.2 MPa or less is preferable, and 0.1 MPa or less is more preferable.
It is preferable to replace the inside of the resist composition manufacturing apparatus with an inert gas such as nitrogen. This makes it possible to suppress the dissolution of an active gas such as oxygen in the resist composition.
The resist composition is filtered through a filter and then filled in a clean container. The resist composition filled in the container is preferably stored in a refrigerator. As a result, performance deterioration over time is suppressed. The shorter the time from the completion of filling the composition into the container to the start of refrigerated storage is preferably, generally within 24 hours, preferably within 16 hours, more preferably within 12 hours, and 10 Within hours is even more preferred. The storage temperature is preferably 0 to 15 ° C, more preferably 0 to 10 ° C, and even more preferably 0 to 5 ° C.
 また、各種材料に含まれる金属等の不純物を低減する方法としては、例えば、各種材料を構成する原料として金属含有量が少ない原料を選択する方法、各種材料を構成する原料に対してフィルター濾過を行う方法、及び、装置内をテフロン(登録商標)でライニングする等してコンタミネーションを可能な限り抑制した条件下で蒸留を行う方法等が挙げられる。 Further, as a method of reducing impurities such as metals contained in various materials, for example, a method of selecting a raw material having a low metal content as a raw material constituting various materials, and a filter filtration of the raw materials constituting various materials are performed. Examples thereof include a method of performing distillation under conditions in which contamination is suppressed as much as possible by lining the inside of the apparatus with Teflon (registered trademark).
 フィルター濾過の他、吸着材による不純物の除去を行ってもよく、フィルター濾過と吸着材とを組み合わせて使用してもよい。吸着材としては、公知の吸着材を使用でき、例えば、シリカゲル及びゼオライト等の無機系吸着材、並びに、活性炭等の有機系吸着材を使用できる。上記各種材料に含まれる金属等の不純物を低減するためには、製造工程における金属不純物の混入を防止する必要がある。製造装置から金属不純物が十分に除去されたかどうかは、製造装置の洗浄に使用された洗浄液中に含まれる金属成分の含有量を測定して確認できる。使用後の洗浄液に含まれる金属成分の含有量は、100質量ppt(parts per trillion)以下が好ましく、10質量ppt以下がより好ましく、1質量ppt以下が更に好ましい。 In addition to filter filtration, impurities may be removed by an adsorbent, or filter filtration and an adsorbent may be used in combination. As the adsorbent, a known adsorbent can be used, and for example, an inorganic adsorbent such as silica gel and zeolite, and an organic adsorbent such as activated carbon can be used. In order to reduce impurities such as metals contained in the various materials, it is necessary to prevent the mixing of metal impurities in the manufacturing process. Whether or not the metal impurities are sufficiently removed from the manufacturing apparatus can be confirmed by measuring the content of the metal component contained in the cleaning liquid used for cleaning the manufacturing apparatus. The content of the metal component contained in the cleaning liquid after use is preferably 100 mass ppt (parts per trillion) or less, more preferably 10 mass ppt or less, and further preferably 1 mass ppt or less.
 リンス液等の有機系処理液には、静電気の帯電、引き続き生じる静電気放電に伴う、薬液配管及び各種パーツ(フィルター、O-リング、チューブ等)の故障を防止する為、導電性の化合物を添加してもよい。導電性の化合物は特に制限されないが、例えば、メタノールが挙げられる。添加量は特に制限されないが、好ましい現像特性又はリンス特性を維持する点で、10質量%以下が好ましく、5質量%以下がより好ましい。
 薬液配管としては、例えば、SUS(ステンレス鋼)、又は、帯電防止処理の施されたポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、若しくは、フッ素樹脂(ポリテトラフルオロエチレン、又は、パーフルオロアルコキシ樹脂等)で被膜された各種配管を使用できる。フィルター及びO-リングに関しても同様に、帯電防止処理の施されたポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、又は、フッ素樹脂(ポリテトラフルオロエチレン、又は、パーフルオロアルコキシ樹脂等)を使用できる。
Conductive compounds are added to organic treatment liquids such as rinse liquids to prevent damage to chemical liquid piping and various parts (filters, O-rings, tubes, etc.) due to static electricity charging and subsequent electrostatic discharge. You may. The conductive compound is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include methanol. The amount to be added is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass or less, in terms of maintaining preferable development characteristics or rinsing characteristics.
As the chemical solution piping, for example, various piping coated with SUS (stainless steel), antistatic treated polyethylene, polypropylene, or fluororesin (polytetrafluoroethylene, perfluoroalkoxy resin, etc.). Can be used. Similarly, for the filter and the O-ring, antistatic treated polyethylene, polypropylene, or fluororesin (polytetrafluoroethylene, perfluoroalkoxy resin, etc.) can be used.
 本発明の方法により形成されるパターンに対して、パターンの表面荒れを改善する方法を適用してもよい。パターンの表面荒れを改善する方法としては、例えば、国際公開第2014/002808号に開示された水素を含有するガスのプラズマによってパターンを処理する方法が挙げられる。その他にも、特開2004-235468号公報、米国特許出願公開第2010/0020297号明細書、特開2008-83384号公報、及び、Proc. of SPIE Vol.8328 83280N-1”EUV Resist Curing Technique for LWR Reduction and Etch Selectivity Enhancement”に記載されているような公知の方法が挙げられる。 A method for improving the surface roughness of the pattern may be applied to the pattern formed by the method of the present invention. Examples of the method for improving the surface roughness of the pattern include a method of treating the pattern with a plasma of a hydrogen-containing gas disclosed in International Publication No. 2014/002808. In addition, JP-A-2004-235468, US Patent Application Publication No. 2010/0020297, JP-A-2008-83384, and Proc. Of SPIE Vol. 8328 83280N-1 "EUV Resist Curing Technology for LWR Reduction and Etch Sensitivity Enhancement" can be mentioned.
 形成されるパターンがライン状である場合、パターン高さをライン幅で割った値で求められるアスペクト比が、2.5以下が好ましく、2.1以下がより好ましく、1.7以下が更に好ましい。
 形成されるパターンがトレンチ(溝)パターン状又はコンタクトホールパターン状である場合、パターン高さをトレンチ幅又はホール径で割った値で求められるアスペクト比が、4.0以下が好ましく、3.5以下がより好ましく、3.0以下が更に好ましい。
When the pattern to be formed is line-shaped, the aspect ratio obtained by dividing the pattern height by the line width is preferably 2.5 or less, more preferably 2.1 or less, still more preferably 1.7 or less. ..
When the pattern to be formed is a trench pattern or a contact hole pattern, the aspect ratio obtained by dividing the pattern height by the trench width or the hole diameter is preferably 4.0 or less, preferably 3.5. The following is more preferable, and 3.0 or less is further preferable.
 本発明のパターン形成方法は、DSA(Directed Self-Assembly)におけるガイドパターン形成(例えば、ACS Nano Vol.4 No.8 Page4815-4823参照)にも使用できる。 The pattern forming method of the present invention can also be used for guide pattern forming in DSA (Directed Self-Assembly) (see, for example, ACS Nano Vol. 4 No. 8 Page 4815-4823).
 また、上記の方法によって形成されたパターンは、例えば、特開平3-270227号公報、及び、特開2013-164509号公報に開示されたスペーサープロセスの芯材(コア)として使用できる。 Further, the pattern formed by the above method can be used as, for example, the core material (core) of the spacer process disclosed in JP-A-3-270227 and JP2013-164509.
 また、本発明は、上記したパターン形成方法を含む、電子デバイスの製造方法、及び、この製造方法により製造された電子デバイスにも関する。
 本発明の電子デバイスは、電気電子機器(家電、OA(Office Automation)、メディア関連機器、光学用機器及び通信機器等)に、好適に、搭載されるものである。
The present invention also relates to a method for manufacturing an electronic device including the above-mentioned pattern forming method, and an electronic device manufactured by this manufacturing method.
The electronic device of the present invention is suitably mounted on an electrical and electronic device (home appliance, OA (Office Automation), media-related device, optical device, communication device, etc.).
 以下に実施例に基づいて本発明を更に詳細に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、及び処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り適宜変更できる。したがって、本発明の範囲は以下に示す実施例により限定的に解釈されるべきではない。 The present invention will be described in more detail below based on examples. The materials, amounts used, proportions, treatment contents, treatment procedures, etc. shown in the following examples can be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the invention should not be construed as limiting by the examples shown below.
[レジスト組成物(感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物)の成分]
〔樹脂〕
 以下に、レジスト組成物の製造に使用した各樹脂(A-1~A-26、A’-1~A’-6)の、それぞれが有する繰り返し単位を示す。
 なお、樹脂A-1~A-26、A’-1~A’-2、及び、A’-4~A’-6は酸分解性樹脂であり、樹脂A’-3は酸分解性樹脂以外の樹脂である。
[Components of resist composition (actinic cheilitis or radiation-sensitive resin composition)]
〔resin〕
The repeating units of each of the resins (A-1 to A-26, A'-1 to A'-6) used in the production of the resist composition are shown below.
The resins A-1 to A-26, A'-1 to A'-2, and A'-4 to A'-6 are acid-degradable resins, and the resin A'-3 is an acid-decomposable resin. It is a resin other than.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000065
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000065
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067
 下記表に、各樹脂における、各繰り返し単位が占める含有量、重量平均分子量(Mw)、及び、分散度(Mw/Mn)を示す。
 なお、表中における繰り返しのモル比率は、上段に示した各樹脂を構成する各繰り返し単位が占める含有量(モル比)を左から順に記載したものである。
 また、各繰り返し単位が占める含有量は、13C-NMR(nuclear magnetic resonance)により測定した。
 重量平均分子量、及び、分散度は、GPC(キャリア:テトラヒドロフラン(THF))により測定したポリスチレン換算量に基づく値である。
The table below shows the content, weight average molecular weight (Mw), and dispersity (Mw / Mn) occupied by each repeating unit in each resin.
The repeating molar ratios in the table are the contents (molar ratios) occupied by each repeating unit constituting each resin shown in the upper row in order from the left.
The content occupied by each repeating unit was measured by 13 C-NMR (nuclear magnetic resonance).
The weight average molecular weight and the degree of dispersion are values based on the polystyrene-equivalent amount measured by GPC (carrier: tetrahydrofuran (THF)).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000068
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000068
<合成例1:樹脂A-1の合成>
 シクロヘキサノン(226g)を窒素気流下にて80℃に加熱した。下記式M-1で表されるモノマー(21.5g)、下記式M-2で表されるモノマー(21.6g)、下記式M-3で表されるモノマー(58.3g)、シクロヘキサノン(420g)、及び、2,2’-アゾビスイソ酪酸ジメチル(V-601、和光純薬工業(株)製)(12.42g)の混合溶液を6時間かけて、上記シクロヘキサノンに撹拌しながら滴下し、反応液を得た。滴下終了後、反応液を80℃にて更に2時間攪拌した。得られた反応液を放冷後、多量のメタノール/水(質量比9:1)で再沈殿した後、ろ過し、得られた固体を真空乾燥して、樹脂A-1(89g)を得た。
<Synthesis Example 1: Synthesis of Resin A-1>
Cyclohexanone (226 g) was heated to 80 ° C. under a nitrogen stream. Monomer represented by the following formula M-1 (21.5 g), monomer represented by the following formula M-2 (21.6 g), monomer represented by the following formula M-3 (58.3 g), cyclohexanone ( A mixed solution of 420 g) and dimethyl 2,2'-azobisisobutyrate (V-601, manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) (12.42 g) was added dropwise to the cyclohexanone over 6 hours with stirring. A reaction solution was obtained. After completion of the dropping, the reaction solution was stirred at 80 ° C. for another 2 hours. The obtained reaction solution was allowed to cool, reprecipitated with a large amount of methanol / water (mass ratio 9: 1), filtered, and the obtained solid was vacuum dried to obtain resin A-1 (89 g). It was.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000069
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000069
 得られた樹脂A-1のGPC(キャリア:テトラヒドロフラン(THF))から求めた重量平均分子量(Mw:ポリスチレン換算)は6500であり、分散度(Mw/Mn)は1.52であった。13C-NMR(nuclear magnetic resonance)により測定した組成比は、M-1に基づく単位/M-2に基づく単位/M-3に基づく単位=20/30/50(モル比)であった。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw: polystyrene equivalent) determined from the GPC (carrier: tetrahydrofuran (THF)) of the obtained resin A-1 was 6500, and the dispersity (Mw / Mn) was 1.52. 13 The composition ratio measured by C-NMR (nuclear magnetic resonance) was a unit based on M-1 / a unit based on M-2 / a unit based on M-3 = 20/30/50 (molar ratio).
 その他の樹脂についても、同様に合成した。 Other resins were also synthesized in the same manner.
〔光酸発生剤〕
 以下に示す光酸発生剤を使用した。
 光酸発生剤B-1~B-3は一般式(PB)で表される化合物であり、光酸発生剤C-1~C-12は、一般式(PB)で表される化合物以外の光酸発生剤である。
 光酸発生剤C-9~C-12は一般式(PA-1)で表される化合物である。
[Photoacid generator]
The following photoacid generators were used.
The photoacid generators B-1 to B-3 are compounds represented by the general formula (PB), and the photoacid generators C-1 to C-12 are compounds other than the compounds represented by the general formula (PB). It is a photoacid generator.
The photoacid generators C-9 to C-12 are compounds represented by the general formula (PA-1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000070
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000070
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000071
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000071
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000072
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000072
〔酸拡散制御剤〕
 以下に示す酸拡散制御剤を使用した。
[Acid diffusion control agent]
The acid diffusion control agents shown below were used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000073
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000073
〔界面活性剤〕
 以下に示す界面活性剤を使用した。
 H-1:メガファックF176(DIC(株)製、フッ素系界面活性剤)
 H-2:メガファックR08(DIC(株)製、フッ素及びシリコン系界面活性剤)
 H-3:PF656(OMNOVA社製、フッ素系界面活性剤)
[Surfactant]
The surfactants shown below were used.
H-1: Megafuck F176 (manufactured by DIC Corporation, fluorine-based surfactant)
H-2: Megafuck R08 (manufactured by DIC Corporation, fluorine and silicon-based surfactant)
H-3: PF656 (manufactured by OMNOVA, fluorine-based surfactant)
〔溶剤〕
 以下に示す溶剤を使用した。
 F-1:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)
 F-2:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル(PGME)
 F-3:プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテル(PGEE)
 F-4:シクロヘキサノン
 F-5:シクロペンタノン
 F-6:2-ヘプタノン
 F-7:乳酸エチル
 F-8:γ-ブチロラクトン
 F-9:プロピレンカーボネート
〔solvent〕
The following solvents were used.
F-1: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA)
F-2: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether (PGME)
F-3: Propylene glycol monoethyl ether (PGEE)
F-4: Cyclohexanone F-5: Cyclopentanone F-6: 2-Heptanone F-7: Ethyl lactate F-8: γ-Butyrolactone F-9: Propylene carbonate
[レジスト組成物の調製]
 表2に示す各成分を固形分濃度が2.0質量%になるように混合した。次いで、得られた混合液を、最初に孔径50nmのポリエチレン製フィルター、次に孔径10nmのナイロン製フィルター、最後に孔径5nmのポリエチレン製フィルターの順番で通液させて濾過して、レジスト組成物(Re-1~Re-50、Re’-1~Re’-6)を調製した。
 なお、固形分とは、溶剤以外の全ての成分を意味する。得られたレジスト組成物を、実施例及び比較例で使用した。
 また、表中、「量」欄は、各成分の、レジスト組成物中の全固形分に対する含有量(質量%)を示す。
[Preparation of resist composition]
Each component shown in Table 2 was mixed so that the solid content concentration was 2.0% by mass. Next, the obtained mixed solution is first passed through a polyethylene filter having a pore diameter of 50 nm, then a nylon filter having a pore diameter of 10 nm, and finally a polyethylene filter having a pore diameter of 5 nm, and filtered to form a resist composition ( Re-1 to Re-50 and Re'-1 to Re'-6) were prepared.
The solid content means all components other than the solvent. The obtained resist composition was used in Examples and Comparative Examples.
Further, in the "Amount" column in the table, the content (mass%) of each component with respect to the total solid content in the resist composition is shown.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000074
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000074
[パターン形成]
〔EUV露光、有機溶剤現像〕
 直径12インチのシリコンウエハ上に下層膜形成用組成物AL412(Brewer Science社製)を塗布し、205℃で60秒間ベークして、膜厚20nmの下地膜を形成した。その上に、表3に示すレジスト組成物を塗布し、100℃で60秒間ベークして、膜厚30nmのレジスト膜を形成した。
 EUV露光装置(Exitech社製、Micro Exposure Tool、NA0.3、Quadrupol、アウターシグマ0.68、インナーシグマ0.36)を用いて、得られたレジスト膜を有するシリコンウエハに対して、得られるパターンの平均ライン幅が20nmになるようにパターン照射を行った。なお、レチクルとしては、ラインサイズ=20nmであり、且つ、ライン:スペース=1:1であるマスクを用いた。
 露光後のレジスト膜を90℃で60秒間ベークした後、酢酸n-ブチルで30秒間現像し、これをスピン乾燥してネガ型のパターンを得た。
[Pattern formation]
[EUV exposure, organic solvent development]
The underlayer film forming composition AL412 (manufactured by Brewer Science) was applied onto a silicon wafer having a diameter of 12 inches and baked at 205 ° C. for 60 seconds to form a base film having a film thickness of 20 nm. The resist composition shown in Table 3 was applied onto the resist composition and baked at 100 ° C. for 60 seconds to form a resist film having a film thickness of 30 nm.
A pattern obtained for a silicon wafer having a obtained resist film using an EUV exposure apparatus (Micro Exposure Tool, NA0.3, Quadrupole, outer sigma 0.68, inner sigma 0.36, manufactured by Exitech). Pattern irradiation was performed so that the average line width of the above was 20 nm. As the reticle, a mask having a line size of 20 nm and a line: space = 1: 1 was used.
The resist film after exposure was baked at 90 ° C. for 60 seconds, developed with n-butyl acetate for 30 seconds, and spin-dried to obtain a negative pattern.
〔評価〕
<欠陥評価(欠陥抑制性)>
 上述の方法で得られたパターンを、UVision5(AMAT社製)及びSEMVisionG4(AMAT社製)を使用して、シリコンウエハ1枚当たりの欠陥数を数えて、以下の評価基準に従って、評価した。欠陥数が少ないほど欠陥抑制性が良好である。
 なお、欠陥抑制性の評価においては、調製直後のレジスト組成物を用いてパターンを形成して評価に供した。
「A」:欠陥数が50個以下
「B」:欠陥数が50個超100個以下
「C」:欠陥数が100個超200個以下
「D」:欠陥数が200個超300個以下
「E」:欠陥数が300個超400個以下
「F」:欠陥数が400個超500個以下
「G」:欠陥数が500個超
[Evaluation]
<Defect evaluation (defect suppression)>
The pattern obtained by the above method was evaluated using UV Vision 5 (manufactured by AMAT) and SEMVision G4 (manufactured by AMAT) by counting the number of defects per silicon wafer and according to the following evaluation criteria. The smaller the number of defects, the better the defect suppression property.
In the evaluation of defect inhibitory property, a pattern was formed using the resist composition immediately after preparation and used for the evaluation.
"A": Number of defects is 50 or less "B": Number of defects is more than 50 and 100 or less "C": Number of defects is more than 100 and 200 or less "D": Number of defects is more than 200 and 300 or less ""E": Number of defects is more than 300 and 400 or less "F": Number of defects is more than 400 and less than 500 "G": Number of defects is more than 500
<経時後のラインウィズスラフネス(経時後LWR性能、nm)>
 上述の方法で得られたパターンを測長走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM((株)日立製作所S-9380II))を使用してパターン上部から観察した。パターンの線幅を100箇所で観測し、その測定ばらつきを3σで評価し、LWR(nm)とした。LWRの値が小さいほど経時後LWR性能が良好である。
 なお、経時後LWR性能の評価においては、調製してから、室温(25℃)の暗室にて180日間保存した後のレジスト組成物を用いてパターンを形成して評価に供した。
 また経時後LWR(nm)は、4.7nm以下、4.4nm以下、4.1nm以下、3.8nm以下、3.5nm、3.2nm以下の順で好ましい。
<Line with slagness after aging (LWR performance after aging, nm)>
The pattern obtained by the above method was observed from above the pattern using a length-measuring scanning electron microscope (SEM (Hitachi, Ltd. S-9380II)). The line width of the pattern was observed at 100 points, and the measurement variation was evaluated by 3σ and used as LWR (nm). The smaller the LWR value, the better the LWR performance after aging.
In the evaluation of the LWR performance after aging, a pattern was formed using the resist composition after preparation and then stored in a dark room at room temperature (25 ° C.) for 180 days for evaluation.
The LWR (nm) after aging is preferably 4.7 nm or less, 4.4 nm or less, 4.1 nm or less, 3.8 nm or less, 3.5 nm or 3.2 nm or less in this order.
 使用したレジスト組成物の特徴と、評価の結果を下記表3に示す。
 表中「含量」欄は、実施例のレジスト組成物における、全固形分に対する光酸発生剤の含有量が、15質量%であるか否かを示す。本要件を満たす場合は「A」と記載し、満たさない場合は「B」と記載した。
 「式PA1」欄は、実施例のレジスト組成物が、光酸発生剤として一般式(PA-1)で表される化合物を含むか否かを示す。本要件を満たす場合は「A」と記載し、満たさない場合は「B」と記載した。
 「式PB」欄は、実施例のレジスト組成物が、光酸発生剤として一般式(PB)で表される化合物を含むか否かを示す。本要件を満たす場合は「A」と記載し、満たさない場合は「B」と記載した。
 「a2」「a3」「a4」「a5」「a6」「b5」「b6」欄は、それぞれ、実施例のレジスト組成物に含まれる樹脂(酸分解性樹脂)が、繰り返し単位a2、繰り返し単位a3、繰り返し単位a4、繰り返し単位a5、繰り返し単位a6、繰り返し単位b5、繰り返し単位b6を有するか否かを示す。本要件を満たす場合は「A」と記載し、満たさない場合は「B」と記載した。
The characteristics of the resist composition used and the evaluation results are shown in Table 3 below.
The "content" column in the table indicates whether or not the content of the photoacid generator with respect to the total solid content in the resist composition of the example is 15% by mass. If this requirement is satisfied, it is described as "A", and if it is not satisfied, it is described as "B".
The "Formula PA1" column indicates whether or not the resist composition of the example contains a compound represented by the general formula (PA-1) as a photoacid generator. If this requirement is satisfied, it is described as "A", and if it is not satisfied, it is described as "B".
The "Formula PB" column indicates whether or not the resist composition of the example contains a compound represented by the general formula (PB) as a photoacid generator. If this requirement is satisfied, it is described as "A", and if it is not satisfied, it is described as "B".
In the "a2", "a3", "a4", "a5", "a6", "b5", and "b6" columns, the resin (acid-degradable resin) contained in the resist composition of the examples is the repeating unit a2 and the repeating unit, respectively. It indicates whether or not it has a3, a repeating unit a4, a repeating unit a5, a repeating unit a6, a repeating unit b5, and a repeating unit b6. If this requirement is satisfied, it is described as "A", and if it is not satisfied, it is described as "B".
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000075
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000075
 上記表に示すように本発明のレジスト組成物は、有機溶剤現像でパターンを形成した場合に、欠陥抑制性及び経時後LWR性能に優れることが確認された。
 一方で、比較例のレジスト組成物では、欠陥抑制性及び経時後LWR性能の少なくとも一方が不十分であった。
 比較例1-1のレジスト組成物では、酸分解性樹脂において、α位にF原子を有する繰り返し単位(繰り返し単位a1)を使用せずに、α位にF原子を有さない繰り返し単位のみを使用しており、EUV光のショットノイズが大きいためと考えられる。
 比較例1-2のレジスト組成物では、酸分解性樹脂において、α位にF原子を有する繰り返し単位を使用せずに、α位にCF基を有する樹脂を使用しており、有機溶剤現像液に対する溶解性が高すぎたためだと考えられる。
 比較例1-3のレジスト組成物では、酸分解性樹脂を使用せずに、非酸分解性の樹脂のみを使用しており、本条件においてパターンを形成することができなかった。
 比較例1-4のレジスト組成物では、酸分解性樹脂において、α位にF原子を有する繰り返し単位を使用せずに、α位にI原子を有する樹脂を使用しており、経時安定性が悪く、経時後LWR性能が不十分になったと考えられる。
 比較例1-5のレジスト組成物では、酸分解性樹脂において、α位にF原子を有する繰り返し単位を使用せずに、α位にF原子を有さない樹脂のみを使用しており、EUV光のショットノイズが大きいためと考えられる。
 比較例1-6のレジスト組成物では、酸分解性樹脂において、α位にF原子を有する繰り返し単位を使用せずに、α位にF原子を有さない樹脂のみを使用しており、EUV光のショットノイズが大きいためと考えられる。
As shown in the above table, it was confirmed that the resist composition of the present invention is excellent in defect suppression property and LWR performance after aging when a pattern is formed by organic solvent development.
On the other hand, in the resist composition of the comparative example, at least one of the defect suppressing property and the LWR performance after aging was insufficient.
In the resist composition of Comparative Example 1-1, in the acid-degradable resin, only the repeating unit having no F atom at the α-position is used without using the repeating unit having the F atom at the α-position (repeating unit a1). It is considered that it is used and the shot noise of EUV light is large.
In the resist composition of Comparative Example 1-2, the acid-degradable resin uses a resin having 3 CF groups at the α-position without using a repeating unit having an F atom at the α-position, and is developed by an organic solvent. This is probably because the solubility in the solution was too high.
In the resist composition of Comparative Example 1-3, only the non-acid-degradable resin was used without using the acid-degradable resin, and the pattern could not be formed under this condition.
In the resist composition of Comparative Example 1-4, the acid-decomposable resin uses a resin having an I atom at the α-position instead of using a repeating unit having an F atom at the α-position, and is stable over time. It is considered that the LWR performance became insufficient after a lapse of time.
In the resist composition of Comparative Example 1-5, in the acid-degradable resin, only the resin having no F atom at the α-position is used without using the repeating unit having the F atom at the α-position, and EUV is used. This is probably because the shot noise of light is large.
In the resist composition of Comparative Example 1-6, in the acid-degradable resin, only the resin having no F atom at the α-position is used without using the repeating unit having the F atom at the α-position, and EUV is used. This is probably because the shot noise of light is large.
 また、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、レジスト組成物に含まれる樹脂は、繰り返し単位a2を有するのが好ましく、繰り返し単位a3を有するのがより好ましく、繰り返し単位a4を有するのが更に好ましく、繰り返し単位a5、又は、b5を有するのが特に好ましく、繰り返し単位a6、又は、b6を有するのが最も好ましいことが確認された(実施例1-1~1-26の結果等参照)。 Further, from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent, the resin contained in the resist composition preferably has the repeating unit a2, more preferably the repeating unit a3, and further preferably the repeating unit a4. It was confirmed that it is particularly preferable to have the repeating unit a5 or b5, and it is most preferable to have the repeating unit a6 or b6 (see the results of Examples 1-1 to 1-26, etc.).
 本発明の効果がより優れる点から、レジスト組成物が、一般式(PA-1)で表される化合物を含むのが好ましいことが確認された(実施例1-1と1-27との比較、実施例1-5と1-28との比較、実施例1-9と1-29との比較、実施例1-11と1-30との比較、実施例1-19と1-31との比較、等参照)。 It was confirmed that the resist composition preferably contains a compound represented by the general formula (PA-1) from the viewpoint of more excellent effect of the present invention (comparison between Examples 1-1 and 1-27). , Comparison of Examples 1-5 and 1-28, Comparison of Examples 1-9 and 1-29, Comparison of Examples 1-11 and 1-30, Examples 1-19 and 1-31 Comparison, etc.).
 本発明の効果がより優れる点から、レジスト組成物が、一般式(PB)で表される化合物を含むのが好ましいことが確認された(実施例1-1と1-33との比較、実施例1-5と1-34との比較、実施例1-9と1-35との比較、実施例1-11と1-36との比較、実施例1-19と1-37と1-50との比較、実施例1-20と1-38と1-48との比較、実施例1-21と1-39と1-47との比較、実施例1-22と1-40と1-41と1-49との比較、等参照)。 From the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent, it was confirmed that the resist composition preferably contains a compound represented by the general formula (PB) (comparison and implementation of Examples 1-1 and 1-33). Comparison of Examples 1-5 and 1-34, Comparison of Examples 1-9 and 1-35, Comparison of Examples 1-11 and 1-36, Examples 1-19, 1-37 and 1- Comparison with 50, Comparison with Examples 1-20, 1-38 and 1-48, Comparison with Examples 1-21, 1-39 and 1-47, Examples 1-22, 1-40 and 1 See comparison between -41 and 1-49, etc.).
 本発明の効果がより優れる点から、レジスト組成物が、光酸発生剤を全固形分に対して15質量%以上含むのが好ましいことが確認された(実施例1-1と1-42との比較、実施例1-5と1-43との比較、実施例1-9と1-44との比較、実施例1-11と1-45との比較、実施例1-19と1-46との比較、実施例1-39と1-47との比較、実施例1-41と1-49との比較、等参照)。 From the viewpoint of more excellent effect of the present invention, it was confirmed that the resist composition preferably contains a photoacid generator in an amount of 15% by mass or more based on the total solid content (Examples 1-1 and 1-42). Comparison, comparison between Examples 1-5 and 1-43, comparison between Examples 1-9 and 1-44, comparison between Examples 1-11 and 1-45, Examples 1-19 and 1- Comparison with 46, comparison with Examples 1-39 and 1-47, comparison with Examples 1-41 and 1-49, etc.).
〔EUV露光、アルカリ水溶液現像〕
 直径12インチのシリコンウエハ上に下層膜形成用組成物AL412(Brewer Science社製)を塗布し、205℃で60秒間ベークして、膜厚20nmの下地膜を形成した。その上に、表4に示すレジスト組成物を塗布し、100℃で60秒間ベークして、膜厚30nmのレジスト膜を形成した。
 EUV露光装置(Exitech社製、Micro Exposure Tool、NA0.3、Quadrupol、アウターシグマ0.68、インナーシグマ0.36)を用いて、得られたレジスト膜を有するシリコンウエハに対して、得られるパターンの平均ライン幅が20nmになるようにパターン照射を行った。なお、レチクルとしては、ラインサイズ=20nmであり、且つ、ライン:スペース=1:1であるマスクを用いた。
 露光後のレジスト膜を90℃で60秒間ベークした後、テトラメチルアンモニウムハイドロオキサイド水溶液(2.38質量%)で30秒間現像し、次いで純水で30秒間リンスした。その後、これをスピン乾燥してポジ型のパターンを得た。
 得られたポジ型のパターンを用いて、上述したのと同様に、欠陥抑制性及び経時後LWR性能の評価を行った。
[EUV exposure, alkaline aqueous solution development]
The underlayer film forming composition AL412 (manufactured by Brewer Science) was applied onto a silicon wafer having a diameter of 12 inches and baked at 205 ° C. for 60 seconds to form a base film having a film thickness of 20 nm. The resist composition shown in Table 4 was applied onto the resist composition and baked at 100 ° C. for 60 seconds to form a resist film having a film thickness of 30 nm.
A pattern obtained for a silicon wafer having a obtained resist film using an EUV exposure apparatus (Micro Exposure Tool, NA0.3, Quadrupole, outer sigma 0.68, inner sigma 0.36, manufactured by Exitech). Pattern irradiation was performed so that the average line width of the above was 20 nm. As the reticle, a mask having a line size of 20 nm and a line: space = 1: 1 was used.
The resist film after exposure was baked at 90 ° C. for 60 seconds, developed with an aqueous solution of tetramethylammonium hydroxide (2.38% by mass) for 30 seconds, and then rinsed with pure water for 30 seconds. Then, this was spin-dried to obtain a positive pattern.
Using the obtained positive pattern, the defect suppression property and the LWR performance after aging were evaluated in the same manner as described above.
 評価結果を下記表に示す。
 表4中の各欄の記載の意義は、表3中における相当する欄の記載と同様の意義である。
The evaluation results are shown in the table below.
The significance of the description in each column in Table 4 is the same as the description in the corresponding column in Table 3.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000076
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000076
 上記表に示すように本発明のレジスト組成物は、アルカリ現像でパターンを形成する場合にも、欠陥抑制性及び経時後LWR性能に優れることが確認された。
 一方で、比較例のレジスト組成物では、欠陥抑制性及び経時後LWR性能の少なくとも一方が不十分であった。
 比較例2-1のレジスト組成物では、酸分解性樹脂において、α位にF原子を有する繰り返し単位(繰り返し単位a1)を使用せずに、α位にF原子を有さない繰り返し単位のみを使用しており、EUV光のショットノイズが大きいためと考えられる。
 比較例2-2のレジスト組成物では、酸分解性樹脂において、α位にF原子を有する繰り返し単位を使用せずに、α位にCF基を有する樹脂を使用しており、アルカリ現像液に対する溶解性が低すぎたためだと考えられる。
 比較例2-3のレジスト組成物では、酸分解性樹脂を使用せずに、非酸分解性の樹脂のみを使用しており、本条件においてパターンを形成できなかった。
 比較例2-4のレジスト組成物では、酸分解性樹脂において、α位にF原子を有する繰り返し単位を使用せずに、α位にI原子を有する樹脂を使用しており、経時安定性が悪く、経時後LWR性能が不十分になったと考えられる。
 比較例2-5のレジスト組成物では、酸分解性樹脂において、α位にF原子を有する繰り返し単位を使用せずに、α位にF原子を有さない樹脂のみを使用しており、EUV光のショットノイズが大きいためと考えられる。
 比較例2-6のレジスト組成物では、酸分解性樹脂において、α位にF原子を有する繰り返し単位を使用せずに、α位にF原子を有さない樹脂のみを使用しており、EUV光のショットノイズが大きいためと考えられる。
As shown in the above table, it was confirmed that the resist composition of the present invention is excellent in defect suppression property and LWR performance after aging even when a pattern is formed by alkaline development.
On the other hand, in the resist composition of the comparative example, at least one of the defect suppressing property and the LWR performance after aging was insufficient.
In the resist composition of Comparative Example 2-1 in the acid-degradable resin, only the repeating unit having no F atom at the α-position is used without using the repeating unit having the F atom at the α-position (repeating unit a1). It is considered that it is used and the shot noise of EUV light is large.
In the resist composition of Comparative Example 2-2, in the acid-degradable resin, a resin having 3 CF groups at the α-position is used instead of using a repeating unit having an F atom at the α-position, and an alkaline developer is used. It is thought that this is because the solubility in the water was too low.
In the resist composition of Comparative Example 2-3, only the non-acid-degradable resin was used without using the acid-degradable resin, and the pattern could not be formed under this condition.
In the resist composition of Comparative Example 2-4, in the acid-degradable resin, a resin having an I atom at the α-position is used instead of using a repeating unit having an F atom at the α-position, and the stability over time is improved. It is considered that the LWR performance became insufficient after a lapse of time.
In the resist composition of Comparative Example 2-5, in the acid-degradable resin, only the resin having no F atom at the α-position is used without using the repeating unit having the F atom at the α-position, and EUV is used. This is probably because the shot noise of light is large.
In the resist composition of Comparative Example 2-6, in the acid-degradable resin, only the resin having no F atom at the α-position is used without using the repeating unit having the F atom at the α-position, and EUV is used. This is probably because the shot noise of light is large.
 また、実施例同士の比較においても、有機溶剤現像でパターンを形成した場合と同様の傾向が確認された。 Also, in the comparison between the examples, the same tendency as when the pattern was formed by organic solvent development was confirmed.

Claims (13)

  1.  酸分解性樹脂と、
     活性光線又は放射線の照射により酸を発生する化合物と、
     を含み、
     前記酸分解性樹脂が、一般式(A1)で表される繰り返し単位a1を有する、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
     一般式(A1)中、Rは水素原子又は有機基を表す。
    Acid-degradable resin and
    Compounds that generate acid by irradiation with active light or radiation,
    Including
    A photosensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition in which the acid-decomposable resin has a repeating unit a1 represented by the general formula (A1).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
    In the general formula (A1), RQ represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group.
  2.  前記繰り返し単位a1が、酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位a2を含む、請求項1に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。 The actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to claim 1, wherein the repeating unit a1 contains a repeating unit a2 having an acid-degradable group.
  3.  前記繰り返し単位a2が、一般式(A2)で表される繰り返し単位a3を含む、請求項2に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
     一般式(A2)中、RQ1~RQ3は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基を表す。
     RQ1~RQ3のうちの2つは互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
    The actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to claim 2, wherein the repeating unit a2 includes a repeating unit a3 represented by the general formula (A2).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
    In the general formula (A2), RQ1 to RQ3 each independently represent an alkyl group.
    Two of RQ1 to RQ3 may be combined with each other to form a ring.
  4.  前記繰り返し単位a1が、Rが、
     水素原子、又は、
     ラクトン基、スルトン基、カーボネート基、水酸基、スルホンアミド基、アミド基、カルボン酸基、及び、光酸発生基からなる群から選択される1以上の特定基を有する基であって脱離基ではない基Xを表す、
     繰り返し単位a4を含む、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
    The repeating unit a1 is, R Q is,
    Hydrogen atom or
    A group having one or more specific groups selected from the group consisting of a lactone group, a sultone group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group, a sulfonamide group, an amide group, a carboxylic acid group, and a photoacid generating group. Represents no group X,
    The actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 3, which comprises the repeating unit a4.
  5.  前記繰り返し単位a4が、フッ素原子を有する前記基Xを有する繰り返し単位a5を含む、請求項4に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。 The actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to claim 4, wherein the repeating unit a4 includes the repeating unit a5 having the group X having a fluorine atom.
  6.  前記繰り返し単位a5が、ヘキサフルオロプロパノール基を有する前記基Xを有する繰り返し単位a6を含む、請求項5に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。 The actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to claim 5, wherein the repeating unit a5 includes a repeating unit a6 having the group X having a hexafluoropropanol group.
  7.  前記酸分解性樹脂が、一般式(B1)で表される繰り返し単位b5を有する、請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
     一般式(B1)中、Xは、水素原子、アルキル基、又は、フッ素原子以外のハロゲン原子を表す。
     Lは、単結合又は-COO-を表す。
     RB1は、ラクトン基、スルトン基、カーボネート基、水酸基、スルホンアミド基、アミド基、カルボン酸基、及び、光酸発生基からなる群から選択される1以上の特定基、並びに、フッ素原子を有する基であって、脱離基ではない基Zを表す。
    The actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the acid-degradable resin has a repeating unit b5 represented by the general formula (B1).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
    In the general formula (B1), X represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or a halogen atom other than a fluorine atom.
    L B represents a single bond or -COO-.
    R B1 is a lactone group, a sultone group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group, a sulfonamido group, an amide group, a carboxylic acid group, and one or more specific groups selected from the group consisting of photoacid generator groups, as well as a fluorine atom Represents a group Z that has a group and is not a elimination group.
  8.  前記繰り返し単位b5が、ヘキサフルオロプロパノール基を有する前記基Zを有する繰り返し単位b6を含む、請求項7に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。 The actinic light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to claim 7, wherein the repeating unit b5 contains the repeating unit b6 having the group Z having a hexafluoropropanol group.
  9.  前記活性光線又は放射線の照射により酸を発生する化合物が、一般式(PA-1)で表される化合物を含む、請求項1~8のいずれか1項に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
     一般式(PA-1)中、A及びAは、それぞれ独立に、-SO-R、又は、-CO-Rを表す。Rは、有機基を表す。
     Mは、カチオンを表す。
    The actinic cheilitis or radiation-sensitive compound according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the compound that generates an acid by irradiation with active light or radiation includes a compound represented by the general formula (PA-1). Sex resin composition.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
    In formula (PA-1), A 1 and A 2 are each independently, -SO 2 -R P, or represents -CO-R P. R P represents an organic group.
    M + represents a cation.
  10.  前記活性光線又は放射線の照射により酸を発生する化合物が、一般式(PB)で表される化合物を含む、請求項1~9のいずれか1項に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
     M  A-L-B M     (PB)
     一般式(PB)中、M 及びM は、それぞれ独立に、有機カチオンを表す。
     Lは、2価の有機基を表す。
     Aは、酸アニオン基を表す。
     ただし、一般式(PB)で表される化合物のM 及びM がそれぞれ水素原子で置換されたHA-L-BHで表される化合物において、HAで表される基のpKaは、BHで表される基のpKaよりも低い。
     Bは、一般式(B-1)~(B-4)のいずれかで表される基を表す。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
     前記一般式(B-1)~(B-4)中、*は、結合位置を表す。
     前記一般式(B-1)~(B-4)中、Rは、有機基を表す。
    The actinic light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the compound that generates an acid by irradiation with active light or radiation contains a compound represented by the general formula (PB). Composition.
    M 1 + A - - LB M 2 + (PB)
    In formula (PB), M 1 + and M 2 + each independently represents an organic cation.
    L represents a divalent organic group.
    A represents an acid anion group.
    However, in the general formula (PB) M 1 + and M 2 + a compound represented by the HA-L-BH, which are each substituted by a hydrogen atom of the compound represented by, pKa of the group represented by the HA, It is lower than the pKa of the group represented by BH.
    B represents a group represented by any of the general formulas (B-1) to (B-4).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
    In the general formulas (B-1) to (B-4), * represents a bonding position.
    In the general formula (B-1) ~ (B -4), R B represents an organic group.
  11.  前記活性光線又は放射線の照射により酸を発生する化合物の含有量が、全固形分に対して15質量%以上である、請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。 The actinic cheilitis or sensation according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein the content of the compound that generates an acid by irradiation with the active light or radiation is 15% by mass or more with respect to the total solid content. Radiation resin composition.
  12.  請求項1~11のいずれか1項に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を用いて、基板上にレジスト膜を形成する工程と、
     前記レジスト膜を露光する工程と、
     現像液を用いて、前記露光されたレジスト膜を現像し、パターンを形成する工程と、
     を有するパターン形成方法。
    A step of forming a resist film on a substrate by using the actinic or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 11.
    The step of exposing the resist film and
    A step of developing the exposed resist film using a developing solution to form a pattern, and
    A pattern forming method having.
  13.  請求項12に記載のパターン形成方法を含む、電子デバイスの製造方法。 A method for manufacturing an electronic device, including the pattern forming method according to claim 12.
PCT/JP2020/016565 2019-05-29 2020-04-15 Actinic-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, method for forming pattern, and method for producing electronic device WO2020241099A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2021522692A JP7254917B2 (en) 2019-05-29 2020-04-15 Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, pattern forming method, electronic device manufacturing method

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2019-100021 2019-05-29
JP2019100021 2019-05-29

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020241099A1 true WO2020241099A1 (en) 2020-12-03

Family

ID=73552872

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2020/016565 WO2020241099A1 (en) 2019-05-29 2020-04-15 Actinic-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, method for forming pattern, and method for producing electronic device

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JP7254917B2 (en)
TW (1) TW202107201A (en)
WO (1) WO2020241099A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023047992A1 (en) * 2021-09-21 2023-03-30 富士フイルム株式会社 Active light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, active light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern forming method, and method for producing electronic device
WO2024048281A1 (en) * 2022-08-31 2024-03-07 富士フイルム株式会社 Active-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern formation method, and electronic device production method

Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS4923376B1 (en) * 1970-04-28 1974-06-15
JP2000321774A (en) * 1999-03-09 2000-11-24 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Pattern forming method
JP2003084439A (en) * 2001-09-13 2003-03-19 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Pattern forming material and pattern forming method
JP2004219822A (en) * 2003-01-16 2004-08-05 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Positive type resist composition
JP2005004158A (en) * 2003-05-19 2005-01-06 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Positive resist composition and method for forming pattern using the same
JP2005275153A (en) * 2004-03-25 2005-10-06 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive composition and method for forming pattern by using the same
JP4232632B2 (en) * 2001-10-03 2009-03-04 ダイキン工業株式会社 Novel fluorine-containing polymer, resist composition using the same, and novel fluorine-containing monomer
JP2009229773A (en) * 2008-03-21 2009-10-08 Fujifilm Corp Positive resist composition, pattern forming method using positive resist composition, and compound used for positive resist composition
WO2012114963A1 (en) * 2011-02-23 2012-08-30 Jsr株式会社 Negative-pattern-forming method and photoresist composition

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP1275666A4 (en) 2000-04-04 2007-10-24 Daikin Ind Ltd Novel fluoropolymer having acid-reactive group and chemical amplification type photoresist composition containing the same

Patent Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS4923376B1 (en) * 1970-04-28 1974-06-15
JP2000321774A (en) * 1999-03-09 2000-11-24 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Pattern forming method
JP2003084439A (en) * 2001-09-13 2003-03-19 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Pattern forming material and pattern forming method
JP4232632B2 (en) * 2001-10-03 2009-03-04 ダイキン工業株式会社 Novel fluorine-containing polymer, resist composition using the same, and novel fluorine-containing monomer
JP2004219822A (en) * 2003-01-16 2004-08-05 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Positive type resist composition
JP2005004158A (en) * 2003-05-19 2005-01-06 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Positive resist composition and method for forming pattern using the same
JP2005275153A (en) * 2004-03-25 2005-10-06 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive composition and method for forming pattern by using the same
JP2009229773A (en) * 2008-03-21 2009-10-08 Fujifilm Corp Positive resist composition, pattern forming method using positive resist composition, and compound used for positive resist composition
WO2012114963A1 (en) * 2011-02-23 2012-08-30 Jsr株式会社 Negative-pattern-forming method and photoresist composition

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023047992A1 (en) * 2021-09-21 2023-03-30 富士フイルム株式会社 Active light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, active light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern forming method, and method for producing electronic device
WO2024048281A1 (en) * 2022-08-31 2024-03-07 富士フイルム株式会社 Active-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern formation method, and electronic device production method

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP7254917B2 (en) 2023-04-10
JPWO2020241099A1 (en) 2020-12-03
TW202107201A (en) 2021-02-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7002537B2 (en) Photosensitive composition for EUV light, pattern forming method, manufacturing method of electronic device
WO2020004306A1 (en) Active ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, pattern formation method, electronic device manufacturing method, resin
JP2023145543A (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, pattern formation method, resist film, and electronic device manufacturing method
JP7176010B2 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern forming method, electronic device manufacturing method
JP6992166B2 (en) Actinic cheilitis or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern forming method, manufacturing method of electronic device
JP7200267B2 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern forming method, electronic device manufacturing method
JP7313443B2 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern forming method, electronic device manufacturing method
JP7221308B2 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern forming method, electronic device manufacturing method
KR20200078671A (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern forming method, mask blank with resist film, manufacturing method of photomask, manufacturing method of electronic device
WO2021199841A1 (en) Actinic-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, pattern formation method, resist film, and electronic device production method
JP6987873B2 (en) A method for producing a sensitive light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, a resist film, a pattern forming method, and an electronic device.
JP7254917B2 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, pattern forming method, electronic device manufacturing method
JP7379536B2 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern forming method, and electronic device manufacturing method
JP7357062B2 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern forming method, electronic device manufacturing method, compound, resin
JP7266093B2 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition production method, pattern formation method, electronic device production method
JP7220229B2 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern forming method, electronic device manufacturing method
JP6861284B2 (en) Actinic light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern forming method, manufacturing method of electronic device
JPWO2019203140A1 (en) Photosensitive composition for EUV light, pattern forming method, manufacturing method of electronic device
WO2022158338A1 (en) Actinic-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, actinic-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, method for forming pattern, method for producing electronic device, compound, and resin
WO2020255585A1 (en) Method for purifying compound that generates acid when irradiated with active light or radiation, method for producing active light sensitive or radiation sensitive resin composition, pattern forming method, and method for producing electronic device
WO2021177294A1 (en) Pattern forming method, method for producing electronic device, active light sensitive or radiation sensitive resin composition, and resist film
KR102661154B1 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, pattern formation method, resist film, manufacturing method of electronic device
KR102635086B1 (en) Photosensitive composition for EUV light, pattern formation method, manufacturing method of electronic device
WO2021065548A1 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern forming method, and electronic device manufacturing method
WO2021065549A1 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, method for forming pattern, and method for producing electronic device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20814366

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021522692

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20814366

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1